JP2023133474A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: As one of operation correspondence performances corresponding to operation of a performance button device 40 provided in a front door frame, there is a performance in which the performance button device 40 is switched from a first mode to a second mode having larger operation stroke of an operation button 721 than the first mode in a game round pertaining to the operation correspondence performance, and then successive hitting operation of the performance button device 40 is suggested. In this case, in the performance button device 40, the operation is detected by a detection sensor when the operation button 721 reaches a first operation detection position as an operation detection position in the second mode. An automatic successive hitting function is validated when the operation button 721 reaches an automatic successive hitting detection position in the inside of the first operation detection position. Automatic successive hitting is handled similarly as the case when the operation button 721 is hit successively by performing long-pressing operation so as to keep the operation button 721 in an automatic successive hitting detection position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 153

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won at an operating port provided in a gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur. Fluctuation display starts. If the lottery is won, a specific symbol combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2002-78904

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention level to the games.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
an operating means provided on the front of the gaming machine and having an operating section that is operated by a player in a predetermined direction;
A gaming machine comprising a production execution means for executing a production corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section,
a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the valid operation period;
and a period determination means for determining a period during which the operation section is located at the second detection position during the operation validity period,
The effect execution means is configured to perform a process when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means to have reached the first detection position reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determination means determines that the first detection position has been reached. It has means for executing a special performance as the operation corresponding performance when the determined period becomes a predetermined period,
The second detection position is set to be further back than the first detection position in the predetermined direction.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. It is a front view of an inner frame. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a perspective view of the game board unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the game board unit seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the inner frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a back pack unit. It is a front view of a front door frame. (a) A longitudinal sectional view showing the internal structure of the top lamp section, and (b) a timing chart showing the flow of light production. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp section disassembled into its main components. (a) A schematic diagram showing a light irradiation state during low-speed rotation, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a light irradiation state during high-speed rotation. (a) A partial enlarged view of the front door frame, and (b) a partial sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 15(a). It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process of an operation|movement opening. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to game performance. It is a flow chart showing variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start process for fluctuation. (a) A schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. (a) A flowchart illustrating processing corresponding to commands for pending display control by the MPU of the display control device, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the state of pending display. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a reservation notice by MPU of a main control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a pending command setting process by the MPU of the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for pending notice performance by MPU of a notification/performance control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing types of hold icons, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an outline of a preview effect. (a) A schematic diagram showing an outline of a first type preview performance, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an outline of a second type preview performance. It is a perspective view of the front door frame seen from the front. (a) A perspective view of the performance button device seen from the front of the game machine, and (b) a side view of the performance button device. It is an exploded perspective view showing the performance button device disassembled for each main component. It is a perspective view of the performance button device in a state where the side cover is omitted. It is a partially cutaway view of the production button device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation block disassembled into its main components. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the button unit disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as a main constituent operation unit. It is a sectional view of an operation block. (a) A perspective view of the operation block in the operation state, and (b) a sectional view of the operation block in the operation state. It is a perspective view of the performance button device which is a 2nd form. It is a perspective view showing a lift mechanism. (a) A perspective view of a rotor, (b) a plan view of a power transmission mechanism. (a) A sectional view of a lift mechanism in a first form, and (b) a sectional view of a lift mechanism in a second form. (a) A schematic diagram showing the movement of the lift mechanism when switching from the first form to the second form, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the movement of the lift mechanism when switching from the second form to the first form. (a) A side view of the production button device in the first form, and (b) a sectional view of the production button device in the first form. (a) A side view of the production button device in the second form, and (b) a sectional view of the production button device in the second form. (a) A side view of the production button device in the third form, and (b) a sectional view of the production button device in the third form. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of operations in the first mode. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of operations in the second mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the jackpot expectation level, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special performance. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the 1st special performance performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a performance pattern and the start timing of operation suggestion. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for super reaches A and B. It is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for super reach C. It is a flowchart showing the first special performance processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the first special effect A. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the first special effect C. A schematic diagram showing the movement of the production button device in the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and a detection position. (a) A schematic diagram for supplementing the flow of display during reach display, and (b) a schematic diagram showing types of effects added to characters. (a) A schematic diagram showing a relationship between an effect level and an effect level change trigger, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an effect update pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special effect execution process for the 2nd part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for cooperative display execution. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect in the second part. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect in the second part. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of the second special effect and the interlocking target. It is a schematic diagram showing a light emitting part of an annular illumination part and a movable presentation device. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and a detection position. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd special effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd special effect execution. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between shift patterns of notification targets and light emission targets. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when a second special effect A is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when a second special effect B is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when a second special effect C is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when a second special effect D is executed. (a) A schematic diagram showing the classification of the position of the operation button in the fourth embodiment, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the amount of protrusion and the generated torque. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of a third special performance. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 3rd special effects performed by MPU of a notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd special effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows torque change processing. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the third special performance occurs. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a third special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a third special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the display mode in the fifth embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing an outline of display in a second display mode, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an outline of display in a third display mode. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between display mode and variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 4th special effects performed by MPU of a notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 3rd normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the operation correspondence process for 3rd normal game state. It is a flowchart showing the process for the second normal game state. It is a flowchart showing operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the fourth special performance. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a fourth special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 6th special effects in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a first half part. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating switching between a free state and a hold state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a latter part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a sixth special effect. It is a timing chart showing the movement of the production button device. It is a schematic diagram comparing various seventh special effects in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 7th special effects performed by MPU of a notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st parts. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd part. It is a flowchart which shows the switching start process to a 2nd form. It is a flowchart which shows the switching speed change process. 5 is a timing chart showing how speeds are switched. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a seventh special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a seventh special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 8th special effects in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a first half part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a latter part. (a) A schematic diagram comparing various forms of the performance button device, and (b) a schematic diagram comparing various eighth special performances. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a format switch. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the eighth special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the eighth special performance. It is a flowchart which shows the 9th special effect setting process in 9th Embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram comparing various ninth special effects, and (b) a schematic diagram comparing differences in protrusion amounts at each protrusion level. (a) A schematic diagram showing a pattern of reaching LV3, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a pattern of reaching LV4. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 9th special effects. It is a flowchart showing final game reuse processing. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of reservations and the prominence level. It is a flowchart which shows the 10th special effect setting process in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 10th special effects. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of reservations and the prominence level. (a) A schematic diagram comparing various eleventh special effects in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 11th special effects performed by MPU of a notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows 11th special effect main processing. It is a flowchart which shows torque variable processing. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and operation resistance. It is a schematic diagram of the production button device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the height position adjustment process performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. 5 is a flowchart showing position control processing. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an operation stroke up to an operation detection position for each protrusion level. It is a schematic diagram comparing various twelfth special effects in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 12th special effects performed by MPU of a notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a first half part. It is a flowchart which shows processing for continuous operation. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a latter part. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the 12th special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the 12th special effect. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and position control in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous operation performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a flowchart which shows processing for automatic repeated hits. It is a flowchart which shows the torque control process for automatic continuous hits. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of an operation button and operation resistance. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting plate materials on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island equipment of a game parlor by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in island equipment such as a game hall.

A main part 12 of the gaming machine is supported by this outer frame 11 in an openable and closable state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and furthermore, the upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A lower support fitting 18 is fixed to the connecting portion. These upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18 constitute a support mechanism, and this support mechanism allows the main part 12 of the gaming machine to rotate from the left side to the base end side and to the right side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with this as the rotation tip side.

Note that a detection sensor that detects opening and closing of the gaming machine main section 12 is provided in the upper right portion of the outer frame 11, specifically, in the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the right frame portion, and detection information from this detection sensor is provided. The opening of the gaming machine main section 12 is monitored based on the following.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main part 12 of the gaming machine includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack disposed behind the inner frame 13. unit 15 (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that an inner frame 13 of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the front door frame 14 has the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation base end when viewed from the front. The tip side can be rotated forward. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the back pack unit 15 rotates on the left side when viewed from the front. It can be rotated backwards with the right side as the base end and the right side as the tip end.

Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 includes a synthetic resin frame 20 whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11, and a cover body attached to the front surface of the frame 20 and decorated with various decorations. 21, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 13. A generally elliptical window 22 (see FIG. 1) is formed in the center of the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The portion 22 is covered by a glass unit 30 from the back side of the front door frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 2, a glass unit installation part 23 is formed in the frame 20 so as to surround the window part 22. Specifically, the glass unit installation part 23 is arranged on the back side of the frame body 20 and is recessed toward the front of the Pachinko machine 10, and the window part 22 is arranged at the bottom thereof. The glass unit 30 is fitted into the glass unit installation portion 23 to restrict displacement in the vertical and horizontal directions.

The glass unit 30 includes a pair of transparent front and rear glass panels 31 and a glass holder 32 that holds the glass panels 31. The glass holder 32 has an annular frame formed along the window 22, and the glass panel 31 is housed in an area surrounded by the frame.

Referring again to FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 (more specifically, the cover body 21) is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps that emit light depending on the gaming situation. The light emitting means is constituted by an annular illumination section 24 that includes a light emitting body such as an LED along the periphery of the window section 22 . Further, at the upper left and upper right corners of the front door frame 14, speaker sections 27 are provided that output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state.

Below the window portion 22 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge 28 and a lower bulge 29 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. The upper bulge 28 is provided with an upper plate 33 that opens upward, and the lower bulge 29 is provided with a lower plate 34 that also opens upward. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side described later while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

A performance button device 40 that is manually operated by players is provided in a portion of the upper bulging portion 28 that is in front of the upper tray 33 (game ball storage area). The performance button device 40 is an operating device that allows the player to give a predetermined instruction during the course of the game for the purpose of performing a predetermined performance on the display screen of a symbol display device, etc., which will be described later.

A game ball firing handle 45 is provided at a position parallel to the lower bulging portion 29 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball firing handle 45, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back side of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is molded from synthetic resin, and has a front door-side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door-side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. A socket part 53 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 50. By partitioning the socket part 53 into left and right sides by a partition wall 54, the upper tray passage on the front door side is separated. An entrance portion and an entrance portion of the lower tray passage on the front door side are formed. The upper tray passage on the front door side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are connected on the upstream side to a game ball distribution section which will be described later, and the game balls that have entered the upper tray passage on the front door side are guided to the upper tray 33 and are passed through the lower tray passage on the front door side. The game balls entering the tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail based on FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, in FIG. 4, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted, similar to FIG. 2.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 60 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. Inner frame fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 4) of the front surface of the inner frame base body 60. Moreover, bearing fittings 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 1) of the back surface of the front door frame 14 in correspondence with the inner frame fittings 71 and 72. The inner frame fittings 71 and 72 are formed with shaft parts, and when these shaft parts are inserted into the bearing holes of the bearing fittings 57 and 58 of the front door frame 14, the front door frame 14 is moved relative to the inner frame 13. Rotatably supported. In other words, these inner frame fittings 71 and 72 and bearing fittings 57 and 58 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The locking device 75 has a plurality of front door hook members 76 extending toward the front door frame 14. In correspondence with these front door hook members 76, a plurality of hook receiving members 59 extending toward the inner frame 13 are provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (see FIG. 2). When the front door hook member 76 is caught on the hook receiving member 59, the front door frame 14 is locked in a closed state. Further, as shown in FIG. 3 , the locking device 75 includes an inner frame hook member 77 that extends toward the rear of the inner frame 13 . When these inner frame hook members 77 are caught on the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, the game machine main section 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed at the lower right corner of the inner frame base body 60. The cylinder lock 78 is integrated into the locking device 75, and its tip portion (keyhole portion) is exposed to the front of the Pachinko machine 10 through a hole provided in the front door frame 14. By turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and by turning the key to the left, the locking of the inner frame 13 from the outer frame 11 is released. .

An accommodating recess 61 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed approximately at the center of the front surface of the inner frame base body 60. The housing recess 61 is recessed at the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and defines a housing space for housing the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 60 is fitted into the housing space. It is in a state.

The game board unit 80 includes a game area forming body 80a in which a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the front side, and is provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and includes various game parts (for example, a variable display unit, a control unit, etc.) to be described later. device, a movable presentation mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are mounted on the base body 251 and are integrated with the back block 80b. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front part of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the game area PE is covered by the glass unit 30 (specifically, the rear glass panel 31). The glass unit 30 is configured such that the gap between the rear glass panel 31 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE are arranged so that they are not lined up one after the other at the same location. This suppresses ball clogging in the gaming area PE.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. 5 is a front view of the game board unit 80, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the rear. In addition, in FIG. 6, the configuration that can be visually recognized through the game area forming body 80a is also indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the appearance is similar to that when the game board unit 80 is actually viewed.

A plurality of large and small openings are formed in the game area forming body 80a, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game area forming body 80a. As shown in FIG. 5, each opening is provided with a general winning hole 81, a variable winning device 82, operating holes 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc., respectively. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entering portion, and the detection result is Based on this, benefits such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) are given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowest part of the gaming area forming body 80a, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry areas are discharged from the gaming area PE through the out port 89. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out port 89, the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning". express.

In addition, a large number of nail members 93 are installed in the game area forming body 80a in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 94 are installed. has been done. Various configurations such as the nail member 93 and the windmill 94 differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winnings to the above-mentioned general prize opening 81 etc. occur with a moderate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the gaming area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the gaming area forming body 80a. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 252 and the like belonging to the back block 80b are located, and the variable display unit 252 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). There is. In addition, in FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the aperture cover 86 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and a state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible is shown.

Operating ports 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc. are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating ports 83a, 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a disposed below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b disposed directly below the upper operating port 83a. The (lottery-triggered ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening/closing ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit, thereby preventing the ball from entering the lower operating port 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (assisting state) in which ball entry is possible or easy, and a closed state (non-assisting state) in which ball entry is not possible or difficult.

In the gaming area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position upstream of the lower operation opening 83b (more specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 252), and the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is triggered. If the lottery results in a winner, the electric accessory 91 will be switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, when a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to increase the advantage of the lower operating port 83b over the upper operating port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of pieces to be dispensed by the lower operating port 83b to be larger than the number of pieces to be dispensed by the upper operating port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 82 is formed with a grand prize opening leading to the back side of the gaming area forming body 80a, and an opening/closing member (opening/closing member) for opening and closing the grand prize opening. An opening/closing door is provided as means). The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state) in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter the game ball, and a closed state (non-auxiliary state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game balls. In addition, the opening/closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the gaming area forming body 80a, and under normal conditions, the opening/closing door is maintained in the closed state and the internal lottery If you win the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) in (Jackpot: when the result is a transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), you will be able to switch to the open state. It has become.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. The opening mode of the variable prize winning device 82 in the opening/closing execution mode is, for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10) have been won as one round, and multiple rounds (e.g., 16 rounds or 4 rounds) are The upper limit is set so that the opening and closing of the door is repeated.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display unit 252. The variable display unit 252 includes a symbol display device 253 that variably displays symbols (fluctuating display) using winnings to the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be displayed variably. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). Note that the symbol display device 253 does not necessarily need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 80a so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from the front side thereof, and when it is fixed in this way, it stands up from the front side of the game area forming body 80a. The gap between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 30 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are prevented from colliding with the symbol display device 253, and the falling path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is set so that the variable display unit 252 (more specifically, the center frame 95) is on the right side. There are two main routes: one that detours from the center and one that detours from the left side.

On the upper surface of the frame part constituting the lower part of the center frame 95, a stage part is formed on which the game ball can roll left and right. Game balls flowing in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through the warp passages also formed in the center frame 95. The stage section is configured so that the game ball that has reached the stage section can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, which increases the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage section. Contributing to In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by the transparent opening cover 86 to prevent the game balls that have reached the stage from moving toward the back block 80b (variable display unit 252). regulated.

The operating ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since it is possible to shift to a special gaming state using a winning at the operating ports 83a, 83b as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not a winning occurs at the operating ports 83a, 83b, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is paid to the symbol display device 253. The fact that the operating ports 83a and 83b are provided closer to the variable display unit 252 is a contrivance for concentrating the player's attention around the variable display unit 252.

A game area dividing member 99 that defines a game area PE together with a guide rail 100, which will be described later, is disposed at the right end of the game area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the game board unit 80, which will be described later). A stopper member with which a game ball flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collides is provided in the game area dividing member 99. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member will flow down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. In other words, the stopper member is provided with an energy reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area dividing member 99, and a part thereof is arranged to face the glass unit 30. A main display section D on which a predetermined picture or the like is displayed is provided in this opposing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device to be described later, and the display contents of the main display section D are controlled by the main control device.

The main display section D includes an upper operating port display section DU that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating port display section DU that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the lower operating port 83b. and a mouth display section DL. In the display unit DU for the upper operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the upper operating port 83a as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery conducted based on a winning to the upper operating port 83a is performed. The results are clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the upper operating port 83a is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the upper operating port display unit DU, and as a stop result. After a predetermined pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display section DL for the lower operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the lower operating port 83b as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery conducted based on a winning to the lower operating port 83b is performed. The results are clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the lower operating port display section DL, and the stopped result corresponds to the jackpot result. After a predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on a winning to either of the operating ports 83a, 83b, a variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display unit DL, DU, and after the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the corresponding The period in which the symbols are stopped and displayed until a predetermined stop display time (stop display period or fixed display period) elapses (until the fixed display ends) corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a single display area is provided and a variable display is performed in the single display area even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ports 83a and 83b. In this case, it is also possible to set the period from when the variable display starts in the single display area to when the fixed display ends after the variable display is stopped as one game round.

In addition to the above-mentioned two display sections, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through-gate display section DS that displays lottery results based on winnings in the through-gate 84. In the through gate display section DS, a winning in the through gate 84 is used as a trigger to display changing symbols, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the through gate 84 is displayed. be made explicit. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 84 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS and a variable display is performed. After this is stopped, the state shifts to the open state. In the electrically powered open state, the electrically powered accessory 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the main display portion D of the main display unit 87 displays the number of held balls. A display section for the number of reservations is provided.

The main display section D detailed above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 30 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections. Because of this, visibility is guaranteed.

To explain again using FIG. 4, below the accommodation recess 61 (game board unit 80) in the inner frame base body 60, there is a game where a game ball is fired into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball firing handle 45. A ball firing mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball launcher located at the launch standby position. The main components include a ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 to which various components 111 to 113 are attached, and the base plate 114 is connected to the inner frame base body 60 via a reinforcing plate to be described later. installed.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. A ball stopper is arranged near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112 to keep the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the firing standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source/launch control device that will be described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply/launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is moved to the game board unit 80 side. The ball is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with a later-described gaming area dividing member 99 (see FIG. 5), defines the gaming area PE so that the outer shape of the gaming area PE is approximately circular. Further, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112→guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104→exit portion 105). In addition, in the game board unit 80, on the forward side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a back-preventing member 106 that prevents the game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning into the guide path 103. This prevents the game ball that reached the game area PE first from interfering with the launch of the following game ball.

The guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip end of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with a gap in between. A foul ball passage 55 (see FIG. 3) is provided below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 55 is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide path 103 as foul balls, those foul balls will enter the foul ball path 55 through the gap. becomes. The foul ball passage 55 communicates with the lower tray passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 55 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. 1 and the like. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be fired.

In addition, the inner frame base body 60 has a locking device that can be switched between a locked state that prevents removal of the game board unit 80 from the housing recess 61 and an unlocked state that allows removal of the game board unit 80. There are multiple locations. The lock device has a contact portion that contacts the front surface of the game board unit 80 in the locked state, and when the contact portion contacts the front surface of the game board unit 80, the front door frame 14 of the game board unit 80 Displacement to the side will be suppressed.

In the inner frame base body 60, a through hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14), which penetrates the inner frame base body 60 in the front and back direction. A passage forming member 121 is disposed so as to cover the passage forming member 121. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 60 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution section to be described later. Further, a socket part 53 (see FIG. 2) of a passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a socket part 53 (see FIG. 2) of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side. An upper plate passage is arranged, and a front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

A shutter 124 is provided below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 60 to restrict the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123. The shutter 124 is supported by the inner frame base body 60 in a state that it can be switched between a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the game balls from flowing out, and a permissive position where the game balls are allowed to flow out. There is. Further, a biasing member that biases the shutter 124 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame base body 60, and when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the biasing member's biasing force is Therefore, the shutter 124 remains in the blocking position. This avoids the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out when the front door frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage 122 or the main body side lower tray passage 123. . On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 124 is pushed back to the permissible position by the receptacle 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage are in communication with the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage, respectively, and movement of the game ball is allowed.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 60 and game board unit 80) will be explained based on FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation proximal end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60. As shown in FIG. Bearing parts 133 are formed in the bearing fitting 132 at vertically spaced intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 60 in a closed state.

As already explained, a central opening 64 that penetrates the inner frame base 60 in the thickness direction and is open to the back side of the inner frame base 60 is formed at the bottom of the accommodation recess 61 in the inner frame base 60. The central opening 64 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 accommodated in the accommodation recess 61. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back side of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the central opening 64. Here, the configuration of the back side of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 that is open to the side of the game area forming body 80a, and when this base body 251 is fixed to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, the game area is formed. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging movable presentation mechanisms, decorative members that can emit light, etc., and the back side thereof is a control device for controlling these various components and the variable display unit 252 (design display device). 253).

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base body 60, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 253 (see FIG. 5) and its symbol display device are attached to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving 253 is attached. The symbol display device 253 and the display control device are arranged one on top of the other in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 60) such that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side. Further, a notification/presentation control device 143 is mounted on the back side of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification/effect control device 143 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later.The notification/effect control board is transparent. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 143 so as to cover the base body 96 from behind. The main controller unit 160 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b), and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 consisting of, etc.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 serving as a sealing means, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing parts 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing part 164 as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in an unsealable manner. The base and the box cover are joined together in an unopenable manner. The sealing process performed by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening of the box after it has been sealed, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after opening the package, it is possible to reseal it. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole among the plurality of box sealing parts 164. When the board box 163 is unsealed in the event of a malfunction of the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing part into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is removed. cut. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, if the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163 that the board box 163 has been opened in an unauthorized manner.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a base sealing portion 165. Specifically, the base sealing part 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin like the box sealing part 164, and when the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole, the base sealing part 165 is connected to the board box 163. The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. This makes it easier to identify the fact that the board box 163 has been removed illegally.

A portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the gaming area forming body 80a has a portion corresponding to the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, the operating openings 83a and 83b, and a downstream side. A collection passageway (not shown) is formed on the side that gathers at one place. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general prize opening 81 etc. are configured to gather below the game board unit 80 via the collection path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 89 also communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

In addition, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b includes a general winning hole detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 81 as a detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entering portions, and an operating hole 83a. , 83b is installed, and a detection sensor for the operating port is installed to detect the game ball that has entered the ball, and a winning detection mechanism is constituted by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signals) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by a back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage panel, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, as shown in FIG. 212. The protective cover section 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the top surface are closed, and only the bottom surface is open, and has a size sufficient to at least surround the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal board 213 is provided on the upper part of the base portion 211. The external output terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and a wiring WH1 connecting the gaming hall side management control device (hall computer HC) and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to these output terminals. Various signals outputted from the external output terminal board 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the status of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming situation, etc. based on these various signals. It is configured to be understood.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins 214 are connected to the bearings provided on the inner frame 13. By being inserted through the portion 133, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions into which fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portions, it is applied to the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism section 202 is disposed on the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 which is disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Ru. A tank rail 222 that slopes gently toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls put out by the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls put out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage described later, and has an inner opening that is connected to the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. has been done.

A discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and back directions. A discharge passage opened to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage panel facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are delivered to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. be discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a mounting base 241 having a horizontally long shape, and a dispensing control device 242 and a power source/firing control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 242 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state recovery switch 245 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power source/launch control device 243, a power source/launch control board is housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and further controls the launch of the game ball as the player operates the game ball launch handle 45. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball firing mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to an on state (on state) or a cut off state (off state).

Here, this pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, and even in the event of a power outage, it retains the state at the time of the power outage, and returns to the state at the time of the power outage when recovering from the power outage. It is now possible to do so. For example, when the power is shut off in a normal procedure, such as when a game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided on the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine and exposing the back side of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main section 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches mentioned above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the gaming machine is closed, and can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by someone who does not own the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudulent person). is difficult.

In a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10, a lottery such as a jackpot is executed based on balls entering the operating ports 83a and 83b, and the lottery results are displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) provided in the game board unit 80. ) will be notified. Therefore, during the game, the player's attention tends to be particularly directed to the game board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253). In view of such circumstances, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) shown in this embodiment is designed with consideration for players, such as ensuring visibility when playing games.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 11, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall, the game board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253) is It is configured so that it is positioned in front of the person's face. In other words, the player's face is located in an area in front of the glass panel 31 and in front of the symbol display device 253 (specific area SE to be described later). This makes it easier for the game board unit 80 (particularly the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253) to fit within the field of view of the player P.

As already explained, when playing a game, it is necessary to manually operate the game ball firing handle 45 to fire the game ball. Therefore, the distance between the pachinko machine 10 and the player tends to become short. In this embodiment, a first movable presentation device 300, which is a light-emitting type movable presentation device, is disposed in a portion of the front door frame 14 above the game board unit 80. Although there are individual differences in the extent of human visual field, it is approximately 180 to 200 degrees in the horizontal direction (the range that can be seen with both eyes at the same time is approximately 120 degrees), and approximately 60 degrees upward and downward in the vertical direction. It is approximately 70 degrees to the side. Therefore, when the player is looking at the symbol display device 253, there is a high possibility that the first movable presentation device 300 will be located in a blind spot out of the player's visual field. That is, there is a high possibility that the first movable presentation device 300 will be out of the player's visual field (the range that can be seen without moving the eyes).

In particular, when the window portion 22 of the front door frame 14 is enlarged as the game board unit 80 becomes larger, the arrangement of the first movable presentation device 300 becomes more constrained as shown in FIG. 11. , the possibility that the above-mentioned inconvenience will occur increases. Furthermore, even if the first movable presentation device 300 is in the player's field of vision, if the first movable presentation device 300 is located near the boundary between the inside and outside of the player's field of view, the color and movement may change. It becomes difficult to grasp, and the visibility level (discrimination level) decreases significantly.

For the above reasons, even if a light effect is performed using the first movable effect device 300, it may not be able to appeal well to the players who are gazing at the display screen 253a, and there is a possibility that the light effect may be overlooked. occurs. Therefore, even if the first movable presentation device 300 is provided with a light presentation function (notification/presentation function for players), there is a concern that it may not function properly. In the first place, if the first movable presentation device 300 is not provided with the function of presentation and notification to the player, but is provided with the function of notification to other players, the hall manager, etc., the above-mentioned inconvenience will not occur. Although this does not occur, the above-mentioned inconvenience will occur when the first movable presentation device 300 is used as a means for presentation and notification to players. It is certainly possible to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience by increasing the distance between the player and the gaming machine, but such a solution may cause other inconveniences such as a decrease in the visibility and operability of the gaming board unit 80. can be invited.

One of the features of the first movable presentation device 300 shown in this embodiment is that measures are taken to address the above-mentioned inconveniences that occur when the first movable presentation device 300 is provided with a light presentation function. . The first movable presentation device 300 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 12(a) and 13. FIG. 12(a) is a partial sectional view (partial sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10) showing the internal structure of the first movable presentation device 300, and FIG. 13 shows the first movable presentation device 300 disassembled into its main components. FIG.

(First movable production device 300)
As shown in FIG. 12(a), the first movable presentation device 300 includes a light emitting device 301 as a core equipped with a light source, and a housing 302 forming the outer shell of the first movable presentation device 300. A light emitting device 301 is housed in a housing 302 and is fixed to the frame body 20 and the cover body 21.

The housing 302 has a cover body 310 made of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. The cover body 310 has a hemispherical shape that is open upward (see FIG. 12), and its upper open portion is covered by a lid body 320 that functions as an attachment portion to the frame body 20 and the like. By combining these cover body 310 and lid body 320, a housing space for the light emitting device 301 is defined.

The lid 320 is dish-shaped, and an opening 322 is formed in the bottom 321 of the lid 320 to connect the internal space of the lid 320 to the housing space. A relay board 330 is disposed on the bottom 321 so as to cover the opening 322 from the side opposite to the accommodation area (from above). The light emitting device 301 is electrically connected to the notification/effect control device 143 via the relay board 330, and performs (operates) a light effect based on a signal from the notification/effect control device 143.

The light emitting device 301 housed in the housing 302 has a light emitting unit 350 that is controlled by the notification/effect control device 143. The light emitting unit 350 includes a columnar light emitting block 355 to which a plurality of light emitters 356 (more specifically, LEDs) are attached, and a pedestal 351 to which the light emitting block 355 is fixed. The pedestal 351 has a cylindrical shape extending vertically (see FIG. 12), and is integrated with the housing 302 by having an upper flange 352 formed at its upper end fixed to the bottom 321. Further, a lower flange portion 353 formed at the lower end functions as a mounting portion to which a light emitting block 355 is attached. The hollow portion of the pedestal 351 communicates with the opening 322, and the light emitting block 355 and the relay board 330 are connected by wiring through the hollow portion and the opening 322.

In this embodiment, a portion of the circumferential surface of the light emitting block 355 other than the portion facing the front side of the game machine (side surface and back surface: a portion facing the central axis CL1, which will be described later) is the area where the light emitting body 356 is disposed. There is. This prevents the light from the light emitting block 355 from directly irradiating the front of the gaming machine. More specifically, the range of light irradiated from the light emitting unit 350 (light emitting block 355) is regulated to be behind the gaming machine and diagonally behind.

The light emitting device 301 is equipped with a light reflecting mechanism that reflects light from the light emitting block 355 toward the front of the gaming machine. The light reflection mechanism is movable, and when the light reflection mechanism operates, the irradiation direction of the reflected light, that is, the irradiation direction of the light from the first movable presentation device 300 changes. Hereinafter, a variable light reflection mechanism that diversifies the direction of light irradiation will be referred to as a variable mechanism 340.

(Variable mechanism 340)
The variable mechanism 340 includes a movable body 360 provided with a reflector 364 as a light reflecting means, and a holder member 370 as a holding means for holding the movable body 360, and the holder member 370 is attached to the lid 320. It is integrated with the housing 302 by.

First, a configuration related to attaching the variable mechanism 340 to the lid 320 will be described. An annular convex portion 323 is formed on the bottom portion 321 of the lid body 320 so as to surround the installation area (upper flange portion 352) of the light emitting unit 350. The annular convex portion 323 has a cylindrical shape, and is configured such that its central axis is coaxial with the opening 322 and the light emitting unit 350 (pedestal 351).

The holder member 370 has a cylindrical portion 371 surrounding the light emitting unit 350, and is configured such that the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 371 is equal to the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 323. The holder member 370 is arranged such that the annular projection 323 is inserted therein, and the inner surface of the cylindrical portion 371 is in surface contact with the outer surface of the annular projection 323. The central axis of the annular convex portion 323 and the central axis of the holder member 370 (cylindrical portion 371) are coaxial, and the holder member 370 is rotated by the lid 320 while being allowed to rotate about the same central axis CL1. Retained. Note that the detailed configuration of the holding structure is arbitrary as long as the holder member 370 can be held rotatably.

A motor 381 is disposed at the bottom 321 of the lid 320 as a drive unit that rotates the holder member 370. The motor 381 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143 via the relay board 330, and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/performance control device 143. By transmitting the driving force of the motor 381 to the holder member 370, the holder member 370 rotates about the central axis CL1.

The cylindrical portion 371 of the holder member 370 is formed such that its lower end is at the same height as the lower end of the pedestal 351 of the light emitting unit 350, and the light emitting block 355 is located at a lower end than the area surrounded by the holder member 370. It also protrudes downward. This prevents the light from the light emitting block 355 from being blocked by the holder member 370.

At the lower end of the holder member 370, a pair of left and right extensions 372 are formed that extend to the same side (downward) as the light emitting block 355. The extending portions 372 face each other with the light emitting unit 350 (specifically, the central axis CL1) in between, and the shaft portion 373 is fixed so as to straddle the extending portions 372.

The movable body 360 has a main body part 361 formed of long plates arranged in parallel (see FIG. 12), and a bearing hole 362 into which a shaft part 373 is inserted is formed at an intermediate position of the main body part 361. By engaging the bearing hole 362 and the shaft portion 373, the movable body 360 is held by the holder member 370 in a state where rotation (posture change) about the shaft portion 373 is permitted.

The reflector 364 is disposed at one end of the main body 361, and a weight 363 is disposed at the other end of the main body 361. The weight of the weight 363 is set so that the center of gravity GP1 of the movable body 360 is closer to the other end than the shaft portion 373 (rotation center). By shifting the center of rotation and the center of gravity GP1, the movable body 360 is tilted so that the reflector 364 is on the upper side and the weight 363 is on the lower side.

Here, a stopper part 366 is formed in the main body part 361 of the movable body 360 to prevent further rotation by coming into contact with the holder member 370 (lower end part of the cylindrical part 371). The state in which the stopper portion 366 abuts the lower end of the cylindrical portion 371 and the movable body 360 is tilted is the standby state of the movable body 360. Note that in this state, the center of gravity GP1 is deviated from the central axis CL1.

When a drive signal is input to the motor 381 from the notification/performance control device 143, the holder member 370 starts rotating about the central axis CL1. Following this, the movable body 360 held by the holder member 370 also rotates.

At the initial stage when rotation starts from a standby state (stationary state), the rotational speed is low due to resistance such as friction, and as the rotation continues, it is accelerated and the rotational speed gradually increases. After the rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed, the rotation shifts to steady rotation. At this time, as the rotational speed increases, the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 also increases. As the centrifugal force increases in this way, the weight 363 rises and the reflector 364 falls against gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane gradually decreases.

When the rotational speed of the movable body 360 decreases due to, for example, the motor 381 stopping, the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 becomes smaller. As the centrifugal force decreases in this manner, the weight 363 descends and the reflector 364 rises due to gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane gradually increases.

Here, based on the operation mode of the variable mechanism 340, the flow of light production by the first movable production device 300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12(b) and 14. FIG. 12(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of light production, and FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the direction of light irradiation in each state.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the light production starts at timing t1, the output of the light emission signal (power supply) to the light emitter 356 of the light emission unit 350 is started, and the drive signal to the motor 381 is started. starts outputting. As a result, light from the light emitting unit 350 is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine by the reflector 364 of the movable body 360.

Note that the reflective surface 365 of the reflector 364 has a curved shape that is convex on the side opposite to the rotation center, so that diffusion of reflected light is suppressed. In other words, the light from the light emitting unit 350 is irradiated in the direction of the reflective surface 365 while its spread is suppressed by the reflective surface 365. In other words, the reflector 364 (reflective surface 365) is provided with a function of defining the irradiation direction (optical axis) of the light from the first movable presentation device 300.

The rotational speed gradually increases until the timing t2, which is a predetermined period after the timing t1, is reached. The predetermined period is set so that the number of rotations of movable body 360 is at least greater than a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). In this embodiment, the movable body 360 is rotatable, but by configuring the movable body 360 to rotate at least once during the predetermined period, the movable body 360 rotates at least once in the first irradiation state described later. It is ensured that the light is directed towards the front of the gaming machine.

Here, the light irradiation mode from timing t1 to timing t2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). During this period, the reflector 364 (the optical axis defined by the reflector) faces diagonally downward. Therefore, the light from the first movable presentation device 300 is radiated diagonally downward. Specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 350 is emitted in the horizontal direction, but its direction is changed by the reflector 364 located on the extension thereof. The direction of the reflector 364 is determined so that the direction of light irradiation passes through a specific area SE in front of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a).

As already explained, the specific area SE is an area where the head HD (more specifically, the eyes) of the player P is assumed to be located. Therefore, the light to the specific area SE is irradiated toward the player P. Hereinafter, a state in which the movable body 360 is tilted and light is irradiated toward the specific area SE will be referred to as a first irradiation state. In the first irradiation state, the light is irradiated toward the player P, so the player can understand that the light has been irradiated.

Thereafter, at timing ta2 when the rotational speed increases and reaches a predetermined speed, as shown in FIG. 14(b), the tilt of the movable body 360 decreases due to the above-mentioned centrifugal force, and its posture becomes almost horizontal. It changes like this. As a result, the direction of light irradiation becomes substantially horizontal, and irradiation of light toward the specific area SE is avoided. In other words, the light from the first movable performance device 300 passes over the head of the player P, and irradiation of the light toward the player P is avoided. Hereinafter, a state in which irradiation of light toward the specific area SE is avoided (a state in which the direction of light irradiation has changed to the outside of the gaming machine compared to the first irradiation state) will be referred to as a second irradiation state.

Even in the second irradiation state, the blinking state of the first movable performance device 300 can be visually confirmed by the player P. However, in this case, the amount of light reaching the eyes of the player P is smaller than in the first irradiation state. Thereby, even when looking directly at the first movable performance device 300, it is suppressed from causing discomfort such as glare to the player. In this embodiment, the light is emitted through the curved cover body 310, and the light is diffused when passing through the cover body 310. Therefore, when the first movable presentation device 300 is viewed directly in the second irradiation state, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first movable presentation device 300 is blinking.

After the first movable effect device 300 enters the second irradiation state, the light effect continues in the second irradiation state for a period longer than the period of light effect in the first irradiation state. That is, the output of the light emission signal (power supply) to the light emission unit 350 is continued until the timing t3 when the light effect ends. When the output of the light emitting signal stops at timing t3, the light emitting unit 350 turns off. Thereafter, the output of the drive signal to the motor 381 is stopped at timing t4.

When the motor 381 stops, the rotational speed of the movable body 360 and the holder member 370 rapidly decreases due to resistance such as friction, and the return to the standby state is completed at timing t5. However, since the light emitting unit 350 has already been turned off at the timing t3, no light is emitted toward the player during this return process.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is designed so that a part of the main part 12 (front door frame 14) of the game machine bulges out toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when installed in an island facility of a game hall or the like. A second movable performance device 400, which is a movable performance device, is disposed in this bulged portion. Here, the configuration of the second movable presentation device 400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 2 and 15. FIG. 15(a) is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and FIG. 15(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first movable performance device 300 (partial cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 15(a)). be.

(Second movable production device 400)
As shown in FIG. 2, in a portion of the cover body 21 of the front door frame 14 located above the window portion 22, a bulging portion 435 that bulges out toward the front of the game is formed. The bulging amount of the bulging portion 435 gradually increases from both left and right ends toward the center, and bulges out in a convex manner toward the front of the gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 15(1), the central part of the bulging part 435, more specifically, the rear part of the first movable effect device 300 that constitutes a part of the annular illumination part 24, has a second movable effect. A housing portion 436 is formed to house the device 400. That is, two gaming machines are housed in the bulging portion 435, with the first movable presentation device 300 on the front side and the second movable presentation device 400 on the rear side.

The housing portion 436 has a concave shape that is open upward, and a portion of the second movable presentation device 400 is exposed through the open portion. The second movable performance device 400 has a decoration body 410 whose outer periphery is decorated with a pattern or the like. The decoration body 410 is held by a holding portion 438 formed on a side wall portion 437 of the housing portion 436 in a state where it can rotate back and forth about the rotation center axis CL2. The decoration body 410 moves to a standby position in which protrusion from the housing part 436 is suppressed by rotating around the rotation center axis CL2 and a performance position in which it protrudes from the housing part 436 to the outside (upward) of the gaming machine. It's possible.

Three surface portions are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 410 so as to be lined up in the rotating direction of the decorative body 410. Specifically, a first plane part 411, a second plane part 412, and a curved part 413 sandwiched between the two plane parts 411 and 412 are formed, and the cross section is formed to have a substantially fan shape. A key part of the fan-shaped decorative body 410 is held by the holding portion 438, and the rotation center axis CL2 and the center of gravity GP2 of the decorative body 410 are offset.

As shown in FIG. 15(b1), when the decorative body 410 is placed in the standby position, the second plane portion 412 comes into contact with the rear wall portion 439 of the accommodating portion 436, so that the decorative body 410 is rotated by its own weight. movement is blocked. In other words, the rear wall portion 439 functions as a stopper. In this state, the first plane part 411 is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the frame 20, and the open part of the housing part 436 is closed by the first plane part 411. The curved surface portion 413 remains within the housing portion 436, making it impossible to visually recognize the curved surface portion 413 from the outside.

The second movable performance device 400 is provided with a solenoid 420 that constitutes a driving means for the decoration body 410. The solenoid 420 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and is configured to operate based on a signal from the notification/performance control device 143. When performing a performance by the second movable performance device 400, a drive signal is output to the notification/performance control device 143 to excite the solenoid 420. When the solenoid 420 is excited, the decorative body 410 is pushed by the plunger of the solenoid 420, and the decorative body 410 rotates in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the decorative body 410 reaches the presentation position, the protrusion 415 formed on the second plane portion 412 of the decorative body 410 hits the stopper portion 440 provided in the accommodating portion 436. This prevents further rotation in the predetermined direction. In this state, the curved surface portion 413 protrudes from the accommodating portion 436, and the curved surface portion 413 is permitted to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Note that the decorative body 410 has a built-in light emitting body (LED), and when a performance using the second movable performance device 400 is executed, the light from the light emitting body is directed to the front side of the gaming machine through the curved surface part 413. is irradiated to. By causing the decorative body 410 to emit light in this manner, changes in the appearance of the second movable presentation device 400 are emphasized.

When the performance by the decoration body 410 is finished, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 420 is stopped, and the solenoid 420 is in a de-energized state. As a result, the decorative body 410 returns from the presentation position to the standby position due to its own weight (see FIG. 15(b)→FIG. 15(a)). Incidentally, the second movable presentation device 400 may be provided with a biasing means such as a spring, and the decoration body 410 may be urged to move to the standby position by the biasing force of the biasing means.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block in FIG. 16.

An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. It is an element that includes a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604, may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, etc. are connected to the input side of the MPU 602. The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605.

As part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a that detects a winning in the general winning opening 81, a detection sensor 391b that detects a winning in the variable winning device 82, a detection sensor 391c that detects a winning in the variable winning device 82, A detection sensor 391d that detects a winning ball into the upper operating port 83a, a detection sensor 391e that detects a winning ball into the lower operating port 83b, and a detection sensor 391f that detects a ball entering the through gate 84 are connected to the main control device. In the MPU 602 of 162, winning determination (ball hitting determination) for each ball entering section is performed. Furthermore, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a and lower operating port 83b, and also executes a support occurrence lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84.

A power outage monitoring board 605, a payout control device 242, and a notification/performance control device 143 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entering portions such as the above-mentioned operation ports 83a and 83b. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When a winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when a winning to the upper operating port 83a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the paying out of three game balls is output, and a winning to the lower operating port 83b is specified. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

The main control device 162 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command to the notification/performance control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 602, a variable prize drive unit that opens and closes the opening/closing body (for example, the shutter member 88) of the variable prize winning device 82, an electric accessory drive unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b, and A main display unit 87 is connected. The main control board 601 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning prize drive unit so that the variable winning prize device 82 is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 602 so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Furthermore, the MPU 602 executes display control of the main display section of the main display unit 87.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602, and through this external output terminal board 213 ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information regarding lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming situation, etc. on the hall computer HC.

The power outage monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control device 243, and the power outage monitoring board 605 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243. It has the ability to monitor. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power source/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 601, payout control device 242, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power source/launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 143 is provided with a notification/performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU includes a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM. It has a built-in RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be integrated into separate chips. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp part 24, speaker part 27, movable performance devices 300, 400, etc. provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. At the same time, it also controls the display control device 142.

The display control device 142 executes display control of the symbol display device 253 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 143. In this case, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 253 (for example, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, the content of the reach performance, etc.) and the pattern based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The stop display mode (the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed upon completion of the variable display) is determined.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 602 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, settings for the display on the main display unit 87 (main display section D), general settings for the symbol display on the symbol display device 253, etc. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 17, there is a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to judge the jackpot type such as a variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a symbol. A reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the display device 253 is off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and an operating port display section DL of the main display unit 87, A variation type counter CS that determines the variable display time of the symbols in the DU and the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 253 is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b should be placed in the electric role release state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as a reserved ball storage means to store acquired information when a winning occurs in the actuation openings 83a and 83b. It is stored in area 632.

The holding ball storage area 632 includes a holding area RE for an operating port and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. In accordance with the winning history in the openings 83a and 83b, numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as pending information in any area Ra1. ~ Stored in Ra8. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when winnings to the operating ports 83a and 83b occur multiple times in a row, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the following order: -> 5th area Ra5 -> 6th area Ra6 -> 7th area Ra7 -> 8th area Ra8. By providing eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, up to four (total eight) winning histories for each operating port 83a, 83b can be stored pending storage. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area stores the number of stored reserved information acquired and stored based on winnings to the operating ports 83a and 83b. Information for identification is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the actuation port display parts DL and DU of the main display unit 87, At the start of one game round, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the operating openings 83a, 83b.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 621 as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained.

In the win/fail table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information also consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and is set in 10 types from "1" to "10", and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "36", and "67". , "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", "272" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are 1:1. are associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of "0" to "299" of random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referenced during the lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced during the lottery. Referenced. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information that results in a jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are 10 pieces of numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. The probability of winning is higher. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the operating opening 83a, 83b.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area serving as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. As such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (special game result corresponding to low probability) and a variable jackpot result (special game result corresponding to high probability) are set.

For normal jackpot results, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and after the support mode shifts, high-frequency support is provided until the number of games reaches the end standard number (specifically, 100 times). This is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. Note that after the end reference number of times has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state winning, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

In addition, in the distribution table, "0 to 9" correspond to the normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to the probability variable jackpot results, but the distribution of these numbers is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, a difference is provided so that the allocation based on winnings to the lower operating port 83b is more advantageous to the player than the allocation based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot result is roughly divided into two results with different advantages, specifically, the 16R probability variable jackpot result in which the number of rounds is "16" and the 4R probability variable jackpot result in which the number of rounds is "4", When the distribution based on winnings to the lower operating port 83b results in a variable probability jackpot result, compared to the case where the distribution based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a results in a variable probability jackpot result, the structure is such that a 16R probability variable jackpot result is more likely to result. ing.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the operating openings 83a, 83b. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually depending on the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the structure related to the variable display of symbols in each game round and the contents of the variable display. In addition, in the following description, FIGS. 18 and 19 will be referred to as appropriate. 18 and 19 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The display control device 142 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM contains data for nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9" (see Figures 19(a) to (i)) and data for sub-symbols that are not numbered. (see FIG. 19(j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 18A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the display screen 253a is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is now possible to do so. Further, five effective lines are set on the display screen 253a, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any active line. When the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a jackpot video is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a variable probability jackpot result.

In addition, considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the first symbol row). 2 symbol row), and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

Among the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, some of them, for example, A combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and in some cases where a variable jackpot result occurs and when a normal jackpot result occurs, For example, a combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 253 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be vertical.

On the display screen 253a, a pending display area NE is set in the lower part of the variable display area ME, which includes a variable display area for the upper symbol row, a variable display area for the middle symbol, and a variable display region for the lower symbol. ing. The reservation display area NE is a reservation number display area divided so that unit reservation display areas Da1 to Da8 of the same number as the maximum reservation number when game balls enter the operating ports 83a and 83b are lined up in the left and right direction. Da is provided.

Specifically, when game balls enter the operating ports 83a and 83b, the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 for each (8 balls in total), and the reserved number display area Da corresponds to this, and the first unit reserved Display area Da1, second unit hold display area Da2, third unit hold display area Da3, fourth unit hold display area Da4, fifth unit hold display area Da5, sixth unit hold display area Da6, seventh unit hold display area Da7 and an eighth unit pending display area Da8 are set. A hold icon MP is displayed in these unit hold display areas as a predetermined hold display image.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is 0 when the game ball enters the operating holes 83a and 83b, and the number of reserved balls (total number of reserved balls) becomes 1 due to this winning, only the first unit reserved display area Da1 is displayed. The hold icon MP is displayed. When the number of balls on hold becomes four due to game balls entering the operating ports 83a and 83b, a hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 to the fourth unit hold display area Da4. It has become. Note that FIG. 18(b) illustrates a case where the number of pending items is three.

In addition, in the hold display area NE, hold icons MP corresponding to the game rounds to be executed (currently being executed) are displayed side by side with the hold number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Db to be displayed is provided. In this embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged on the left side of the pending number display area Da, but the positional relationship between these areas is arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged on the right side of the pending number display area Da.

When a game round ends and you move on to the next game round, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1) shifts to the execution target display area Db ( (move). If there are other pending icons MP being displayed in the pending number display area Da, those pending icons MP are displayed in the (adjacent) unit pending display area closer to the execution target display area Db in conjunction with the shift. Shift to. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the side closer to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as the "downstream side", and the side opposite to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as the "upstream side".

Here, the ready-to-reach display (ready-to-reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the game results are displayed in a manner compatible with the opening/closing execution mode. In a gaming machine where a stop display result after a variable display can become a special display result in a game round that resulted in a game result, the stop display result is displayed after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 253. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result before being derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. This is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset valid line on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. A ready-to-reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of ready-to-reach symbols, and symbols are fluctuated and displayed by a final stopped symbol sequence under the situation where the ready-to-reach line is formed.

To explain in more detail the display contents on the display screen 253a, first, when the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row, and then after the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row, when the symbol hits any active line, A reach line is formed when the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination are stopped and displayed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row, resulting in a reach. will be displayed. When a jackpot occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination of winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbols in the middle symbol row are displayed in a fluctuating manner. is terminated.

In addition, in the reach display, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, the remaining symbol rows display fluctuating symbols, and the background screen displays a predetermined character etc. as a moving image. These include those that perform a reach effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the variable display time in the actuation opening display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the variable display time of symbols in the symbol display device 253. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the symbol display device 253 determines a variation pattern at the start of symbol variation.

When determining the fluctuation display time on the symbol display device 253 and the main display unit 87 (specifically, the actuation opening display parts DL and DU), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the fluctuation display time table of the ROM 603 are used. Storage area 623 is referenced. In addition, the MPU 602 determines the stop result in the result display section for the operating opening using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result determination table stored in the ROM 603 is used.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is configured such that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to be in the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , description of these various processes will be omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 are read, the states of these detection sensors are determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area (lottery counter buffer 631) of the RAM 604.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area (lottery counter buffer 631) of the RAM 604.

In the following step S104, a winning process for a through prize is executed in conjunction with a winning to the through gate 84. In the winning process for the through gate, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the power holding area. The value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 633 on the condition that the stored accessory storage number is less than 4. If the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning processing for the through gate ends.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the actuating opening associated with winning to the actuating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

(Winning processing for actuation port)
Here, the winning process for the actuation port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (winning). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process advances to step S202, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc., and the main prize winning processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process advances to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S205, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S205 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in external output processing S401 of the normal processing described later.

In the subsequent step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S204, and the main winning processing ends.

Note that if a negative determination is made in both steps S201 and S205, that is, if there is no ball entering either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the main winning processing is directly ended.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information acquisition processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the starting pending memory number N stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 632, specifically, the number N of the start pending memory stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 632, specifically, the number N of the start holding memory stored in the holding number storage area FE of the holding ball storage area 632. It is determined whether or not the start pending storage number N related to the triggering actuation port is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is directly terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the starting pending memory number N of the corresponding operating port is incremented by 1 in step S302. In step S303, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area FE is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103 are added to the empty storage area of the holding area RE for the operating opening. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common reservation number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302. After executing the storage process, the process advances to step S305.

In step S305, a display update process for the pending number display section of the main display unit 87 (main display section D) is executed. In the display update process, if the current winning destination is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the number of reservations for the upper operating port is updated, and if the current winning destination is the lower operating port 83b, the display of the number of reservations for the lower operating port is updated. Update the number display section display.

The upper operating port holding number display section is composed of four LEDs, and is configured such that the number of lit LEDs matches the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 83a. When the number of reservations related to the upper operating port 83a increases due to this winning, a process is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly. The reservation number display section for the lower operation port is similarly composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs matches the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 83b. When the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 83b increases due to this winning, a process is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly.

In subsequent steps S306 and S307, the sub-side (auxiliary side) control device, that is, the notification/presentation control device 143 and the display control device 142, are made to recognize that a winning has occurred in the actuating ports 83a and 83b, and a hold operation described later is made. A confirmation process for a pending notice and a setting process for a pending command, which are processes for executing a notice, are executed, and this information acquisition process is ended. Note that the pending command includes information as to which of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b the prize is based on.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process of step S307 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 142 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later. Upon receiving the hold command, the display control device 142 executes processing for changing the display in the hold count display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold count.

Specifically, when the display control device 142 receives the same suspension command via the notification/effect control device 143, the display control device 142 displays (for example, adds) the suspension icon MP in the suspension number display area Da. Execute processing. In the pending number display area Da, pending images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common pending number CRN is 1, the pending image is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 at the left end, and the common pending image is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 at the left end. If the number CRN is 8, the pending image is displayed in the eighth unit pending display area Da8, which is the eighth unit from the left. Note that a detailed explanation of each process in steps S306 and S307 will be given later.

(normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing in steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as production commands such as a variation start command, type command, and variation end command, a hold command, and a shift command to be described later are set, they are transmitted to the notification/production control device 143. .

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the subsequent step S403, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, etc. are performed.

After executing the game time control process in step S403, the process advances to step S404, and a game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, this gaming state transition process causes the gaming state to shift to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The details of the gaming cycle control process in step S403 and the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release is determined whether or not to put the electric role model 91 in an open state using the numerical information acquired from the electric role model release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 633 of the RAM 604. A lottery is held, and when the electric accessory open state is won, opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 91 is executed. It also controls the display of the through-gate display section DS so as to teach the lottery results of the electric winning lottery.

As already explained, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes low-frequency support mode.

In the electric support support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 will be in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than in the case of the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time to be longer. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, if the electric role opening state is won and the electric role opening state occurs multiple times, the next opening state will start after one opening state ends. The closing time is set to be shorter than the opening time.

Incidentally, when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is activated once every predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source/launch control device 243. Excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604. Furthermore, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

(Game time control processing)
Next, the game time control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 27.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the main game round is continued without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 and the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509. Control processing ends.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S502 whether or not a game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the operating port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 are in a variable display or a fixed display. If the game is not in progress, the process advances to steps S503 to S505 for starting the game. In the process for starting a game round, first, in step S503, it is determined whether the total number of starting reservation balls (common reservation number CRN) is "0" or not. When the common reservation number CRN is “0”, it means that no reservation information is stored in the reservation ball storage area 632. Therefore, the main game round control process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 632 for variable display, Further, in step S505, after executing a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the symbols on the operating port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the symbol fluctuation display on the display screen of the symbol display device 253, the main The game time control process ends.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be explained in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first in step S601, among the start hold storage numbers N stored in the hold count storage area FE, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common hold count CRN are decremented by one. In the following step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S603, a process is executed to shift the data (ie, reservation information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the reservation area RE. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1, and also 1 area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → 3rd area The data in each area is shifted in the following order: 6 area Ra6, 8th area Ra8→7th area Ra7.

In the subsequent step S604, a shift command is set which is information for making the notification/effect control device 143 recognize that the data in the reservation area RE has been shifted. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 142 via the notification/effect control device 143 in step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 23). In response to receiving the shift command, the display control device 142 executes a process for changing the display in the pending number display area Da for actuating ports in response to a decrease in the pending number.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In the variation start process, first in step S701, a validity determination process is executed to determine whether the pending information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. When the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the obtained information is changed to the information corresponding to the jackpot by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the information grasped above is used as a jackpot. Identify whether the information is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, type determination processing is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is specified whether the information for type determination grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. Specifically, if the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower operating port 83b. If so, the type is determined with reference to the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b.

In the subsequent step S704, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot result (16R probability variable jackpot result, 4R probability variable jackpot result) based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that it is not a jackpot win, then in step S707, a stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed. In addition, the probability variable jackpot results are roughly divided into 16R probability variation jackpot results and 4R probability variation jackpot results. In the case of a probability variable jackpot result, the above distribution determines whether the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result or a 4R probability variation jackpot result.

In each stop result setting process from step S705 to step S707, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87 is obtained by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 603. The identified information is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in steps S705 and S706, information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the success/failure determination result of the current game round is a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, in step S705, the variable probability jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, the normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S705 to S707, in step S708, a variable display time setting process is executed.

(Fluctuating display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 stores either the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a losing result, the process advances to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not a reach display will occur on the symbol display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of the reach display. When specifying the presence or absence of a reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, a reach determination table stored in the ROM 603 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process advances to step S803, and the current variable display time table for reach generation stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referred to. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and in the subsequent step S804, the fluctuation display time information is transferred to the fluctuation display time counter area (fluctuation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. ). After that, this setting process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery is a big hit, or when the result of the lottery is a loss and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display and a super reach display, which have different variable display modes. In the variable display time table for reach occurrence, variable display time information corresponding to normal reach display and super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. be obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, there is a table in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS, and by referring to this table, the value of the current variation type counter CS can be determined. A corresponding reach display is determined.

In addition, more specifically, the variable display time table for reaching occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, a variable display time is set so that a combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of a variable jackpot result, and a combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of a normal jackpot result. , a variable display time is set.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, in step S805, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined by referring to the variation display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variation display time table storage area 623. The variable display time corresponding to is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S806. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set such that the larger the common reservation number CRN, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the number of common reservation numbers CRN, and it may be set such that the smaller the number of common reservation numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time is. . In addition, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter variable display time is selected than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, even when the number of pending information is the same. Although a variable display time table for generation is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and the variable display time that is likely to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different depending on when a jackpot is won and when it is a miss. It may also be a configuration. Further, a variable display time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a missed reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may be set individually. As described above, the variable display time of each game round is determined using parameters such as whether or not a reach occurs, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, and the value of the change type counter CS.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 26), after the fluctuation display time setting processing is executed in step S708, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S709. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on game results. In other words, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability-variable jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on missing results, and the like.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the light emission pattern of the annular illumination section 24 and the sound output pattern from the speaker section 27 for the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls the determined performance. The annular illumination section 24 and the speaker section 27 are controlled so that the contents of are executed.

Further, the notification/effect control device 143 transmits the above-mentioned fluctuation start command and type command to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form thereof. The display control device 142 determines a variable display pattern to be displayed on the symbol display device 253 for the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls the symbol display device so that the determined variable display pattern is executed. Display control of 253 is performed. Thereafter, in step S710, the variable display of the picture is started on the corresponding one of the actuation opening display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87, and then the present variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 24), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display mode, the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game progress processing, first in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 has become "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27). Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, the display mode on the corresponding one of the operating port display sections DL and DU of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the main game round control process is ended.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S508. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any one of the processes from step S705 to step S707 is specified, and a pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the actuation opening display units DL and DU. Controls the operating port display parts DL and DU.

In the following step S509, a variation end command is set. After that, the main game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/effect control device 143 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 142 while maintaining its information format. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 142 causes the final stop symbol combination in the game round to be displayed as determined (final stop display).

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the gaming state transition process, first in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not the timing has come to end the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 87 (specifically, the operating opening display sections DL, DU) for one game round. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is the timing at which the variable display has ended, it is determined in step S903 whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the RAM 604 stores either the normal jackpot flag or the variable probability jackpot flag. If none of the above-mentioned flags are stored, the main game state transition process is ended as is.

If any of the above flags is stored, in step S904, a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically a value determined according to the jackpot type, is stored in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Set "16" or "4". The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the big winning hole of the variable winning device 82 is opened. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In the grand prize opening/closing process, when the grand prize opening 32a is closed, the variable winning drive section is brought into a driving state on the condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. to be opened. In addition, when the grand prize opening is open, the variable winning drive unit is activated on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state is stopped and the big prize opening is closed.

In the following step S906, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the main gaming state transition process is immediately ended. If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", in step S907, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if the probability-variable jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. Note that these high probability modes and high frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Further, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the winning/failure lottery mode is set to a low probability mode, and the support mode is set to a high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the game continues 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode.

Thereafter, in step S908, after executing the opening/closing execution mode termination process, the main gaming state transition process is terminated. In the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode, the stored flag among the normal jackpot flag and the probability variable jackpot flag is erased.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 142.

An MPU 912 is mounted on a notification/performance control board 911 provided in the notification/performance control device 143. The MPU 912 includes a ROM 913 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 912, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 913. A certain RAM 914 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are built-in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 913 and RAM 914 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 912, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 912 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 912, and the main control device 162 receives game time control commands (game time control information) such as the variation start command, type command, and variation end command, which have already been explained. Receive. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the annular illumination section 24 provided on the front door frame 14, the speaker section 27, and the display control device 142 are connected to the output side of the MPU 912. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information format as is.

The display control device 142 includes a display control board 951 on which an MPU 952, which is an element in which a program ROM 953 and a work RAM 954 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 955, a character ROM 956, and a video RAM 957 are mounted. It is equipped with Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 953 and work RAM 954 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 952, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 955 (specifically (generation of internal commands for the VDP 955). More specifically, the MPU 952 executes a process for specifying a variable display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 253 based on a command sent from the notification/performance control device 143, and also executes a process related to a pending notice, which will be described later. is executed, and drawing processing for the VDP 955 is executed in accordance with the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The program ROM 953 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 952, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 954 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 952 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 954.

The VDP 955 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 253. Since the VDP955 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 955 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 952, the video RAM 957, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 957 from the character ROM 956 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 253.

The character ROM 956 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253. This character ROM 956 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

The character ROM 956 also contains, as part of the above data, image data (pending icon MP) to be displayed in the pending display area NE of the symbol display device 253 and image data for a division frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db. A pending image data storage area 971 in which is stored, and a preview effect image data storage area 972 in which image data to be displayed when a preview effect to be described later is executed are stored. Note that it is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 956 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 956. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 953 is stored in the character ROM 956.

The video RAM 957 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 253, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 957, the display contents of the symbol display device 253 are changed. The video RAM 957 is provided with a pending display area 981 and an execution display area 982 that correspond to the pending display area NE.

In the holding display area 981, first unit areas to eighth unit areas are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the first areas Ra1 to eighth areas Ra8 in the actuating mouth holding area RE. In each of the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the hold display information (data) written in each unit area. Note that in the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to unit areas where no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is displayed.

The execution display area 982 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 253a, the pending icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 982. Note that if no data is set, the background image on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is displayed.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a is specified by the notification/performance control device 143 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specified result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 142. Specifically, the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 executes a fluctuating display control process as part of a regular process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and this fluctuating display control process controls the fluctuating display of symbols. The outline of the aspect etc. is specified. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether the symbol display device 253 is performing variable display or fixed display of symbols for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the present variable display control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, a process for starting a change, which will be described later, is executed in step S1003, and then the present change display control process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the fluctuating display control process is ended after executing the fluctuating process in step S1005. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various performances and changing the determined performance in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process advances to step S1006, and after executing the process for ending the variation in step S1006, the present variation display control process is ended. In the variation termination process, the variation display of symbols and the performance being executed are terminated (determined and stopped) in a manner corresponding to the hold information related to the game round. In this process, the speaker section 27 and the annular illumination section 24 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 142, this variation termination process is terminated. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 to confirm and stop the symbols based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, a supplementary explanation will be given of the variation start processing in step S1003. The fluctuation start process is a process for starting the performance of the game round based on receiving the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start processing, settings such as a reach display and a hold notice performance to be described later are performed as effects for the game round. Here, the process related to setting the reach display will be explained, and the process related to setting the pending preview effect will be described later.

In the variation start process, first, in step S1101, the variation start command received this time is read out, and information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main control device 162 transmits the variation start command, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read, and from the command, information on game results such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or miss result information is specified. Then, in step S1101, from the information specified above, information on whether there is a jackpot win, information on the type of jackpot when it is a jackpot win, information on whether reach occurs when the jackpot is not won, and variable display time. The information is stored in the register of the MPU 912.

In the following step S1102, based on the information grasped in step S1101, it is determined whether the game result of the game round to be started this time is a game result corresponding to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the subsequent step S1103, a jackpot performance setting process is executed.

In the performance setting process for the jackpot, the stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, for some cases where the jackpot result is a variable probability, the stop result where the combination of the same specific symbols (odd numbered main symbols) is established on one active line L1 to L5 is set as the main symbol. Determined as the result of stopping the game. In addition, in some cases where it is a variable jackpot result and in the case where it is a normal jackpot result, a stop where the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one active line L1 to L5. The result is determined as the stop result of this game round.

The type of main symbol and active lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result is achieved are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 913 stores each effective line L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above process is the final stop line set in the RAM 914. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, processing is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that, in the following explanation as well, address information of the stop result determined in various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 914.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, if there is a jackpot result, the result is notified through the reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for displaying the reach, the variable display pattern table for displaying the reach stored in the various table areas of the ROM 913 is acquired, and the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time are determined. A performance pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914. In addition, also in the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 913, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the result is not a jackpot, the process advances to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. When a reach occurs, the process advances to step S1105 and executes an effect setting process for a reach. In the production setting process for generating a reach, the outline of the production and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process in step S1103 above, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of out-of-reach symbols and active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, ensure that the same combination of symbols does not occur on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 that are the same as the symbols forming the reach line are placed on the reach line. The stopping result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at a stopping position shifted forward or backward. Thereafter, a process is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S1104 that a reach has not occurred, the process advances to step S1106. In step S1106, the outline of the performance for a complete miss and the combination of symbols for the final stop are determined. Since this process deals with a complete loss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any one of steps S1103, S1105, and S1106, the process advances to step S1107. In step S1107, a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and production pattern determined in steps S1103, S1105, and S1106 to the display control device 142 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 based on the received stop result command and pattern command to execute the performance in the current game round.

After executing the process in step S1107, in the subsequent step S1108, the process for starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, drive control of the speaker section 27 and the annular illumination section 24 is started based on the performance pattern determined in steps S1103, S1105, and S1106, and the performance for the game round is started.

Here, based on FIG. 32, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display mode of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode.

(Fluctuating display mode)
As shown in FIG. 32(a), the variation display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is largely divided into five types: complete miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Separated. Each of these variable display modes is set to have a different variable display time, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible. In this embodiment, the relationship between the variable display mode and the variable display time is different depending on whether the support mode by the electric accessory 91 is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. ing.

First, the case of being in the low frequency support mode will be explained. Under the situation of low frequency support mode, the variable display time for complete miss is "3 seconds to 8 seconds" (the difference is set according to the number of reservations), and the variable display time for normal reach A is "20 seconds". , The variable display time of Normal Reach B is 24 seconds, which is longer than the variable display time of Normal Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach A is 31 seconds, which is longer than the variable display time of Normal Reach A and B. The variable display time of Super Reach A is longer than the variable display time of 32 seconds, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is 33 seconds, which is longer than the variable display times of Super Reach A and B. For example, if the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 seconds", the notification/effect control device 143 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. .

Next, the case of high frequency support mode will be explained. Under the situation of high-frequency support mode, the variable display time for complete miss is "1 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of reservations), and the variable display time for normal reach A is "20 sec". , The variable display time of Normal Reach B is 24 seconds, which is longer than the variable display time of Normal Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach A is 36 seconds, which is longer than the variable display time of Normal Reach A and B. The variable display time is 37 seconds, which is longer than the variable display time of Super Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is 38 seconds, which is longer than the variable display times of other Super Reach A and B. For example, if the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 seconds", the notification/effect control device 143 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. .

In addition, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, Super Reach C > Super Reach B
＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Normal Reach A is more likely to be selected in this order, and in the game round that corresponds to a losing result, it is a complete loss ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Super Reach B ＞
The configuration is such that it is likely to be selected in the order of Super Reach C. In other words, the setting is such that the longer the variable display time becomes, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot becomes.

Here, the variation display mode of normal reaches A and B will be explained with reference to FIG. 32(b1). When Normal Reach A or B is selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is ended (stopped). Then, the variable display of the symbols is ended (stopped) in the lower symbol row Z3. In this way, when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the same number attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see Figure 6) is stopped and displayed, so that the reach line is formed. Then, under the situation where the reach line is formed, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner, resulting in a reach display (reach variation display). After reaching the ready-to-reach display, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, thereby ending the variable display. Then, you will be notified that you have won the jackpot when the same symbols that make up the reach display stop on the reach line, and you will be notified that you have won the jackpot when other symbols stop on the same reach line. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the combination of symbols that was finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current game round continues until the stop display period has elapsed, and when the stop display period has passed, the transition to the next game round is allowed.

In this embodiment, by setting a difference in the variable display time of the medium symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed, a difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured. The method of setting the difference is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the above-mentioned difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display until the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of super reaches A, B, and C will be explained based on the variable display mode of normal reaches A, B mentioned above. As shown in FIGS. 21(b2) to (b4), for super reaches A, B, and C, the above-mentioned reach lines are formed through the same process as for normal reaches A, B. After the ready-to-reach line is formed, a ready-to-reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in conjunction with the fluctuating display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of medium symbol row Z2 (center of variable display area ME), and in super reach B, a character imitating a fairy is displayed. In Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of medium symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl will be displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(About suspension notice)
In the present embodiment, the performance related to the reservation notice that suggests the contents of the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 is performed at a predetermined probability before the game round related to the reservation information is started. It is configured to be executed. Since the performance corresponding to the pending information that has not yet been selected for the lottery is executed at a timing before the game session related to the pending information, it is convenient for the player to perform the performance corresponding to the game session currently in progress. In addition to the game of checking the lottery result of pending information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the pending information that will later become a lottery target has been added according to the content of the above-mentioned production. Diversification will be achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Regarding this pending notice, one is executed in conjunction with the above-mentioned variable display of the symbol in the variable display area ME of the display screen 253a, and the other is executed in conjunction with the change in the mode of pending display in the pending display area NE of the display screen 253a. It is broadly divided into things that are executed. Among these, the hold preview executed in the hold display area NE uses the hold display on the display screen 253a. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 33(a) and the schematic diagram in FIG. Display control command corresponding processing) will be explained. The hold display control command corresponding process is a process executed as part of a regular process that is started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Command compatible processing for hold display control)
As shown in FIG. 33(a), in the hold display control command corresponding process, first in step S1201, it is determined whether a hold command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, one is added to the value of the pending number counter (the pending memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 954 in step S1202.

After executing the update process in step S1202, the process advances to step S1203, where a pending display addition process is executed, and this pending display control command corresponding process is ended. The above-mentioned pending storage number SN corresponds to the pending display area 981 of the video RAM 957. When setting the display of the hold icon MP in the hold display addition process, hold display information (more specifically, the hold display information stored in the hold image data storage area 971) is displayed in a unit area corresponding to the hold storage number SN in the hold display area 981. (address of the reserved image) is set. In each of the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da8 of the pending number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the pending icon MP is additionally displayed in accordance with the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold memory number SN=“2”. If a hold command is received under these circumstances, the hold memory number SN changes from "2" to "3", and hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area 981. . Thereby, as shown in FIG. 33(b2), the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3.

Returning to the explanation of step S1201, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process advances to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether a shift command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143. If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the present hold display control command corresponding processing is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the process advances to step S1205. In step S1205, the value of the pending number counter (the pending storage number SN) provided in the pending counter area of the work RAM 954 is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S1206, shift processing is executed, and this pending display control command corresponding processing is ended. In the shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area 981 is moved to the execution display area 982, and the hold display information set in the first unit area to the eighth unit area of the hold display area 981 is moved. Shift the pending display information in order to the lower area side.

Specifically, the pending display information in the first unit area is moved to the execution display area 982, and the information is transferred from the second unit area to the first unit area, from the third unit area to the second unit area, and from the fourth unit area to the third unit area. Unit area, 5th unit area → 4th unit area, 6th unit area → 5th unit area, 7th unit area → 6th unit area, 8th unit area → 7th unit area, etc. Shift the pending display information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold memory number SN=“2”. If a shift command is received under such a situation, the number of pending memories SN changes from "2" to "1". Along with this, the pending display information in the execution display area 982 is erased, the pending display information in the first unit area is in the execution display area 982, the pending display information in the second unit area is in the first unit area, and the pending display information in the third unit area is in the first unit area. The pending display information in the unit area is shifted to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33(b3), the pending icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Db and the first unit pending display area Da1.

Here, in the hold image data storage area 971, a plurality of types of hold icons MP with different colors (specifically, four types, white, blue, yellow, and red) are stored as a hold image group, and each color is different from the above. Addresses are different. When setting the hold display information, the notification/effect control device 143 determines which color to display depending on the presence/absence of the above-mentioned hold notice, etc. 143, it is incorporated into the suspension command by the notification/effect control device 143. In other words, the display control device 142 reads color-related information from the received hold command to determine which color the address is to be set as the hold display information.

Next, a description will be given of processing related to a pending notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162. As the processing related to the pending notice, the confirmation process for the above-mentioned pending notice (step S306 in FIG. 22) and the pending command setting process (step S307 in FIG. 22) are set, and each of these processes is performed by the timer interrupt process ( The winning process for the actuating mouth (see FIG. 21), which is set as a part of the process (see FIG. 20), is specifically executed as part of the information acquisition process in step S204. In other words, the confirmation process for the pending notice and the setting process for the pending command are executed based on winnings in the operating ports 83a and 83b.

The confirmation process for pending notice will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the reservation notice confirmation process, in step S1301, the start reservation memory number N and the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE of the reservation ball storage area 632 are read, and the information on the reservation number is sent to the MPU 602. Store in register. Thereafter, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is checked whether the pending information acquired by the current prize winning includes information about the jackpot winning.

Specifically, first, in step S1302, information for jackpot determination among the pending information obtained in step S304 based on the current winning to the operating ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 is determined. grasp.

In the following step S1303, it is determined whether the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether a high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, it is determined whether the current win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode. If it is the low probability mode, the process advances to step S1304, and the information for jackpot determination (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table is information corresponding to jackpot winning. Identify whether it is included in a group. If it is the high probability mode, the process advances to step S1305, and the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S302 is determined to be a jackpot win with reference to the high probability mode win/fail table. Identify what is included in the set information.

After step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to jackpot winning. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1307, and the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended.

In addition, in the process of step S1307, information for jackpot type determination among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning is grasped, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is referred to. to determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1307 includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process advances to step S1308. In step S1308, information for out-of-reach determination among the reservation information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the operating ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1309, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the ROM 603 is referred to, and the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 is determined as a reach win. Identify what is included in the set information.

After executing the process in step S1309, the process advances to step S1310, and it is determined whether the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, in step S1311, the information on the occurrence of a reach is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is ended as is.

(Pending command setting process)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In the pending command setting process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. It is determined whether the information is identified as corresponding to a jackpot win. If the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S1302, and a jackpot response pending command is set. Note that setting of the above commands and setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604. The jackpot response pending command includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that jackpot information is not stored in the register of the MPU 602, the process advances to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. By determining , it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination was identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation process for pending notice (FIG. 34). If the reach occurrence information is stored, an out-of-reach response suspension command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete out-of-reach response retention command is set in step S1405.

When setting a pending command in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the pending command. . When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same way as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S708 above. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 142, and the display control device 142 can grasp the fluctuating display mode of the symbols based on the hold command. Note that, as already explained, in the case of a complete loss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of pending information stored when starting the game round related to the pending information. Therefore, when setting a complete failure handling hold command, a temporary setting of the variable display time is performed.

After executing the command setting process in step S1402, step S1404, or step S1405, in step S1406, a process is executed to set information on the number of pending items for the above-mentioned pending command. Specifically, the information of the suspended command set above is configured as multiple bytes of information, and some of the bits are filled with information indicating that the command itself is a suspended command, or information indicating that the command itself is a suspended command. Information on the type of items is included, and information on the number of items on hold can be set.

In step S1406, first, the information on the number of pending items stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1301 in the confirmation process for the immediately preceding pending notice (FIG. 34) is read, and then the information on the number of pending items in the pending command that has already been set is read out. The information on the number of reservations read out above is stored in the information bits by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, information for specifying the number of pending information corresponding to the pending command set in step S1402, step S1404, or step S1405 is provided. will be included. After executing the process of step S1406 detailed above, this pending command setting process ends.

The hold command in which the information on the number of hold items is included in step S1406 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/effect control device 143 specifies that the amount of pending information has increased by receiving such a pending command. In addition, the notification/effect control device 143 adds information for a pending notice, which will be described later, to the pending command and transmits it to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 executes processing for displaying a hold, a hold notice, etc. based on the received hold command.

In addition, how to set the hold command is to use the hold command in the display control device 142 to determine whether or not there is a jackpot win, if it is a jackpot win, the type of jackpot at that time, and if it is not a jackpot win, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc. It is arbitrary as long as the variation display mode of the symbol can be specified. For example, combinations of a hold command for jackpot, a hold command for out-of-reach, and a hold command for complete loss are set individually corresponding to each hold number, and in the hold command setting process, the hold notice confirmation process ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one pending command is selected depending on the confirmation result in FIG. 34).

Next, the processing related to the pending notice executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be explained. The processing related to the pending notice is roughly divided into a command corresponding process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a pending notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the pending notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the pending command processing, when a pending command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, processing corresponding to information included in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the pending command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 931 of the RAM 914. The command storage area 931 is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out the previously stored commands, so even if multiple commands are received at the same time, they are Processes corresponding to each command can be executed well. In determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 931. Note that the configuration for reading out such a command is the same for reading out other commands such as the fluctuation start command.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 934. The pending information storage area 934 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured such that one piece of pending information can be stored in each area. The reservation information stored in each area Rc1 to Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, while clearing the data of the first area Rc1, the data of the second area Rc2→first area Rc1, third area Rc3→second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4→third area Rc3, etc. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area Rc8→seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area 934 of the notification/performance control device 143, hold information is collected in chronological order regardless of the destination of the ball, similar to the hold ball storage area 632 (specifically, hold area RE) of the main control device 162. The configuration is memorized. Specifically, the information on the number of reservations included in the command received this time is specified, and the above various information is stored in the area corresponding to the information on the specified number of reservations among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Note that when the above-mentioned pending command is received, a pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933. . Each of these flags serves as a trigger for a setting process for a pending preview performance to be described below, and is erased when the setting process for a pending preview performance is completed.

The MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 performs a setting process for the pending preview performance based on the information stored in the pending information storage area 934. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36, the setting process for pending notice effect will be explained. Note that the pending notice performance setting process is a process that is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

(Setting process for pending notice performance)
In the setting process for a hold notice effect, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main controller 162. Specifically, it is determined whether a pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, a lottery process upon reception of a hold command is executed in step S1502.

In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery target for the hold notice is limited to the hold information newly added this time. In other words, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reservation notice can be issued based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the currently received reservation command among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the reservation information storage area 934 of the RAM 914. . In this lottery, it is determined from the stored information whether or not the game round related to the pending information is a jackpot, whether or not a reach display is performed, and if a reach display is performed, the pattern is grasped, and the results are determined accordingly. The lottery is based on the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter.

The lottery table storage area of the ROM 913 includes a lottery table for jackpots, a lottery table for losing normal reach A, a lottery table for losing normal reach B, and a lottery table for losing super reach A as lottery tables for when a pending command is received. , a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for completely losing.

These various tables are set so that the probability of winning increases in the order of jackpot > super reach C > super reach B > super reach A > normal reach B > normal reach A > complete miss.

Returning to the explanation of step S1501, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, that is, if it is determined that no pending command has been received, the process advances to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from the main controller 162. Specifically, it is determined whether a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S1503, that is, if neither the hold command nor the shift command has been received, the hold preview effect setting process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, a lottery process upon receipt of a shift command is executed in step S1504.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, all pending information that remains after the shift is selected for lottery for pending notices. In other words, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a reservation notice is available based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the reservation information storage area 934 of the RAM 914. This lottery is performed individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is defined as the newest order (eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7 →... → first area Rc1). For example, when the common reservation number CRN is "2", a lottery is first held based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if the lottery is not won, the information stored in the first area Rc1 A lottery will be held based on.

In this embodiment, in particular, by increasing the value of the common reservation number CRN, the fluctuation display time in the game round corresponding to a complete loss is shortened. Therefore, by preferentially selecting the new pending information as a lottery target as described above, it is possible to suitably secure the period of the preview effect when executing the pending notice.

As for the lottery method, in the same way as when receiving a hold command, the stored information will be used to determine whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether or not a reach display will be performed, and if a reach display will be performed. The lottery is determined based on the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter.

The lottery table storage area of the ROM 913 includes a lottery table for jackpots, a lottery table for losing normal reach A, a lottery table for losing normal reach B, and a lottery table for losing super reach A as lottery tables for when a shift command is received. , a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for completely losing.

These various tables are set so that the probability of winning increases in the order of jackpot > super reach C > super reach B > super reach A > normal reach B > normal reach A > complete miss. However, these lottery table groups for when a shift command is received are set so that the probability of winning a pending preview is lower when compared with the lottery table group for receiving a pending command. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the probability of winning when referring to the lottery table for receiving a shift command is set lower than the probability of winning when referring to the lottery table for receiving a hold command.

However, if the value of the common reservation number CRN (the number of reservations) is less than a predetermined number (“4” in this embodiment), the overall winning expectation is lower than when the reservation command was received, but the common reservation When the value of the number CRN (the number of reservations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the overall winning expectation is set to exceed that at the time of reception of the reservation command.

In this embodiment, in particular, when the value of the common reservation number CRN exceeds the predetermined number ("4"), the degree of shortening of the variable display time in the game round corresponding to a complete loss is reduced by the value of the common reservation number CRN. This is larger than the case where the number is equal to or less than the predetermined number ("4"). Although this can speed up the progress of the game, there is a concern that the monotony of the progress of the game will become noticeable. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the number of pending items increases and the variable display time becomes noticeably shortened, a pending notice is likely to occur. This is preferable in order to speed up the progress of the game and to suppress a decrease in the level of attention to the game.

After executing the lottery process in step S1502 or step S1504, the process advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the execution conditions for the pending notice performance are satisfied in these lottery processes. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, that is, if the winning result is not determined in steps S1502 and S1504, the present suspension notice performance setting process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, processing for determining a pending notice performance pattern is executed in subsequent step S1506, and after storing the determined pending notice performance pattern in subsequent step S1507, the present pending notice performance end the configuration process.

If it is determined that a pending preview performance will be performed, based on the information stored in step S1507, the pending information will be selected as a lottery target for the pending preview performance until the game round related to the corresponding pending information is executed. deviate from Then, the stored information is deleted when the corresponding pending information is moved to the execution area.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 37 and 38, types of pending notice effects (specifically, preview effects executed in the pending display area NE) will be explained.

(Type of pending notice performance)
All of the pending preview presentations have a common feature in that they are configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot result by changing the display mode of the pending icon MP displayed in the pending display area NE. Regarding the display mode (color) of the hold icon MP, four colors are set: white, blue, yellow, and red. Among these colors, white is the basic color, and when the hold preview effect is executed, the hold icon MP takes on other colors (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the pending icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red so that the expectation of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a pending notice is executed with the pending icon MP corresponding to the game round that results in a jackpot, the probability of selection is high in the order of white < blue < yellow < red. On the other hand, when a reservation notice is executed using a reservation icon MP corresponding to a game round that results in a losing result, the probability of selection increases in the order of red < yellow < blue < white.

This pending preview performance is roughly divided into a first type of preview performance and a second type of preview performance depending on the display mode (color change) of the pending icon MP. As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the first type preview performance, after the color of the pending icon MP changes, the color of the pending icon is maintained until the corresponding game time (until it moves to the execution target display area Db) be done. On the other hand, in the second type preview performance, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the color of the hold icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that will eventually change is red, first change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) with lower expectations, and then change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) that has lower expectations, and when the pending icon MP shifts, it will be more Step up (promote) to a higher rank color. By using these two types of pending notice performances in combination, even if the color is a color with a low level of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a higher level of expectation by the time the corresponding game round is reached. This suppresses an early drop in the degree of attention to the pending preview performance.

Note that the color of the pending icon MP does not change only in the pending display area Ra, but may be changed when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when the hold icon MP that was yellow in the hold display area Ra moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP is changed to red, or the hold icon MP that was white in the hold display area Ra is changed to red. It is also possible to change the pending icon MP to another color (blue, yellow, red) when the icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db.

(Production button device 40)
This embodiment is characterized by a production button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 and a configuration related to production using the production button device 40. Hereinafter, the structure of the production button device 40 will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. 39 is a perspective view of the front door frame 14 seen from the front, FIGS. 40(a) and 42 are perspective views of the front door frame 14 seen from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 40(b) is a side view of the production button device 40. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production button device 40, FIG. 43 is a partially cutaway view showing the internal structure of the production button device 40, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation block. In addition, in FIG. 42, illustration of the side cover 755 of the production button device 40 is omitted for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 39, the production button device 40 is disposed in the upper bulge part 28 of the front door frame 14, specifically in the part of the upper bulge part 28 that is in front of the upper tray 33 (storage area KE). has been done. Most of the production button device 40 is housed inside the upper bulge 28, and a part of the operation button protrudes upward through an opening 28b formed in the upper surface 28a of the upper bulge 28. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the production button device 40 includes an operation block 701 having an operation button 721 to be pressed, and a pedestal block 702 on which the operation block 701 is mounted. The pedestal block 702 is composed of a metal pedestal plate 711 that functions as a mounting surface for the operation block 701, and a synthetic resin bracket 712 fixed to the pedestal plate 711 from below. The effect button device 40 is integrated with the frame 20 of the door frame 14 by being fixed to the frame 20 by a fixing means such as a screw.

The production button device 40 is not fixed to the upper bulge 28 forming the upper plate 33, and the load generated when the production button device 40 is operated is transferred to the upper bulge through the fixed portion. This prevents the virus from spreading to 28. This is a device for suppressing deformation of the storage area KE (see FIG. 39) provided in the upper tray 33 and ensuring a smooth flow of game balls toward the game ball firing mechanism 110.

As shown in FIG. 44, the operation block 701 includes a button unit 720 having the operation button 721 described above, and a holder unit 750 that holds the button unit 720. The pedestal plate 711 has a depression in the center (see FIG. 42), and by fixing the holder unit 750 disposed in this depression to the pedestal plate 711, the operation block 701 and the pedestal block 702 are integrated. There is.

Although details will be described later, the holder unit 750 is provided with a lift mechanism 785 (see FIG. 43) for raising and lowering the button unit 720, and a side cover 755 that covers the side surface of the button unit 720. The mechanism 785 is covered by the outer shell of the button unit 720 and the side cover 755.

Here, the button unit 720 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. 45 and 46 are exploded perspective views of the button unit 720, and FIG. 47 is a longitudinal sectional view of the operation block 701.

As shown in FIG. 45, the button unit 720 is formed by vertically combining the operation button 721 and a movable base 741. As shown in FIG. 46, the operation button 721 includes dual inner and outer button members 722, 723 that constitute the upper part of the operation button 721, and a housing 726 that constitutes the lower part of the operation button 721.

The button members 722 and 723 have a cylindrical main body portion and an upper surface portion that closes an opening on the upper end side of the main body portion. Among these, the upper surface portion of the outer button member 722 functions as an "operation surface portion 721a" that is the object of pressing operation by the player. In the following description, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member are appropriately distinguished as the inner button member 723.

A decorative body 724 is provided on the upper surface of the inner button member 723. The outer button member 722 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the decorative body 724 is visible through the operation surface portion 721a of the outer button member 722. The housing 726 is fixed to the inner button member 723 from below. The housing 726 has a cylindrical shape with a bottom, and a bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 faces the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 with a gap therebetween.

The base plate 742 has a flat plate shape, and a cylindrical guide shaft 743 is fixed to the upper surface thereof. A slider 744 is attached to the guide shaft 743 so as to be slidable along the guide shaft 743. The guide shaft 743 extends in the same direction as the center axis of the button members 722 and 723, in other words, in the same direction as the direction in which the operating button 721 and the movable base 741 are combined (hereinafter referred to as the reference direction), and has a A stopper 743a is formed to prevent the slider 744 from falling off.

A coil spring 745 is inserted through the guide shaft 743. The coil spring 745 is sandwiched (compressed) between the slider 744 and the base plate 742, and is biased toward the side (upper side) where the slider 744 contacts the stopper 743a. The slider 744 is fixed to the housing 726 using a fixing device such as a screw. These slider 744 and guide shaft 743 function as a connecting means for connecting base plate 742 and housing 726. The biasing force of the coil spring 745 is set taking into consideration the weight of the operation button 721, and the slider 744 is held at a position where it contacts the stopper 743a when the operation button 721 is not operated. There is.

A light emitting block 725 is housed in a region surrounded by the inner button member 723 and the housing 726. The light emitting block 725 includes a light emitting board 732 on which a plurality of light emitters (LEDs) are mounted and a case body 731 that houses the light emitting board 732. The element mounting surface of the light emitting board 732 is connected to the inner button member 723. It is arranged so as to face the top side. The light emitting board 732 is connected to the notification/effect control device 143, and the light emission is controlled by the notification/effect control device 143.

The case body 731 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin and has light transmittance. Light from the light emitting board 732 is emitted from the production button device 40 through the case body 731 → the upper surface of the inner button member 723 → the decorative body 724 → the upper surface of the outer button member 722 (operation surface 721a).

The production button device 40 shown in this embodiment is characterized by the attachment structure of the button unit 720 to the holder unit 750. The mounting structure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 44 and 47.

As shown in FIG. 44, the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are connected by a plurality of (three) shaft bodies 728 provided so as to span the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750. Specifically, each shaft body 728 extends in the reference direction and is inserted through an insertion portion such as a central opening 737 formed in the bottom portion 736 of the housing 726 and a hollow portion of the guide shaft 743.

As shown in FIG. 47, one end (upper end) of each shaft body 728 is fixed to a fixing part 734 provided on the light emitting block 725 (more specifically, the case body 731) of the button unit 720, and the other end (lower end) is fixed to the holder unit. It is fixed to a fixing part 765 provided on the holder main body 751 of 750. Thereby, the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are integrated via the shaft body 728.

The outer diameter of the shaft 728 matches the inner diameter of the guide shaft 743, and the shaft 728 and the guide shaft 743 ensure that the lift mechanism described above moves the operation button 721 in the same direction as the reference direction. stipulated in In addition, a plurality of shaft bodies 728 are arranged in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX of the operation button 721, and these shaft bodies 728 allow the operation buttons 721 (excluding the outer button member 722) to be centered around the central axis CLX. ) rotation is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the operation surface portion 721a of the operation button 721 is pressed against the biasing force of the coil spring 745, the operation button 721 descends along the central axis CLX, and the bottom surface portion of the housing 726 736 comes into contact with the base plate 742 of the movable base 741, making further displacement impossible. The holder unit 750 is provided with a detection sensor 791 (see FIG. 44) that detects the displacement when the operation button 721 is lowered to a position where it contacts the base plate 742. The detection sensor 791 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 specifies whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. In the following description, the position detected by the detection sensor 791 of the operation button 721 will be referred to as the "operation detection position."

(Lift mechanism 785)
In this embodiment, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, by raising and lowering the operation button 721 using the lift mechanism 785, the amount of protrusion from the upper surface part 28a (opening part 28b) of the upper bulge part 28, i.e. The operation stroke of the operation button 721 can be changed. The lift mechanism 785 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 44, 47, 50, and 51. 50 is a perspective view showing the lift mechanism 785 and its related components, FIG. 51(a) is a perspective view of the rotor 752, and FIG. 51(b) is a plan view of the power transmission mechanism 754.

As shown in FIG. 44, the holder main body 751 includes a disc-shaped bottom 761, a peripheral wall 762 formed along the outer circumference of the bottom 761, and a center portion of the bottom 761 in the same direction as the reference direction (upward). ) and a column-shaped bearing portion 763 (see FIG. 47) that extends upright. As shown in FIG. 47, the central axis of the bearing portion 763 is coaxial with the central axis CLX of the operation button 721, and the rotor 752 is mounted on the bearing portion 763.

Specifically, the rotor 752 has a cylindrical holder body 751, and the holder body 751 is inserted into a bearing part 763 and fixed to the bearing part 763 using a fixing device such as a screw. . When the rotor 752 is attached to the bearing part 763, lifting from the bottom part 761 (displacement in the direction of the central axis CLX) is restricted, but rotation around the central axis CLX is permitted. .

Central openings 737 and 746 are formed in the central portion of the movable base 741 and the central portion of the housing 726, respectively, and the rotor 752 projects toward the light emitting block 725 through these central openings 737 and 746. A case body 731 of the light emitting block 725 is formed with a bearing portion 733 that engages with the upper end portion of the rotor 752 from the inside, and this bearing portion 733 prevents the rotor 752 from falling.

As shown in FIG. 50, a set of protruding pins 747 are arranged on the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 with a central opening 746 (center axis CLX) in between. Each protruding pin 747 has a pin member extending in a direction perpendicular to the central axis CLX, and is attached to the base plate 742 so as to be rotatable about the central axis of the pin member. There is.

Ends (tips) of the pin member on the side of the central axis line CLX protrude toward the central opening 746, and roller members 748 are respectively disposed at these tips so as to be coaxial with the pin member. The rotor 752 has a pair of engagement grooves 772 formed on the outer periphery of the main body 771 . The groove width dimension of each engagement groove 772 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748), and the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748) is inserted into these engagement grooves 772. engaged.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), each engagement groove 772 includes a horizontal portion 775 extending in the horizontal direction and a spiral inclined portion 776 extending upward from one end of the horizontal portion 775. The horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 are continuous, and the protruding pin 747 can move back and forth between the horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 while maintaining the engagement state with the engagement groove 772. That is, the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted and the rotor 752 are allowed to change relative positions in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX while maintaining engagement between the roller member 748 and the engagement groove 772. has been done.

As shown in FIG. 50, the holder main body 751 is provided with a stepping motor 753 as a drive unit for the rotor 752, and a power transmission mechanism 754 that transmits the power of the stepping motor 753 to the rotor 752. As shown in FIG. 51(b), the power transmission mechanism 754 includes a driving gear 781 fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 753, a driven gear 779 fixed to the main body 771 (lower end part) of the rotor 752, and It has a connecting gear 782 that connects the driving gear 781 and the driven gear 779. The stepping motor 753 is connected to the notification/performance control device 143 and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/performance control device 143. This driving force is transmitted to the rotor 752 via the power transmission mechanism 754, so that the rotor 752 rotates about the central axis CLX.

In this embodiment, by changing the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721 using the lift mechanism 785, the production button device 40 can be switched to three forms with different appearances. Here, the movement of the lift mechanism 785 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 is a sectional view showing the lift mechanism 785, and FIG. 53 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the protruding pin 747 and the engagement groove 772. In the following description, the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the clockwise direction about the central axis CLX in a plan view of the production button device 40 will be referred to as the "forward direction" and the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the counterclockwise direction. The direction of movement is referred to as the "reverse direction."

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the protruding pin 747 is located in the horizontal portion 775 of the engagement groove 772, the operating stroke of the operating button 721 is at its minimum. When the stepping motor 753 rotates in the forward direction under this situation, the rotor 752 rotates in the forward direction as shown in FIG. 53(a1)→FIG. 53(a2).

When the rotation in the forward direction continues, the protruding pin 747 is pushed upward by the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776, as shown in FIG. 53(a2)→FIG. 53(a3). Here, the rotor 752 is restricted from being displaced downward along the central axis CLX, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is restricted from moving upward along the central axis CLX. (upward) displacement is allowed. The movable base 741 is restricted from rotating about the central axis CLX by the shaft 728. For these reasons, the movable base 741, ie, the operation button 721, is displaced upward (upward) along the central axis CLX, following the upwardly pushed protruding pin 747.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in FIG. 53 (a3) → FIG. Immediately before reaching the vicinity of 773, the output of the rotation drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the movable base 741 is separated upward from the holder unit 750, and the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is extended.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped by pulse control just before the protruding pin 747 comes into contact with the upper end 773 of the engagement groove 772, so that the protruding pin 747 and the upper end 773 are connected to each other. Although the configuration has been adopted to avoid collision, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped when the protruding pin 747 comes into contact with the upper end portion 773.

Even after the protruding pin 747 reaches the upper end 773, the current supply to the stepping motor 753 is continued. As a result, a holding torque is generated in the stepping motor 753 to maintain the rotational position. This holding torque is set in consideration of the weight of the operation button 721, and the operation button 721 is held at the position after the stroke change (for example, the maximum protrusion position). The details will be described later, but by changing the current supplied to the stepping motor 753, it is possible to change the resistance to the pressing operation.

Here, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and relative displacement between the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 is allowed at least in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX. There is. With this configuration, the feeling of the rotation of the rotor 752 when a pressing operation is performed is suppressed from being transmitted to the player's hand. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of discomfort caused by the operation. Further, even if the outer button member 722 is turned by hand, the operation button 721 can be prevented from descending due to this, and the operation button 721 can be operated in a manner different from the operation mode (press operation) assumed by the production button device 40. It is possible to suitably suppress the operation.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the protruding pin 747 is located near the upper end 773 of the engagement groove 772, the operating stroke of the operating button 721 is at its maximum. When the stepping motor 753 rotates in the opposite direction under this situation, the rotor 752 rotates in the opposite direction as shown in FIG. 53(b1)→FIG. 53(b2).

As already explained, the rotor 752 is restricted from being displaced downward along the central axis CLX, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is restricted from being displaced along the central axis CLX. downward (downward) displacement along the line is allowed. The movable base 741 is restricted from rotating about the central axis CLX by the shaft 728. For these reasons, the protruding pin 747 follows the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776 and descends due to its own weight, and the movable base 741, that is, the operation button 721 is displaced downward (downward) along the central axis CLX.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in FIG. 53(b3) → FIG. 53(b4), the protruding pin 747 Even after reaching 775, the stepping motor 753 continues to rotate. Immediately before the protruding pin 747 reaches the vicinity of the lower end 774 of the engagement groove 772, the output of the rotation drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the movable base 741 comes into contact with the holder unit 750 from above, and the expansion of the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is released.

Note that in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped by pulse control just before the protruding pin 747 comes into contact with the lower end 774 of the engagement groove 772, so that the protruding pin 747 and the lower end 774 are connected to each other. Although the structure is designed to avoid a collision, it is also possible to adopt a structure in which the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped when the protruding pin 747 comes into contact with the lower end portion 774.

After the protruding pin 747 reaches the lower end 774, the current supply to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. In other words, no holding torque is generated in the stepping motor 753 to maintain the rotational position. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the amount of increase in power consumption due to multifunctionalization of the performance button device 40.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, a supplementary explanation will be given of the relationship between each form of the effect button device 40 and the operation stroke. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40 in the first form, FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40 in the second form, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40 in the third form. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an apparatus 40. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the first embodiment in which the operation stroke of the production button device 40 is not expanded, the operation stroke S1 is the gap between the housing 726 (bottom part 736) of the operation button 721 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741. It is the same as Sa. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, in the second embodiment in which the operation stroke of the production button device 40 is expanded to the maximum, the operation stroke S2 is This is the same as the sum of the gap Sa between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder main body 751 (bottom 761) of the holder unit 750. As shown in FIG. 56, also in the third form in which the operation stroke of the production button device 40 is expanded to be about half that of the second form, the operation stroke S3 is the same as that of the housing 726 (bottom part 736) of the operation button 721. This is the same as the sum of the gap Sa between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder main body 751 (bottom 761) of the holder unit 750.

In other words, the first to third embodiments have in common that the operation stroke includes the gap Sa, and are configured such that the difference in the size of the gap Sb directly becomes the difference in the operation stroke.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the movement of the production button device 40 when a pressing operation is performed will be described. In addition, since the movements during operation are the same for the second and third forms, the movement of the production button device 40 when it is in the second form will be explained, and the movement when it is in the third form will be explained. The explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), when a pressing operation (pushing operation) is performed in a situation where the production button device 40 is in the first form, the coil spring 745 (FIG. 42 (see, eg, etc.) is compressed, thereby allowing the operation button 721 to be displaced (descended) in the same direction as the central axis CLX. In the first form, the operation stroke is not expanded, and the movable base 741 is in contact with the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57(a)→FIG. 57(b), the operation button 721 (housing 726) comes into contact with the movable base 741 from above, making further displacement impossible.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when a pressing operation (pushing operation) is performed in a situation where the production button device 40 is in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed in accordance with the operation. This allows the operation button 721 to be displaced (descended) in the same direction as the central axis CLX. In the second form, the operation stroke is expanded, and the movable base 741 is spaced upward from the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750. The holding torque of the movable base 741 (operation block 701) by the stepping motor 753 is greater than the urging force by the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 49, etc.). Therefore, at the initial stage of the pressing operation, the operation button 721 is displaced toward the movable base 741 by compressing the coil spring 745, and displacement of the movable base 741 toward the holder unit 750 is substantially avoided. As shown in FIG. 58(b)→FIG. 58(c), after the operating button 721 contacts the movable base 741 from above, the operating button 721 maintains the contact state by continuing the pressing operation. 721 and the movable base 741 are integrally moved toward the holder unit 750 (button unit 720). Then, the movable base 741 comes into contact with the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above, making further displacement impossible.

As already explained, the displacement direction (operation direction) when the operation button 721 descends toward the movable base 741 and the displacement direction when the operation button 721 descends together with the movable base 741 toward the holder unit 750. (operation direction), and changes in the trajectory during the stroke are avoided.

As already explained, the game performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 includes a performance corresponding to an operation using the performance button device 40. The operation-responsive effects are configured to occur in various scenes during the game, and in this embodiment, a first special effect is provided as one of the operation-responsive effects. The first special effect will be described below with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of the first special effects, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic diagram showing the patterns of the first special effects.

(1st special performance)
As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first special performance is configured to be executed in a part of the game round corresponding to the super reach. Super Reach includes Super Reach A which is not compatible with the first special effect, Super Reach B which is not compatible with the first special effect, Super Reach C which is not compatible with the first special effect, Super Reach A which is compatible with the first special effect, and Super Reach B which is not compatible with the first special effect. It includes Super Reach B, which corresponds to special effects, and Super Reach C, which corresponds to the first special effect, and the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state (expectation level of jackpot) when each super reach occurs is determined by the first special effect. Super reach A that does not support the 1st special effect < Super reach B that does not support the 1st special effect < Super reach C that does not support the 1st special effect < Super reach A that supports the 1st special effect < Super reach B that supports the 1st special effect < Super reach that supports the 1st special effect The reach is set to increase in the order of reach C.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), for all of Super Reach A to C, the performance parts after the transition to reach display (reach display to final display) are roughly divided into first to third parts. In the first part, which constitutes the early part of the reach display, a branching effect from Super Reach A to C is executed, and in the second part, which constitutes the middle part of the reach display, there is a chance-up effect in which the display mode of the character is changed. is executed, and in the third part constituting the final part of the reach display, a chance-up effect that is a cut-in display (interrupt display) is executed.

More specifically, in the branching effect executed in the first part, the characters corresponding to Super Reach A to C are alternately displayed on the display screen 253a, and one of the characters is displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a. By doing so, the super reach that will be the destination for development will be made clear. As already explained, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is set to increase in the order of Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C, so players who expect to transition to the special gaming state can attract attention to developing countries.

In the chance-up performance executed in the second part, an effect is added to the character displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the color of this effect suggests the degree of expectation for transition to a special game state. Three effect colors are provided: white, blue, and red, and are set in such a way that the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state increases in the order of white < blue < red. Note that in the second part, effects may or may not be added, but the configuration is such that when the first special effect occurs, the addition of effects is confirmed.

The chance-up production performed in the third part is a production in which a cut-in image for chance-up is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the symbols and characters displayed on the display screen 253a. Depending on the size of the in-image, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is suggested. Regarding the size of the cut-in image, there are three sizes: small, medium, and large, and the size is set such that the degree of expectation of transition to the special game state increases in the order of small < medium < large. Note that in the third part, the cut-in image may or may not be displayed, but the cut-in image is determined to be displayed when the first special effect occurs.

When the first special effect is executed, the player is suggested to operate the effect button device 40 in at least one of the first to third parts. When the player operates the performance button device 40 in accordance with this suggestion, the performance in each part will proceed based on the operation.

Specifically, when the production button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the first part, the super reach to be developed is clearly indicated in accordance with the operation. Specifically, at the timing of the operation, the character corresponding to the development destination is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the above replacement display ends. When the production button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion in the second part, an effect is added to the character being displayed on the display screen 253a in accordance with the operation. Specifically, a color effect corresponding to the current first special performance is added at the timing of the operation. When the production button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the third part, a cut-in image is displayed on the display screen 253a. Specifically, at the timing of the operation, a cut-in image of a size corresponding to the current first special effect is displayed.

In addition, even though the operation is suggested in the first part, if the production button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period, the development destination is specified at the end timing of the first part. In other words, only the timing at which the development destination is specified differs depending on whether or not the production button device 40 is operated. On the other hand, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period even though the operation is suggested in the second part, the effect display in the second part will be canceled. . Furthermore, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period even though the operation is suggested in the third part, the cut-in display in the third part is canceled.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60, the setting process for the first special effect that is executed as part of the periodic process (for example, the effect setting process in the fluctuation start process) in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be explained. explain.

(Setting process for first special effect)
In the setting process for the first special effect, first, in step S1601, the current gaming state is a normal gaming state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, specifically, one of the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Determine whether or not there is. If a negative determination is made in step S1601, this setting process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the process advances to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether the game round to be executed this time is a game round that supports super reach. If the game round to be executed this time is not a game round compatible with super reach, this setting process is immediately terminated. If the game round to be executed this time is a game round that supports super reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602 and the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1603, a lottery process for the first special effect is executed. In this lottery process, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special performance depending on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a judgment result that corresponds to the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot result), the probability of winning is higher than if the judgment result does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state (missing result). The difference is made so that

If the lottery process in step S1603 results in a non-winning result, a negative determination is made in step S1604, and this setting process ends. If the lottery process in step S1603 results in a winning result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1604 and the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, a process for determining the effect pattern of the first special effect is executed, and in the subsequent step S1606, after executing a first special effect setting process based on the effect pattern determined in step S1605, the process for determining the effect pattern for the first special effect is executed. The setting process ends.

In the first special performance shown in the present embodiment, the transition to the special game state depends on the timing at which the operation suggestion is made after the transition to the ready-to-reach display, and more specifically after the switching of the performance button device 40 to the second form. They are configured to have different transition expectations. The types of first special effects and their distribution will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. Figure 61 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between Super Reach A to C and the type of first special effect, Figure 62 is a schematic diagram showing the allocation table for Super Reach A to B, and Figure 63 is a diagram showing the distribution table for Super Reach C. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a minute table;

As shown in FIG. 61, the first special effects include a first special effect A in which an operation suggestion is made in the first part, a first special effect B in which an operation suggestion is made in the second part, and a first special effect B in which an operation suggestion is made in the second part. A first special performance C where suggestions are made, a first special performance D where operation suggestions are made in the first and third parts, and a first special performance E where operation suggestions are made in the second and third parts. , the game round ends without any operation suggestion being made in any of the first to third parts, and the operation suggestion is made in the special game state (more specifically, the 7th round) that transitions immediately after the game round. 1 Special effects F.

(For super reach A)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(a), in super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A, the timing (during the first part) after 17 seconds has elapsed from the start of the game round, that is, the transition to the reach display The operation suggestion starts at the timing when 2 seconds have passed from the timing, and ends when the performance button device 40 is operated or when 21 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the first part).

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance B, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 28 seconds have elapsed (during the second part).

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance C, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the third part) when 31 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 35 seconds have elapsed (during the third part).

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance D, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the first part) when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 21 seconds have elapsed (during the first part). After that, the operation suggestion starts again at the timing when 31 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (in the third part), and when the production button device 40 is operated or when 35 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (in the third part) (middle), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance E, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 28 seconds have elapsed (during the second part). After that, the operation suggestion starts at the timing when 31 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the production button device 40 is operated or when 35 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach A corresponding to the first special performance F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and the predetermined round (for details, The operation suggestion starts at the start timing of the seventh round), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the seventh round.

(For Super Reach B)
As shown in FIG. 61(b), in super reach B corresponding to the first special effect A, the timing (during the first part) when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, that is, 2 seconds have elapsed from the timing of transition to the reach display. The operation suggestion starts at this timing, and ends when the production button device 40 is operated or when 21 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the first part).

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special performance B, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 28 seconds have elapsed (during the second part).

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special performance C, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the third part) when 32 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 36 seconds have elapsed (during the third part).

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special performance D, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the first part) when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 21 seconds have elapsed (during the first part). After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 32 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the production button device 40 is operated or when 36 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special performance E, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 28 seconds have elapsed (during the second part). After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 32 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the production button device 40 is operated or when 36 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ), the operation suggestion ends.

In Super Reach B corresponding to the first special performance F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and the predetermined round (for details, The operation suggestion starts at the start timing of the seventh round), and ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the seventh round.

(For Super Reach C)
As shown in FIG. 61(c), in the super reach C corresponding to the first special effect B, the timing (during the second part) when 24 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, that is, 2 seconds have elapsed from the timing of transition to the reach display. The operation suggestion starts at this timing, and ends when the production button device 40 is operated or when 28 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the second part).

In the super reach C corresponding to the first special performance C, the operation suggestion starts at the timing (during the third part) when 33 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 37 seconds have elapsed (during the third part).

In the super reach C corresponding to the first special performance E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) after 24 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the performance button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. The operation suggestion ends when 28 seconds have elapsed (during the first part). After that, the operation suggestion is started at the timing when 33 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part), and when the production button device 40 is operated or when 37 seconds have passed from the start of the game round (during the third part). ), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach C corresponding to the first special performance F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and the predetermined round (7th round) in the special gaming state that transitions after the end of the game round ) The operation suggestion starts at the start timing, and ends when the performance button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the seventh round.

Note that in Super Reach C, unlike Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the first special effect A and the first special effect D are not supported (configured so that they do not occur).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, the relationship between game results and distribution of the first special effects A to F will be explained. In addition, in FIGS. 62 and 63, when the production button device 40 is operated based on the operation suggestion, the production button device 40 switches from the second mode to the first mode with a circle mark, and the operation is not performed. Those in which the second form is maintained even if performed are marked with a triangle.

(For Super Reach A and Super Reach B)
If it is decided to execute the first special effect for a game round in which super reach A to B corresponding to a losing result is executed, as shown in FIG. 30% becomes the first special effect B, and 20% becomes the first special effect C. If it is decided that the first special effect will be executed for the game round in which super reach A to B corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed, 10% of it will be the first special effect A and 15% will be the first special effect. Performance B, 60% is first special performance C, 5% is first special performance D, and 10% is first special performance E. If it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game round in which Super Reach A to B corresponding to the guaranteed variable jackpot result is executed, 10% of it will be the first special effect A and 15% of it will be the first special effect. Performance B, 55% is first special performance C, 5% is first special performance D, 10% is first special performance E, and 5% is first special performance F.

(For Super Reach C)
On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game round in which the super reach C corresponding to the winning result is executed, as shown in FIG. Performance A, 30% becomes first special performance B, and 20% becomes first special performance C. If it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game round in which the super reach C corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed, 15% of it will be the first special effect B and 70% of it will be the first special effect C. , 15% becomes the first special effect E. If it is decided to execute the first special effect for the game round in which the super reach C corresponding to the guaranteed variable jackpot result is executed, 15% of it will be the first special effect B and 60% of it will be the first special effect C. , 15% becomes the first special effect E, and 10% becomes the first special effect F.

In other words, when super reach A to C are executed, the expectation level for transition to the special game state increases in the order of first special performance A < first special performance B < first special performance C, and the first special performance For D to F, the transition to the special gaming state is determined, and for the first special performance F, it is especially determined that the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state will be the third normal gaming state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64, the first special effect process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular process will be described.

(First special effect processing)
In the process for the first special performance, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round compatible with the first special performance. If it is a game round compatible with the first special effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1701 and the process advances to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether the production button device 40 has been switched to the second mode. If the switching to the second mode has not been completed, the process advances to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift to the ready-to-reach display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form, and the first special effect process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1703, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing to shift to the ready-to-reach display, the process advances to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round that supports return to the second form. Specifically, it is determined whether the game round corresponds to either the first special performance D or the first special performance E described above. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the first special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process advances to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether it is time to return to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1706, the first special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the process advances to step S1707. In step S1707, a return process is executed to return the effect button device 40 to the second form, and then the first special effect process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process advances to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period is in which the operation of the production button device 40 is effectively accepted. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation validation flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914.

If a negative determination is made in step S1708, the process advances to step S1709. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the operation of the production button device 40. If a negative determination is made in step S1709, the first special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1709, the process advances to step S1710.

In step S1710, a process for setting an operation validity period for effectively accepting the operation of the production button device 40 is performed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the operation valid period counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914. The value of this operation valid period count is subtracted every time the MPU 912 executes a regular process (for example, the first special effect process). From then on, the operation of the production button device 40 will be effectively accepted until the operation validity period elapses (until the value of the operation validity period counter becomes "0"). Further, in step S1710, an operation validation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914.

After executing the operation suggestion start process in the subsequent step S1711, the first special effect process ends. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message “Press the button” for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button, and the rest on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

Returning to the explanation of step S1708, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, that is, if the operation is valid (if the operation validation flag is stored in the RAM 914), the process advances to step S1712. In step S1712, it is determined whether it is the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation valid period counter in the RAM 914 is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the process advances to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether the production button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S1713, and the first special effect processing is ended. If an operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1713 and the process advances to step S1714.

In step S1714, operation reception notification processing and operation suggestion termination processing are executed. In the operation reception notification process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the button pattern, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S1715, an operation corresponding performance execution process is performed. As a result, when the production button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the first part, the character corresponding to the development destination is displayed stationary at the center of the display screen 253a, and in the second part, the production button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion. When is operated, a color effect corresponding to the current first special effect is added, and when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the third part, a color effect corresponding to the current first special effect is added. A cut-in image of the corresponding size is displayed. Sound effects and BGM corresponding to these various effects will be output from the speaker section 27.

In the following step S1716, delay switching processing is executed. The delay switching process is a process for driving and controlling the stepping motor 753 to maintain the production button device 40 in the first form. Specifically, if the amount of depression during operation is insufficient, the stepping motor 753 is driven to compensate for this and assist in returning to the first mode, but this operation is performed based on detection information from the detection sensor 791. Based on this, there will be a delay until it is confirmed that the player's hand has left the production button device 40. Note that if the player continues to press the performance button device 40 even after the initial validity period has elapsed, switching to the first mode is executed with the expiration of the validity period as a trigger.

After executing the delay switching process in step S1716, the process proceeds to step S1717, erases the operation validation flag stored in the various flag storage area 933, and ends the first special effect process.

Returning to the explanation of step S1712, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed without any operation of the production button device 40, the process proceeds to step S1718, and the operation suggestion end process is executed. . In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the button pattern, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S1719, switching processing to the first mode is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled to maintain the performance button device 40 in the first form. That is, unlike the case of switching to the first form in response to an operation, the production button device 40 is quickly switched to the first form if no operation is performed. Thereafter, the operation validation flag is cleared in step S1717, and the first special effect processing is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1701, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the game round is not compatible with the first special effect, the process advances to step S1720. In step S1720, it is determined whether the game is in a special game state corresponding to the first special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S1720, the first special effect processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1720, the process advances to step S1721. In step S1721, it is determined whether it is time to start the seventh round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1721, the process advances to step S1710.

In step S1710, a process for setting an operation validity period for effectively accepting the operation of the production button device 40 is performed. Thereby, the operation of the production button device 40 will be effectively accepted from now on until the operation validity period has elapsed. Further, in step S1710, an operation validation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After executing the operation suggestion start process in the subsequent step S1711, the first special effect process ends. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message “Press the button” for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button, and the rest on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

Returning to the explanation of step S1721, if a negative determination is made in step S1721, the process advances to step S1712. If a negative determination is made in step S1712, each process of steps S1713 to S1717 is executed, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, after executing each process of steps S1717 to S1719, this first special effect end the process.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, a supplementary explanation will be given of the flow of the first special effect. FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when Super Reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed. FIG.

(Super reach A compatible with 1st special effect A)
At the timing ta1, the variable display of the symbols is started on the operating port display section DL of the main display section D, and the variable display of the symbols is started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At the timing of ta2, the display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a has shifted to the ready-to-reach display. This game round is a game round in which the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance A is executed, and at the timing of ta2, the first part corresponding to the branch performance that indicates the development destination is started. At the timing of ta2, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is extended. However, no operation suggestion is started at this point.

After the start of the first part, on the display screen 253a, an inciting display that incites the transition to super reach is performed, and then the above-mentioned branching effect, specifically, a replacement display of each character corresponding to super reach A to C is executed. At timing ta3, when a predetermined standby period has elapsed since the start of this replacement display, the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27 execute the operation suggestion of the production button device 40, and the operation of the production button device 40 is enabled. Ru. When the production button device 40 is operated at the timing of ta4 when the operation suggestion continues, more specifically, at the timing of ta4 when the operation suggestion and operation validity period are about to end, this operation causes the display screen 253a to correspond to Super Reach A. The image of the fairy will be displayed in a static manner. In other words, the destination will be clearly indicated based on the player's operation.

Then, at timing ta5, the first part shifts to the second part, and at timing ta6, shifts to the third part. Thereafter, the third part ends at the timing of ta7, and at the timing of the subsequent ta8, the game result of the relevant game (for example, the jackpot result) is displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a in order to clearly show it to the player. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the symbol corresponding to the game result is also stopped and displayed in the actuation opening display section DL.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that the later the timing at which the operation suggestion is started after the production button device 40 switches to the second mode, the higher the expectation of transition to the special gaming state, and in the first part, Due to the occurrence of the operation suggestion, the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state is lowered compared to the case where the operation suggestion occurs in the second part or the third part. However, even if a manipulation suggestion occurs in the first part, it is difficult to visually identify the first special performance A and the first special performance D at the time of the manipulation suggestion, and the player It is possible to stimulate expectations for the first special effect D. This is preferable in order to prevent execution of the operation suggestion in the first part from becoming a factor that rapidly reduces the level of attention to the game.

(Super reach A compatible with 1st special effect C)
At the timing tb1, the variable display of symbols is started on the operating port display section DL of the main display section D, and the variable display of symbols is started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At timing tb2, the display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a has shifted to the ready-to-reach display. This game round is a game round in which the super reach A corresponding to the first special performance C is executed, and at the timing tb2, the first part corresponding to the branch performance that indicates the development destination is started. At this timing tb2, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded. However, no operation suggestion is started at this point.

After the start of the first part, on the display screen 253a, an inciting display that incites the transition to super reach is performed, and then the above-mentioned branching effect, specifically, a replacement display of each character corresponding to super reach A to C is executed. Unlike the example in FIG. 65, in the first part, the image of the fairy corresponding to super reach A is displayed on the display screen 253a without starting the operation suggestion, and the player is clearly shown the development destination.

At timing tb4, there is a transition from the first part to the second part, and then at timing tb5, there is a transition to the third part. Also in the second part, no operation suggestion of the production button device 40 is made, and the operation suggestion is carried over to the third part and thereafter.

At timing tb6 after the start of the third part, the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27 execute the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is enabled. When the production button device 40 is operated at the timing tb7 when the operation suggestion continues, specifically at the timing tb7 when the operation suggestion and operation validity period are about to end, the symbol displayed on the display screen 253a by the operation is A cut-in image for increasing the chance is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the characters.

After that, the third part ends at timing tb8, and at timing tb9, the game result of the relevant game (for example, jackpot result) is displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a to clearly show the result to the player. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the symbol corresponding to the game result is also stopped and displayed in the actuation opening display section DL.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that the later the timing at which operation suggestions are started after the production button device 40 switches to the second mode, the higher the expectation of transition to the special gaming state. , if no operation suggestion occurs in the first part or the second part, it is determined that an operation suggestion will occur in the third part or later. According to such a configuration, the period during which the second mode is maintained becomes longer, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased publicly.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If the performance button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact on the performance button device 40 can be strengthened and attention can be drawn to the performance button device 40 itself. Here, when the production button device 40 is in the second mode, the operation of the production button device 40 (operation button 721) is disabled based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second mode. It is suggested. A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the period during which the production button device 40 is maintained in the second form changes variously based on the result of the jackpot lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player's attention not only to the change in form but also to the length of the period during which the second form is maintained. This is preferable in order to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase attention to the game. In particular, it is possible to make players who wish to transition to the special gaming state expect that the period in which the second mode is maintained will be as long as possible (so that it will be the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in increasing attention to switching to the second mode.

If the production button device 40 switches to the second form with the transition to the ready-to-reach display, and operation suggestions are generated in the first part, second part, and third part after the transition to the ready-to-reach display, the game The person can estimate the period of time maintained in the second form from the progress of the display effect without measuring the period of time maintained in the second form. By clarifying the difference between the predetermined waiting periods in this manner, the above-described attention level improvement effect can be suitably exhibited.

If the production button device 40 suddenly switches to the first mode while waiting for an operation suggestion, it may confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, when the production button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the second mode is maintained until the predetermined waiting period elapses, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned inconvenience. The occurrence can be suitably suppressed.

As described above, if the operation stroke is larger in the second form than in the first form, it is possible to perform the first special effect while suppressing the complexity of the operation due to the change to the second form. The performance button device 40 can be made more conspicuous.

In the first embodiment, the difference in period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the first part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part is , is configured to be longer than the period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) until the operation suggestion for the first special effect occurs in the first part, and in the second part. The difference in period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the third part is due to the timing of switching to the second form (transition to reach display). timing) to when the operation suggestion for the first special effect occurs in the first part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference in the predetermined waiting period from becoming obscured in the flow of the game and becoming difficult to understand.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the first special performance is divided into a plurality of parts (first to third parts), and the operation suggestion of the performance button device 40 in the second form is generated in each part. Although the configuration obtained has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. At least, if a plurality of first special effects (first special effects A to first special effects F) are provided that have different waiting periods from when the switching to the second mode is completed until when an operation suggestion occurs. However, it is optional whether or not to provide a correlation between the timing of occurrence of the operation suggestion and each of the above parts.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect A is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect B is executed is assumed to be 7 seconds. , the difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect B is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs when the first special effect C is executed was standardized as 7 seconds, but the timing difference is optional. However, in order to suppress confusion in the timing of operation suggestions, the difference in the timing at which operation suggestions occur should be longer than the period from when the production button device 40 switches to the second form to the timing at which an operation suggestion can first occur. It is preferable to do so.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the timing of transition to the reach display and the timing of transition to the second form are arranged to be the same, but the timing is not necessarily limited to this, and the timing of transition to the second form is Optional. For example, it is possible to configure the system to shift to the second form before transitioning to the ready-to-reach display (for example, to transition to the second mode at the start timing of the corresponding game round), or to switch to the second mode after shifting to the ready-to-reach display. It is also possible to have a configuration that shifts to two types.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment described above, by providing a correlation between the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display and the timing of switching to the second mode, the player who is watching the symbol display device 253 can easily switch to the second mode. Although the configuration has been adopted to prevent the timing of occurrence from being overlooked, instead of or in addition to this, when the production button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the symbol display device 253 and the speaker section 27 are used to switch to the second mode. It is also possible to have a configuration that suggests or explicitly indicates.

For example, a message such as text or an image indicating that the production button device 40 will be transformed may be displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, or a message or sound effect may be displayed from the speaker section 27 indicating that the production button device 40 will be transformed. It is also possible to output.

<Modification 5>
In the game round in which the first special performance is executed, it is also possible to configure the system to indicate to the player the period during which the performance button device 40 is maintained in the second form. For example, an effect may be added to the outer periphery of the display screen 253a when switching to the second mode, and the effect may change depending on the period during which the second mode is maintained. For example, moving from the 1st part (early stage) to the 2nd part (middle stage) will increase the effect by one level, and by moving from the 2nd part (middle stage) to the 3rd part (late stage), the effect will increase by one level. It may be configured to be larger. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the effect button device 40 terminates the display of the effect based on switching to the first form.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment described above, when the production button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the counting of the period until the execution of the operation suggestion is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if there is a plurality of periods from when the first special performance switches to the second mode until the operation suggestion is executed, and the configuration is such that the period until the operation suggestion is executed is counted from the start timing of the game round. It is also possible.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the operation is monitored based on the information from the detection sensor 791, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) in the stroke direction is monitored based on the information from the rotary encoder 792. However, it is also possible to omit the detection sensor 791 so that the rotary encoder 792 also functions as the detection sensor 791. That is, a configuration in which the operation is monitored based on information from the rotary encoder 792 is not denied. In such a configuration, the rotation angle of the rotor 752 may be changed to follow the displacement of the operation button 721 even when the operation button 721 is displaced from the standby position to the operation position.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the height position of the operation detection that triggers the start of the operation corresponding performance is configured to change in accordance with the change in the operation stroke, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the height position of the operation detection does not change even if the operation stroke changes. In other words, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the stroke for moving to the detection position that triggers the start of the operation-compatible performance changes.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment described above, when the production button device 40 is in the second form and the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721 from the upper surface portion 28a of the upper bulging portion 28 changes, the operation button 721 is operated by the holding torque of the stepping motor 753. Although the configuration is such that the button 721 is maintained at the maximum protrusion position, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the tip is maintained at the maximum protrusion position by a biasing force from a biasing member such as a spring.

<Modification 10>
In the game round in which the first special performance is executed, the timer may be configured to display the period that has elapsed since the performance button device 40 was switched between the two modes on the display screen 253a or the like.

<Modification 11>
In the game round in which the first special effect is executed, if the effect button device 40 is operated from the time when switching to the second mode until the operation of the effect button device 40 is suggested (up to the first detection position CP1) If the button is pressed), the planned operation suggestion or first special effect may be canceled. In this case, the production button device 40 may be configured to forcefully return to the first mode. With such a configuration, after switching to the second mode, the player is prompted to wait until an operation suggestion occurs, and the effect button device 40 is prevented from being blindly operated after switching to the second mode. can.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, the difference in period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the first part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part is , was configured to be longer than the period from the timing of switching to the second form (timing of transition to reach display) until the operation suggestion for the first special effect occurs in the first part, but the former is longer than the latter. It may be configured such that the value is larger, or it may be configured such that both of them are made equal to each other.

In addition, the difference in period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the second part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is made in the third part is due to the switching to the second form. Although the period from the timing (timing of transition to reach display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part is configured to be longer than the period, the former is configured to be larger than the latter. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the two match.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special performance is executed is measured from the start timing of the game round, but the starting point for period measurement is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special performance is executed is measured from the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment described above, the operation button 721 is configured to come into contact with the movable base 741 by descending, but a plurality of contact portions on the movable base 741 may be provided so as to surround the central axis CLX of the operation button 721. is preferred. With this arrangement, it is possible to suitably suppress the disturbance in the posture of the operation button 721 when the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 come into contact with each other.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure related to the first special effect, which is one of the effects corresponding to the operation using the effect button device 40, specifically, the structure related to the second part to the third part is the same as that of the first embodiment. It is different from the form. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 67, a supplementary explanation will be given of the configuration related to the production button device 40, and then, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the production button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered by operating the production button device 40. In other words, "total operation stroke" = "movement range of operation button 721", and the object to be moved is limited to operation button 721 (button unit 720 as a whole does not descend as one).

On the other hand, when the production button device 40 is in the second form, "full operation stroke" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It is a descending movement range. Specifically, the holding torque by the stepping motor 753 described above is greater than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, so that when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protrusion position, the holding torque is applied against the biasing force of the coil spring 745. While the operation button 721 is lowered, the position held by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum protrusion position, the operation button 721 is first lowered by itself. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the player's pressing operation exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, and the entire button unit 720 becomes integrated. It will descend.

Here, within the movement range of the button unit 720, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified from the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case of the second form, five detection positions CP1 to CP5 are detected in order from the top to the maximum protrusion position to the lower limit position. The detection position is set. The uppermost first detection position CP1 is a position where an operation is detected based on detection information from the detection sensor 791. On the other hand, the second to fifth detection positions CP2 to CP5 are positions where the lowering of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

In addition, the distance L1 from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, the distance L2 from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, and the distance L3 from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3. , the distance L4 from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, and the distance L5 from the fourth detection position to the fifth detection position CP5 are uniform.

Next, the relationship between the second part and the third part in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). In FIG. 69(a), the case of super reach A is illustrated, but the basic configuration is the same for super reach B and super reach C.

In the third part, the display mode of the character image CA is a low expectation mode (before death) where the expectation level of transition to the special game state is relatively low, and a mode where the expectation level of transition to the special game state is relatively high. A high expectation mode (after transformation) is provided. In the second half of the second part, a transformation effect of the character is executed, and when the transformation effect is successful and the display mode of the character image CA is switched from a low expectation mode to a high expectation mode, the high expectation mode is changed. By executing the performance in the third part while maintaining the state, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state becomes relatively high. On the other hand, if the transformation performance fails, the display mode of the character image CA is maintained in the low expectation mode even after the transition to the third part. As a result, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state becomes relatively low.

In the first half of the second part, a foreshadowing performance of this transformation performance is executed. Specifically, the effect EF is added and updated to the displayed character image CA. As shown in FIG. 69(b), there are five levels of the size of the added effect EF, LV1 to LV5, increasing in the order of LV1<LV2<LV3<LV4<LV5. The degree of success expectation of the transformation performance is differentiated such that it increases as the size of the effect EF increases.

The trigger for adding/updating the effect EF is the operation of the production button device 40. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), when the first detection position is reached, the effect EF is added at LV1, and when the second detection position CP2 is reached, the effect EF is changed from LV1 to LV2. will be updated. After that, the size of the effect EF is updated from LV2 to LV3 in a part when the third detection position CP3 is reached, and the size of the effect EF is updated from LV3 to LV3 in a part when the fourth detection position CP4 is reached. LV4 is updated, and in a part of the case when the fifth detection position CP5 is reached, the magnitude of the effect EF is updated from LV4 to LV5.

Here, four update patterns, update patterns A to D, are provided as update patterns for effect EF, and when a decision is made to execute the first special effect, one of these update patterns is set. Ru. Here, each update pattern will be explained with reference to FIG. 70(b).

In update pattern A, effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, and the effect EF of LV2 is maintained without being changed between the second detection position CP2 and the fifth detection position CP5.

In update pattern B, effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2 and the effect EF is updated to LV3 when it is displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF of LV3 is updated between the third detection position and the fifth detection position CP5. maintained without being maintained.

In update pattern C, effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when it is displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF is updated to LV4 when it is displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. , and when the fourth detection position CP4 is displaced from the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF of LV4 is maintained without being updated.

In update pattern D, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when it is displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF is updated to LV4 when it is displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. When the fourth detection position CP4 is displaced from the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF is updated to LV5.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, when the operation button 721 is operated, the effect level changes in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721. The subsequent development (direction in the third part) is suggested. Here, with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 71 and 72, the process for effect change (first special effect execution process for the second part) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular process. ) will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the first special performance execution process for the second part, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the first special performance. . If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the present execution process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process advances to step S1802, and a process for executing linked display is executed. This linked display processing will be described later.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 is in the second form. In this embodiment as well, similarly to the first embodiment, the production button device 40 is configured to switch from the first form to the second form at the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, this execution process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the process advances to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether the operation is still valid. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether it is time to start suggesting an operation. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the present execution process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, an operation valid period setting process is executed in step S1806, and an operation validation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914. After that, in step S1807, the operation suggestion start process is executed, and then the main execution process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1804, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, that is, if the operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not the operation validity period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the process advances to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791 whether the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If a negative determination is made in step S1809, the present execution process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the process advances to step S1810. In step S1810, operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the subsequent step S1811, an effect addition process is executed to add an effect EF to the character image CA being displayed on the display screen 253a. In the effect addition process, the speaker unit 27 outputs a sound effect corresponding to the effect addition, and an effect addition command is output to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 performs a process of adding the effect EF of LV1 to the character image CA currently displayed on the display screen 253a based on receiving the effect addition command.

In the following step S1812, a cooperation acceptance flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. In the following step S1813, a valid period resetting process is executed. In this embodiment, the operation stroke of the production button device 40 is extended by being in the second form, and an effect change that is linked (interlocked) with the movement of the operation button 721 is generated using this extended stroke. do. As a general rule, the period during which this effect change occurs is the valid period for operation reception, but if an operation is performed near the end of the valid period due to the stroke extension described above, the effect change will occur. There may be insufficient time for this. Specifically, since the effective period of the effect update is measured using a timer counter that measures the effective period of operation, in step S1813, in order to secure (earn) a period for generating such an effect change, Operation acceptance = Extend the validity period instead of resetting the timer counter. Specifically, the operation validity period will be extended by 1 second from the initially set period. Thereafter, in step S1814, the operation validation flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the present execution process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1808, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, that is, if the operation validity period has elapsed, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, operation suggestion termination processing is executed. Thereafter, in step S1816, a switching process is executed to return the production button device 40 to the first form, and in step S1814, the operation validation flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the main execution is executed. end the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the cooperative display execution process will be described. In the cooperative display execution process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is the production branching timing. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the transformation effect in the second half of the second part. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if the first half of the second part is being executed, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether the validity period after the reset in step S1813 is still valid. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the present cooperative display execution process is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process advances to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether the timing has elapsed after the valid period after resetting. If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process advances to step S1904, and a process for specifying the position of the operation button 721 is executed based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, it is determined in which of the second detection position CP2 to fifth detection position CP5 the operation button 721 is located. Specifically, whether or not there has been a displacement from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, whether there has been displacement from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and whether there has been displacement from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP3. It is determined whether or not it has been displaced to position CP4, and whether or not it has been displaced from fourth detection position CP4 to fifth detection position CP5.

In the following step S1905, if the first detection position CP1 is displaced to the second detection position CP2 in step S1904, or if the second detection position CP2 is displaced to the third detection position CP3, the fourth detection position is changed from the third detection position CP3. In the case of displacement to the position CP4, or in the case of displacement from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF is updated based on the current update mode.

Note that if you release your hand from the operation button 721 during operation, the operation button 721 will rise by one section due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745, but even if the position of the operation button 721 changes due to this, the effect level will change. It will not be done. In other words, the effect EF of the character image CA changes in conjunction with the downward movement of the operation button 721, but does not change in conjunction with the upward movement of the operation button 721, which is an irreversible relationship.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, that is, if the validity period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1906, where a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form, and then this cooperative display process is executed. finish.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if it is the start timing of the transformation effect that is the latter half of the second part, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether the cooperation reception flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the operation corresponding display process is executed in step S1908, and then the present cooperative display execution process is ended. In the operation-compatible display process, the display mode of the character image CA is changed to the display mode (low expectation mode/high expectation mode) set at the start of the main game round. If a negative determination is made in step S1907, that is, if the production button device 40 is not operated during the valid period despite the operation suggestion, a negative determination is made in step S1907 and the process proceeds to step S1909. , after executing the operation-incompatible display process, the present cooperative display execution process ends. In the operation-incompatible display process, the display mode of the character image CA is set to a low expectation mode regardless of the mode set at the start of the game round. That is, if the effect button device 40 is not operated, the display mode of the character image CA remains in the low expectation level mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the flow of the first special effect B corresponding to the update pattern D in this embodiment will be explained. In addition, although FIGS. 73 and 74 illustrate the case of super reach A, the basic flow of the effect is the same even in the cases of super reach B and super reach C.

In FIG. 73(1), the super reach has developed, and the character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a. Moreover, at this timing, the effect button device 40 is already in the second form, and the operation stroke has been expanded.

At a predetermined timing after the transition to the second part, the symbol display device 253 and the speaker unit 27 suggest the operation of the production button device 40. In addition, in the operation suggestion, a message for operation suggestion is displayed at the top of the display screen 253a, and an image imitating a button in the second form and the remaining operation validity period are shown at the center of the display screen 253a. Although indicators are displayed, descriptions of these images are omitted.

When the player presses the production button device 40 and the operation button 721 descends from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, as shown in FIG. 73(2), the effect of LV1 is applied to the character image CA currently being displayed. EF is added. Thereafter, the effect level is updated from LV1 to LV2 at the timing when the operation button 721 descends from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2 (see FIG. 73 (3)), and the operation button 721 moves to the second detection position CP2. The effect level is updated from LV2 to LV3 at the timing when the operation button 721 descends from the third detection position CP3 to the third detection position CP3 (see FIG. 73 (4)), and the timing when the operation button 721 descends from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. The effect level is updated from LV3 to LV4 (see FIG. 74 (5)), and the effect level is updated from LV4 to LV5 at the timing when the operation button 721 descends from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5. (See FIG. 74(6)).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(7), the display mode of the character image CA is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode in the transformation effect. Thereafter, the process moves to the third part while maintaining the display mode of the character image CA (high expectation mode and effect EF added state).

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

A character image is generated when the button unit 720 (operation button 721) reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to a "predetermined position") on the path where the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is displaced when the production button device 40 is pressed. When an effect EF is added to CA and the operating means reaches a second detection position CP2 to a fifth detection position CP5 (corresponding to a "specific position") after the addition of the effect EF, the size of the effect EF is changed. . In this way, if the configuration is such that the effect EF is added and then the size is changed in conjunction with the operation of one of the operating means, it becomes possible to create an unprecedented and innovative performance. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

When reaching the third to fifth detection positions CP3 to CP5, the size of the effect EF does not necessarily change, and the size may not change. Generating such a branch is advantageous in suppressing changes based on operations from becoming monotonous and enhancing the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect.

When implementing a configuration in which the size of the effect EF is changed in conjunction with an operation, it is assumed that the impact of the size change will be stronger if the change has a certain degree of speed. Here, if a time limit is set for the size change as shown in this embodiment, the player is prompted to operate the operation button 721 all at once toward the maximum pressing position, which contributes to the reinforcement of the impact described above. can.

As shown in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the size of the effect EF can change when the operation button 721 reaches each of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5, that is, the change occurs in multiple stages. If the configuration is such that the size can be changed, the expressiveness in changing the size can be suitably improved.

In the configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the change in the size of the effect EF are linked as described above, by switching the production button device 40 to the second form and expanding the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance, Cooperation between the two can be strengthened. Further, it is assumed that the operation of the operation button 721 is often performed vigorously. In this regard, a configuration in which the operation stroke is extended in advance makes it easier to gain a grace period for changing the size of the effect EF. This is preferable in order to prevent the identifiability from decreasing due to excessively rapid size changes.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the effect level is updated when the operation button 721 is lowered with the effect EF added to the character image CA, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the user releases the operation button 721 before the effect finally changes, the effect may be updated to become smaller.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the first to fifth detection positions CP1 to CP5 are set so that the intervals between the detection positions of the operation buttons 721 are uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this. When pressing the operation button 721, the operation button 721 may descend faster toward the back side due to momentum. In view of this situation, a difference may be provided so that the above-mentioned interval becomes larger from the upper side to the lower side. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the process of changing the effect level from becoming difficult to see.

Further, the distance from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 does not necessarily have to be the same as other distances. In view of the fact that the execution condition for the operation corresponding performance is satisfied by reaching the first detection position CP1, it is also possible to make the interval from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 larger than other intervals. .

<Modification 3>
Regarding the effect level update pattern shown in the second embodiment, if the change in effect level stops midway through the operation, it will not change any further, but if the effect level stops midway through the operation, the maximum pressing position An update pattern may be provided in which the effect level changes all at once by skipping over a plurality of levels at the fifth detection position CP5).

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment described above, the condition for accepting the operation response performance is satisfied when it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. It is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the maximum pressing position (fifth detection position CP5) based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, the acceptance condition for the operation corresponding performance is satisfied.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment described above, when the production button device 40 is operated in a situation where the stroke expansion of the production button device 40 is in the second form, the movement is linked to the movement of the operation button 721. However, when the effect level of the character image CA is changed, when the effect level of the effect button device 40 is operated in a situation where the stroke expansion of the effect button device 40 is in the first form where it is not extended. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect level of the character image CA changes in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721. If the stroke of the operation button 721 is small, the effect level changes at a short pitch, making it difficult to enjoy the process of change. In view of these circumstances, in order to link the operation of the operation button 721 and the change in the effect level, it is preferable to shift the operation stroke of the operation button 721 to an extended state.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to vary the resistance torque (for example, static torque or drive torque) generated in the stepping motor 753 when the button unit 720 is lowered. For example, the resistance torque may be increased as the position approaches the maximum pressing position from the maximum protrusion position. By increasing the operating resistance on the back side in the operating direction in this way, it is possible to prevent the change in the size of the effect from ending too quickly and making it difficult to identify the change.

<Modification 7>
It is not necessarily necessary that the intervals between the detection positions CP1 to CP5 be constant. For example, a difference may be provided such that the distance increases from the maximum protrusion position to the maximum pressing position. With such a configuration, the time required for movement between positions can be increased the further back in the operating direction. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the size change of the effect from ending too quickly and making it difficult to identify the change. Alternatively, a difference may be provided such that the interval becomes larger as the position approaches the maximum protrusion position from the maximum pressing position.

<Modification 8>
When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the direction of the pressing operation, the size of the effect EF can be changed; It may be configured such that when the operation button 721 reaches the second to fourth detection positions CP2 to CP4 based on the displacement in the direction, the size of the effect EF cannot be changed. With this configuration, even if your hand leaves the operation button 721 before reaching the fifth detection position CP5, the change in the size of the effect EF will not be undone due to the operation button 721 rebounding or the like. do not have. This is preferable in order to avoid unintended size changes due to operational errors or the like.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second special performance that is linked to a movable performance device provided in the pachinko machine 10 is provided as one of the performance corresponding to the operation related to the performance button device 40. It is different from the form etc. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the second special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 75, and 76. FIG. 75 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing the types of second special effects.

As shown in FIG. 75, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first movable presentation device 300 and a second movable presentation device 400 provided on the front door frame 14. The first movable presentation device 300 is arranged on the front part of the upper frame portion of the front door frame 14, and the second movable presentation device 400 is arranged on the upper surface portion of the upper frame portion of the front door frame 14. In addition to the first movable performance device 300 and the second movable performance device 400, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a third movable performance device 803 and a fourth movable performance device 804.

The third movable performance device 803 is arranged above the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The third movable presentation device 803 has a movable decorative body that can be moved between a standby position where overlap with the display screen 253a is avoided and a presentation position that overlaps the display screen 253a from the front. When the effect by 803 is executed, the movable decorative body is configured to move from the standby position to the effect position.

The fourth movable performance device 804 is arranged at the bottom of the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The fourth movable performance device 804 has a movable decorative body that can be moved between a standby position where overlapping with the display screen 253a is avoided and a performance position that overlaps the display screen 253a from the front. When the effect shown in step 804 is executed, the movable decorative body is configured to move from the standby position to the effect position.

In addition, by moving the movable decorations of the third movable presentation device 803 and the fourth movable presentation device 804 to the presentation position, the overlap with the display screen 253a (specifically, the variable display area ME of the symbol) is increased. It is sufficient if the display screen 253a is configured as shown in FIG. However, in order to strengthen the impact at the time of presentation, it is preferable that the overlap with the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) be made smaller in the standby position than in the presentation position.

Incidentally, the movable decorations of the third movable presentation device 803 and the fourth movable presentation device 804 also have a light emitting function, similar to the first movable presentation device 300 and the second movable presentation device 400, and can be moved to the presentation position. It is configured to emit light when moving.

Although the first movable presentation device 300, the second movable presentation device 400, the third movable presentation device 803, and the fourth movable presentation device 804 all have a function that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to a special gaming state, There are differences in the level of expectation when each production device 300, 400, 803, 804 operates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, in the second special performance A in which the first movable performance device 300 operates, the transition to the special game state is confirmed, and in other cases, the second movable performance device 400 operates. The second special performance B, in which the transition is performed, has the highest expectation level, followed by the second special performance C, in which the third movable performance device 803 operates, and the second special performance D, in which the fourth movable performance device 804 operates. The difference is set so that the level of expectation is the lowest.

The second special effects A to D are all similar in that they are effects that are executed by operating the effect button device 40 in the second mode. Although such a configuration is preferable in terms of suppressing the monotony of the game by diversifying the effects, the following disadvantages occur because there are scattered areas that the player should pay attention to. In other words, in a production using a movable production device, the strongest impact is when the movable production device starts operating, but there are scattered points that require attention, so it is difficult to understand the movement when the movable production device starts operating. more likely to be missed. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised to eliminate such inconveniences. The invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75, 77, and 78. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram of the front door frame 14 seen from the front side of the gaming machine, and FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram of the performance button device 40.

As shown in FIG. 75, the front door frame 14 is provided with an annular illumination section 24 in which a plurality of light emitting sections LT1 to LT14 are arranged so as to surround the window section 22. The annular illumination section 24 includes a first light emitting section LT1 adjacent to the production button device 40, a second light emitting section LT2, a third light emitting section LT3, a fourth light emitting section LT4, a fifth light emitting section LT5, and a sixth light emitting section. part LT6, seventh light emitting part LT7, eighth light emitting part LT8, ninth light emitting part LT9, tenth light emitting part LT10, eleventh light emitting part LT11, and twelfth light emitting part LT12 toward the first movable presentation device 300. They are arranged at equal intervals, and the last twelfth light emitting unit LT12 is adjacent to the first movable presentation device 300. Furthermore, a thirteenth light emitting section LT13 and a fourteenth light emitting section LT14 are arranged outside the eleventh light emitting section LT11 so as to bypass the eleventh light emitting section LT11 from the outside. The fourteenth light emitting unit LT14 is adjacent to the second movable presentation device 400. In other words, the arrangement of the light emitting parts constituting the annular illumination part is branched into a route toward the first movable presentation device 300 and a route toward the second movable presentation device 400.

As shown in FIG. 77, the seventh to ninth light emitting units LT7 to 9th light emitting units LT9 are arranged along the left and right edges of the display screen 253a, so that changes in the distance from the display screen 253a are suppressed. There is. The upper part of the display screen 253a (specifically, the part parallel to the ninth light emitting part LT9) and the lower part of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the part parallel to the seventh light emitting part LT7) are interlocked with the annular illumination part 24. A display area CE is provided, and the annular illumination section 24 and the interlocking display area CE constitute a teaching means for teaching the player the movable effect to be operated in the second special effect.

This teaching means is configured to teach the action target based on the operation of the effect button device 40, and the structure related to this teaching is characteristic. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 78, a supplementary explanation will be given of the configuration related to the production button device 40.

In the production button device 40, when the production button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered when the production button device 40 is operated. In other words, "total operation stroke" = "movement range of operation button 721", and the object to be moved is limited to operation button 721 (button unit 720 as a whole does not descend as one).

On the other hand, when the production button device 40 is in the second form, "full operation stroke" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It is a descending movement range. Specifically, the holding torque by the stepping motor 753 described above is greater than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, so that when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protrusion position, the holding torque is applied against the biasing force of the coil spring 745. While the operation button 721 is lowered, the position held by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum protrusion position, the operation button 721 is first lowered by itself. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the player's pressing operation exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, and the entire button unit 720 becomes integrated. It will descend.

Here, within the movement range of the button unit 720, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified from the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case of the second mode, 13 detection positions CP1 to CP13, from the top to the bottom, are set between the maximum protrusion position and the lower limit position. The detection position is set. The uppermost first detection position CP1 is a position where an operation is detected based on detection information from the detection sensor 791. On the other hand, the second detection position CP2 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 are positions where the lowering of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

Note that the distance from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the distance from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the distance from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, ...The distances from the 12th detection position CP12 to the 13th detection position CP13 are uniform. The distance from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 is larger than each of these distances.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 79 to 80, the second special effect process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular process will be described.

(Second special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 79, in the process for the second special performance, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the second special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the second special effect process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process advances to step S2002. In step S2002, a second special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S2003, it is determined whether or not the operation of the production button device 40 is still valid. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the process advances to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether it is time for the grace period for switching to the second mode to elapse. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the process advances to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the second special effect processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the second form in step S2006. Thereafter, in step S2007, a switching grace period setting process is executed, and the second special effect process ends. The period required for switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2004, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S2008. In step S2008, an operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereafter, an operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2009, and the second special effect process ends.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message “Press the button” for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button, and the rest on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2003, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, that is, if the operation is still valid, the process advances to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether it is the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the process advances to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. That is, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S2011, and the second special effect processing is ended. If an operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, and the process advances to step S2012.

In step S2012, operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the button pattern, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S2013, an interlocking flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After that, in step S2014, a waiting period setting process is executed. This waiting period is a period that is referred to when operating the movable production device designated as the operation target when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 but does not reach the thirteenth detection position CP13. It is.

Thereafter, in step S2015, guidance display start processing is executed, and the second special effect processing is ended. By executing the guidance display start process, a plurality of arrow images pointing from the left and right edges of the display screen 253a toward the third movable presentation device 803 and the fourth movable presentation device 804 are displayed in the linked display area CE of the display screen 253a. AR is displayed. Specifically, three arrow images AR1 to AR3 pointing from the ninth light emitting unit LT9 toward the third movable presentation device 803 are displayed in the upper interlocking display area CE, and the seventh light emitting element is displayed in the lower interlocking display area CE. Five arrow images AR4 to AR8 pointing from section LT7 to fourth movable presentation device 804 are displayed. However, all of these arrow images AR1 to AR8 are semitransparent, and their light emission levels are all LOW.

Returning to the explanation of step S2010, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation button 721 being operated, an operation suggestion termination process is executed in step S2016, After executing the switching process to the first form in the subsequent step S2017, the second special effect process ends. Note that the processes in step S2016 and step S2017 are the same as the processes in step S1718 and step S1719 described above.

(Process for executing second special effect)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80, the second special effect execution process of step S2002 will be described.

In the second special performance execution process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the movable performance device is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether an active flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether the interlocking flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process for executing the second special effect is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the waiting period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2104. In step S2104, a position specifying process is executed to specify the position of the operation button 721 based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792.

In the following step S2105, it is determined whether the position of the operation button 721 is the thirteenth detection position CP13. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process advances to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether the position of the operation button 721 has changed since the previous second special effect processing. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the process for executing the second special effect is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process advances to step S2107, and a shift process of the light emitting target is executed. Details of this shift processing will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of step S2105, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process advances to step S2108. In step S2108, guidance display end processing is executed. Specifically, the first light emitting section LT1 to the fourteenth light emitting section LT14 are all turned off, and the first arrow image AR1 to the eighth arrow image AR8 displayed on the display screen 253a are hidden.

In the following step S2109, a second special effect start process is executed. Specifically, a movable performance device corresponding to the current second special performance is activated. Thereafter, in step S2110, the interlocking flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and in the subsequent step S2111, the operating flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the second special Finish the performance execution process.

Returning to the explanation of step S2103, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the waiting period has elapsed, after executing each process of steps S2108 to S2111, the second special effect execution Finish the process.

Returning to the explanation of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the active flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process advances to step S2112. In step S2112, it is determined whether or not it is the second special performance end timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the process for executing the second special effect is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, the second special effect ending process is executed in step S2113, and then the second special effect execution process is ended. By executing the second special performance end process, the movable performance device that has been activated returns to the state (standby state) before the second special performance.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85, a supplementary explanation will be given of the shift processing in step S2107.

As shown in FIG. 81, the update pattern (shift pattern) of the lighting targets of the light emitting units LT1 to LT14 and the arrow images AR1 to AR8 is set for each of the second special effects A to D.

(About the second special effect A)
When the second special effect A is executed, the effect button device 40 is first switched from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is 721 lights up. Thereafter, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting portion LT1 at the timing when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2. When the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emission target shifts from the third light emission part LT3 to the fourth light emission part LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emission target shifts from the fifth light emission part LT5 to the sixth light emission part LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emission part LT6 to the seventh light emission part LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts to the seventh light emission part LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emission target shifts from the eighth light emission part LT8 to the ninth light emission part LT9, and the operation button 721 moves to the tenth detection position CP10. When the operation button 721 reaches the 11th detection position CP11, the light emission target shifts from the 10th light emission part LT10 to the 11th light emission part LT11, When the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emission target shifts from the eleventh light emitting part LT11 to the twelfth light emitting part LT12 adjacent to the first movable presentation device 300. Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, the twelfth light emitting section LT12 is turned off, and the first movable effect device 300 is activated. In other words, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting units LT1 to LT12 ends, the first movable presentation device 300 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 82).

(About the second special effect B)
When the second special effect B is executed, the effect button device 40 is first switched from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is 721 lights up. Thereafter, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting portion LT1 at the timing when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2. When the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emission target shifts from the third light emission part LT3 to the fourth light emission part LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emission target shifts from the fifth light emission part LT5 to the sixth light emission part LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emission part LT6 to the seventh light emission part LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts to the seventh light emission part LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emission target shifts from the eighth light emission part LT8 to the ninth light emission part LT9, and the operation button 721 moves to the tenth detection position CP10. When the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light emission target shifts from the tenth light emission part LT10 to the thirteenth light emission part LT13, When the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emission target shifts from the thirteenth light emitting section LT13 to the fourteenth light emitting section LT14 adjacent to the second movable presentation device 400. Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, the fourteenth light emitting section LT14 is turned off, and the second movable presentation device 400 is activated. In other words, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting units LT1 to LT10 and LT13 to LT14 is completed, the second movable presentation device 400 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 83).

(About the second special effect C)
When the second special effect C is executed, the effect button device 40 is first switched from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is 721 lights up. Thereafter, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting portion LT1 at the timing when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2. When the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emission target shifts from the third light emission part LT3 to the fourth light emission part LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emission target shifts from the fifth light emission part LT5 to the sixth light emission part LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emission part LT6 to the seventh light emission part LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts to the seventh light emission part LT7. When the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emission target shifts from the eighth light emitting part LT8 to the ninth light emitting part LT9. Thereafter, when the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10, the light emission target shifts from the ninth light emission section LT9 to the first arrow image AR1 (the light emission level of the first arrow image AR1 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 shifts to the first arrow image AR1. When the 11th detection position CP11 is reached, the light emission target shifts from the first arrow image AR1 to the second arrow image AR2 (the light emission level of the second arrow image AR2 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the 12th detection position CP12, the light emission target shifts from the first arrow image AR1 to the second arrow image AR2. The light emission target shifts from the second arrow image AR2 to the third arrow image AR3 adjacent to the third movable presentation device 803 (the light emission level of the third arrow image AR3 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden and the third movable presentation device 803 is activated. That is, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting parts LT1 to LT9 and the arrow images AR1 to AR3 is completed, the third movable presentation device 803 (movable decorative body) descends and emits light (see FIG. 84).

(About the second special effect D)
When the second special effect D is executed, the effect button device 40 is first switched from the first form to the second form, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40 is 721 lights up. Thereafter, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting portion LT1 at the timing when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission part LT1 to the second light emission part LT2. When the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emission target shifts from the third light emission part LT3 to the fourth light emission part LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emission target shifts from the fifth light emission part LT5 to the sixth light emission part LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emitting section LT6 to the seventh light emitting section LT7. Thereafter, when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts from the seventh light emitting section LT7 to the fourth arrow image AR4 (the light emission level of the fourth arrow image AR4 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 shifts to the fourth arrow image AR4. When the ninth detection position CP9 is reached, the light emission target shifts from the fourth arrow image AR4 to the fifth arrow image AR5 (the light emission level of the fifth arrow image AR5 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10. Then, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth arrow image AR5 to the sixth arrow image AR6 (the light emitting level of the sixth arrow image AR6 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light emitting target shifts to the sixth arrow image AR6. When the image AR6 shifts to the seventh arrow image AR7 (the light emitting level of the seventh arrow image AR7 becomes HI) and the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emitting target changes from the seventh arrow image AR7 to the fourth movable effect. A shift is made to the eighth arrow image AR8 adjacent to the device 804 (the light emission level of the eighth arrow image AR8 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden and the fourth movable presentation device 804 is activated. That is, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting parts LT1 to LT7 and the arrow images AR4 to AR8 is completed, the third movable presentation device 803 (movable decorative body) descends and emits light (see FIG. 85).

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

A configuration in which the second special performance is executed as a performance corresponding to the operation by the movable performance device based on the player's operation of the performance button device 40 is preferable for encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, as the distance between the presentation button device 40 and the movable presentation device becomes long, there is a possibility that the beginning of the second special presentation may be missed due to the movable presentation device being out of sight. The second special performance is a performance that involves the movement of decorations, and tends to have a stronger impact at the beginning of the performance. In view of these circumstances, it is not desirable for players to miss the beginning of the performance in order to increase attention to the game. In particular, as shown in this embodiment, when a plurality of movable performance devices that can be operated are used together, more specifically, when the performance execution positions of the decorations of each movable performance device do not overlap with each other, There are concerns that such inconveniences will become more noticeable.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the second special effect is executed based on the operation of the effect button device 40, the decoration is activated after the operation of the effect button device 40 is started. Before starting, the movable performance device to be operated in the current second special performance is taught. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned oversight can be suppressed, and the attention level improvement effect of the second special effect can be suitably exhibited.

Operates from when the performance button device 40 reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined detection position") and the execution condition for the second special performance is satisfied until the start condition for the second special performance is satisfied. The subject is taught. Thereby, the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect can be suitably exhibited.

When the performance button device 40 (operation button 721) is pressed, the execution condition for the second special performance is established → the operation target is taught. For example, even if a player who does not expect a teaching stops the pressing operation after reaching the first detection position CP1, the second special effect is executed, so that the needs of various players can be met. In other words, it is possible to reduce the chances of giving the impression that the teaching function is troublesome to the player.

In addition, when compared with a configuration in which the execution condition for the teaching → operation corresponding performance is satisfied with the operation of the operating means, the type of second special performance is revealed from the contents of the teaching, and the operation is performed before reaching the predetermined detection position. It is also advantageous in that there is no inconvenience such as interruption of the process.

By shifting the light-emitting object along the route connecting the performance button device 40 and the action object, the player's line of sight can be guided toward the action object, thereby suitably eliminating the above-mentioned concerns. can. In particular, by linking the movement of the operation button 721 and the shift of the light emitting target, the player can control the shift speed as desired while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

In the configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the shift of the light emitting target are linked as described above, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by extending the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operation button 721 is often operated vigorously, and there is a concern that the teaching period may be extremely shortened due to the above-mentioned cooperation. In this regard, if the operation stroke is expanded, the teaching period can be increased, and it is possible to suitably prevent the teaching from being missed.

When the performance button device 40 is operated, there is a high possibility that the player's attention is directed to the performance button device 40 in order to determine the aim of the operation. Therefore, when teaching, the player's attention can be directed to the teaching means by first emitting light from the light emitting part (first light emitting part LT1) closest to the effect button device 40.

By configuring the teaching route to partially overlap on the production button device 40 side, the initial light emitting point is common for all teachings. This is preferable in order to appropriately prevent the start of teaching from being missed.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the function of teaching the movable performance section to be activated is enabled based on the fact that the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 and the execution condition for the second special performance is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a function of teaching the movable performance device to be activated based on the start of the operation suggestion is enabled.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the movable performance device is configured to operate after the teaching of the movable performance device to be activated is completed, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the movable performance device is activated slightly prior to the end of the teaching. It is possible.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the instruction is linked to the operation button, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which teaching is performed in a manner that the instruction is not linked to the operation button when the start condition is satisfied.

<Modification 4>
In the third embodiment, the condition for executing the second special effect is satisfied when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 during the valid operation period. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution condition for the second special effect is satisfied based on the fact that 721 has reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, which is the maximum pressing position.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment described above, the first light emitting part LT1 to the seventh light emitting part LT7 (light emitting parts) are shared in each of the second special effects A to D, but a shared light emitting part (light emitting part) is provided. It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is no such thing.

<Modification 6>
In the third embodiment, when an operation suggestion is made, one of the movable presentation devices is operated based on the operation of the operation button 721. However, when the operation button 721 is operated, It is also possible to use a configuration in which the movable presentation device does not operate (false presentation).

<Modification 7>
In the third embodiment, the operation stroke from the maximum protrusion position to the operation detection position (first detection position CP1) is the same (uniform) as the operation stroke between each detection position detected by the rotary encoder 792. It is also possible to do so.

<Modification 8>
In the third embodiment, the activation target is taught by shifting the light emission target toward the movable performance device that is the activation target, but the light emission state of the light emission location that is the source of the shift is also maintained. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of light-emitting targets increases during the teaching process.

<Modification 9>
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the shift speed of the light-emitting object changes so that it is relatively slow on the effect button device 40 side and relatively fast on the movable effect device side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long and to prevent the teaching from being missed. For example, each interval between the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13, which triggers the shift of the light emission target, may be set so that the closer to the thirteenth detection position CP13, the shorter the interval becomes.

<Modification 10>
Either the first half or the second half of the period from when the operation suggestion is made in the game round related to the second special performance until the operation validity period of the performance button device 40 has elapsed is based on the operation of the performance button device 40 as described above. The teaching corresponding period in which teaching is performed and the other may be a teaching non-corresponding period in which the above-mentioned teaching is not performed even if the production button device 40 is operated. For example, it is preferable that the teaching start period in which teaching is started elapses before the operational validity period of the production button device 40 elapses.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is characterized by a third special effect, which is one of the effects corresponding to the operation using the effect button device 40. The third special performance is similar to the first special performance and the second special performance in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated in a situation where the performance button device 40 is in the second form. However, the configuration is different from the first special performance and the second special performance in that the flow of the subsequent performance changes depending on the pressed position (hold position) of the operation button 721. The third special effect and its related configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40, FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between protrusion amount and torque, and FIG. 87 is a display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 during the third special effect. FIG.

In the production button device 40, when the production button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered when the production button device 40 is pressed. In other words, "total operation stroke" = "movement range of operation button 721", and the object to be moved is limited to operation button 721 (button unit 720 as a whole does not descend as one).

On the other hand, when the production button device 40 is in the second form, "full operation stroke" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It is a descending movement range. Specifically, the torque (static torque and driving torque) by the stepping motor 753 described above is larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum protrusion position, the coil spring 745 While the operation button 721 descends against the urging force of the button 721, the position held by the stepping motor 753 itself does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum protrusion position, the operation button 721 is first lowered by itself. After the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operating force of the pressing operation exceeds the torque of the stepping motor 753, so that the entire button unit 720 is affected by the torque of the stepping motor 753. It will resist and descend.

Here, within the movement range in which the button unit 720 as a whole moves, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. That is, when moving from the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, the movement is specified based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, and in the range of movement beyond the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position, the above-mentioned The position of button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on detection information from rotary encoder 792. In particular, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the range from the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position of the entire operation stroke is the first area E1 at the top, the second area E2 at the middle, and the third area at the bottom. Based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, it is possible to specify in which of these three areas E1 to E3 the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is located.

As illustrated in FIG. 86(b), the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is different when the production button device 40 is in the first form or in the second form when the operation button 721 is at the maximum protruding position. The first reference torque TQ1, which is the static torque generated when The generated driving torque is roughly divided into a second reference torque TQ2 and a third reference torque TQ3. The first reference torque TQ1 is a torque for holding the button unit 720 in the first form, and the first reference torque TQ1 does not act to raise or lower the button unit 720. On the other hand, the second reference torque TQ2 and the third reference torque TQ3 act as a driving force (biasing force) to move the button unit 720 toward the maximum protrusion position. These three torques increase in the order of first reference torque TQ1<second reference torque TQ2<third reference torque TQ3.

Note that if the operation button 721 is not pressed under a situation where the second reference torque TQ2 or the third reference torque TQ3 is generated in the stepping motor 753, the operation button 721 will be operated to control the driving force and the driving force of the stepping motor 753. It moves to the maximum protrusion position by the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and waits at the maximum protrusion position.

When the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, or when the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the stepping motor 753 A third reference torque TQ3 is generated, and a second reference torque TQ2 is generated in the stepping motor 753 in other parts. In other words, the boundary portion of each area (the boundary and its vicinity) is a high-torque section in which the driving torque (resistance) generated in the stepping motor 753 is greater than other portions. In this way, by increasing the resistance at the boundary, it is possible for the player to know from the touch of his hand that he has reached the boundary between each area.

Next, an outline of the third special effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 87. The third special performance is an operation-compatible performance that occurs during a part of the game rounds related to Super Reach A to C. After the development to Super Reach, the character image CA corresponding to the Super Reach is displayed at the center of the display screen 253a. will be started under the circumstances shown in . When the third special effect is started, the symbol being displayed as a reach is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display screen 253a, three door images TA are displayed on the left side of the display screen 253a, and the right side of the display screen 253a is displayed in a reduced size. An operation indicator indicating the amount of operation of the operation button 721 is displayed in the section. The operation indicator is composed of a gauge GA that indicates the entire operation stroke of the operation button 721, and an icon IG that moves up and down within the gauge GA according to the operation position of the operation button 721. Note that the gauge GA displays the boundaries of the first area E1, second area E2, and third area E3, and the door image TA displays a pattern etc. showing an outline of the development destination.

When the display on the display screen 253a is switched to one corresponding to the third special effect, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form and the operation stroke is extended. After the expansion of the stroke is completed, a message suggesting the operation of the effect button device 40 (for example, "Press and hold the button to select a door") is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 253a. When the performance button device 40 is operated, the height position of the icon IG is changed according to the position of the operation button 721. In addition, in the third special effect, the door image TA, which is the destination of the character image CA, is displayed blinking by operating the operation button 721, but the object of this blinking display is also linked to the height position of the icon IG. This is subject to change. Specifically, when the icon IG is located in the part (upper part) corresponding to the first area E1 in the gauge GA, the upper door image TA is displayed blinking, and the icon IG is located in the second area in the gauge GA. If it is located in the part (middle part) corresponding to E2, the middle door image TA flashes, and the icon IG is located in the part (lower part) corresponding to the third area E3 in the gauge GA. In this case, the lower door image TA is displayed blinking.

After that, if the operation button 721 remains in the same area for a predetermined period (if it is held), the door image TA to be selected is determined, and the character image is moved toward the door image TA. CA will move. As described above, each door image TA is associated with the development destination of the reach display, and thereafter the performance selected by the player will be executed.

Note that the blinking speed of the door image TA becomes faster as the hold period becomes longer, and the blinking ends when the selection target is determined. In addition, if the preset operation validity period elapses before the hold period elapses, the development to the effect corresponding to the blinking door image TA at that point will be confirmed, and the operation will continue within the operation validity period. If the operation button is not operated (if the first detection position CP1 is not reached), the third special effect will be canceled midway.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 88 to 90, a description will be given of the third special performance processing executed as part of the regular processing in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143.

(Third special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the process for the third special performance, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the third special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the third special effect processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2202. In step S2202, a third special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the operation of the production button device 40 is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether it is time for the grace period for switching to the second mode to elapse. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the third special effect processing is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the second form in step S2206. Thereafter, in step S2207, a switching grace period setting process is executed, and the third special effect process is ended. The period required for switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S2208. In step S2208, an operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereafter, in step S2209, an operation suggestion start process is executed, and the third special effect process is ended.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting operation (for example, a voice such as “Press and hold the button to select a door”), and the display control device 142 Outputs the operation suggestion start command. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message such as “Press and hold the button to select a door” for operation suggestions on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled to display a symbol resembling a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

Returning to the explanation of step S2203, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S2210. In step S2210, it is determined whether it is the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2210, the process advances to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. That is, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S2211, and the third special effect processing is ended. If an operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, and the process advances to step S2212.

In step S2212, an operation acceptance flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. As a result, the development of one of the three types of selective effects in the third special effect is confirmed. In the following step S2213, a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 seconds) is set in a hold counter for measuring a hold period provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and the third special effect processing is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2210, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the operation validity period has elapsed, the process advances to step S2214. In step S2214, operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, the period indicator indicating the remaining validity period, etc. let

In the subsequent step S2215, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S2216, the operation reception flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is deleted, and the third special effect processing is ended.

(Process for executing second special effect)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89, the third special effect execution process of step S2202 will be described.

In the third special performance execution process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether an operation acceptance flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the third special effect execution process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process advances to step S2302. In step S2302, the position of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. In the following step S2303, torque change processing is executed. Here, the torque change process will be explained with reference to FIG. 90.

(Torque change processing)
In the torque change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between areas E1 to E3. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set as the third reference torque TQ3 in step S2404. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protrusion position. In this determination, detection information from the detection sensor 791 is referred to. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set as the first reference torque TQ1. If a negative determination is made in step S2403, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set as the second reference torque TQ2.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 89, after executing the torque change process in step S2303, the process advances to step S2304. In step S2304, it is specified in which of the first area E1 to third area E3 the position of the operation button 721 specified in step S2302 is included. In the following step S2305, it is determined whether the operation validity period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process advances to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether the area in which the operation button 721 is located has changed since the last execution of the third special effect processing. If no area change has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S2306 and the process advances to step S2307. In step S2307, the value of the hold counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 is updated (subtracted by 1). In the following step S2308, it is determined whether the value of the hold counter is "0", that is, whether the above-described hold period has elapsed. If the hold period has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S2308, and the third special performance execution process is ended. If the hold period has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2308 and the process advances to step S2309. In step S2309, display processing corresponding to the third special effect is executed. As a result, the development to the effect selected by the player is confirmed, and the character image CA moves toward the selected door image TA.

Returning to the explanation of step S2306, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, that is, if the area where the operation button 721 is located changes, the above predetermined value (equivalent to 3 seconds) is reset to the hold counter. (Reset.

Returning to the explanation of step S2305, if the operation validity period has elapsed before the value of the hold counter reaches "0", display processing corresponding to the third special effect is executed in step S2309. In this process, the development destination is determined so that the effect corresponding to the current position of the operation button 721 is executed, and the movement of the character image CA toward the determined door image TA is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 91, torque changes accompanying the flow of the third special effect will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the third special effect.

(Torque change)
At the timing tc1, the variable display of the symbols on the operating port display unit DU and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 253 are started. At the timing of tc2, it shifts to the reach display, and at the timing of tc3, it develops into the third special effect. At the start of the third special performance, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 of the performance button device 40 is changed from the first reference torque TQ1, which is a static torque, to the second reference torque TQ2, which is a driving torque. As a result, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) starts moving toward the maximum protrusion position. Immediately after, at timing tc4, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) reaches the maximum protrusion position, and the switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40 is completed. At this timing tc4, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1, and the button unit 720 is held (stays) at the maximum protrusion position by the first reference torque TQ1.

When the operation button 721 is pressed at the timing tc5, the operation button 721 is lowered. In the process of descending the operation button 721, when passing the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the third reference torque TQ3, and the operation resistance is temporarily reduced. To increase. After passing through the boundary portion, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operating resistance is reduced. After that, the operation button 721 continues to descend, and when the operation button 721 passes through the boundary between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the third reference torque TQ3, Operation resistance increases temporarily. After passing through the boundary portion, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operating resistance is reduced. At timing tc7, when the hold period has elapsed after the operation button 721 reaches the third area E3, the direction of the second reference torque TQ2 generated in the stepping motor 753 is reversed, and the button unit 720 (operation button 721) It will be lowered.

By pulling down the button unit 720 (operation button 721), the production button device 40 is switched to the first mode. When the switching of the production button device 40 to the first form is completed at timing tc8, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1.

(Flow of the third special performance)
Next, the flow of the third special effect will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. 92 and 93 are schematic diagrams illustrating the flow of the third special effect, in which group (a) shows the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, and group (b) shows the effect button device 40.

As shown in FIG. 92 (1) → FIG. 92 (2), the game round related to the third special effect corresponds to the super reach display, and after the transition to the reach display, the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) A character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed in the center. As shown in FIG. 92(2)→FIG. 92(3), when the third special effect is developed, a plurality of (three) door images TA corresponding to the subsequent development destinations are displayed on the left side of the display screen 253a. They are displayed vertically, and an operation indicator (gauge GA and icon IG) indicating the amount of operation of the operation button 721 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 253a.

In the example shown in FIG. 93, the operation button 721 is pressed and held in the second area E2. Regarding the operation indicator on the display screen 253a, an icon is displayed stationary in the center of the gauge GA, and the center door image TA of the three door images TA is displayed blinking. When a predetermined hold period elapses while the operation button 721 is held in the second area E2, the character image CA moves toward the door image TA selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 93(4). Along with this, the form of the production button device 40 will be switched to the first form.

In the example shown in FIG. 93, the central door image TA corresponds to a singing performance. After the character image CA reaches the center door image TA, a singing performance will be performed at the center of the display screen 253a (see FIG. 93(4)→FIG. 93(5)). The game result of the game round will be clearly shown to the player depending on whether the third special performance (singing performance) is successful or not. After the third special performance ends, as shown in FIG. 93 (5) → FIG. 93 (6), the character image CA is hidden, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. .

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

When the stay period in which the operation button 721 is operated (held) by keeping it in any one of the first area E1 to the third area E3 reaches the reference period, the operation button 721 is pressed in accordance with the stay area of the operation means. Develops into a performance. By realizing such a novel operation-responsive performance, the effect of aiming at improving the degree of attention to the game using the performance button device 40 can be suitably exhibited.

In the case of a configuration in which the development destination changes depending on the staying area of the operation button 721, each area becomes smaller and it becomes difficult to hold the area in the desired area. There is a concern that it will be difficult to perform a hold operation of the device 40. In other words, it is feared that the difficulty in holding the hold operation will hinder the ability to achieve the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the third special effect, which is one of the operation-compatible effects, is executed, the effect button device 40 is By increasing the operation stroke in advance as a configuration in which the operation stroke is switched to the second mode, each of the areas E1 to E3 can be increased in size. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In a configuration where the development destination can be branched depending on the hold position of the operation button 721, it may be difficult to grasp the position of the operation button 721 only from tactile information. Such difficulty hinders the diversification of performance patterns by subdividing the entire operation stroke into a plurality of areas. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably resolved by providing a configuration in which information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operation button 721 and the area is taught to the player.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the stepping motor 753 is configured to generate driving torque during the valid operation period in the third special performance, except when the operation button 721 is at the maximum protrusion position. It is not limited to. It is also possible to configure the operation button 721 to generate static torque during the valid operation period in the third special performance. In this case, while the operation button 721 is located at the boundary between the areas E1 to E3, it is preferable to increase the resistance to the operation by increasing the static torque.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is changed to the third reference torque TQ3 at the boundary between areas E1 to E3, thereby increasing the resistance to operation. It is not limited to. It is also possible to set the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 at the boundary between areas E1 to E3 as the second reference torque TQ2, so that the resistance to operation does not increase.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the first area E1 does not include the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1, and after the operation button 721 is pushed to the first detection position CP1, the operation button 721 is released. In the case where the operation button 721 is located at the maximum protrusion position at the end of the valid operation period as a result of an action such as releasing the button, the operation button 721 is treated in the same way as the case where it is held in the first area E1. It is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1 are included in the first area E1.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the condition for development of the third special performance is satisfied when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, which is the operation detection position. You may change it to That is, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the conditions for the development of the performance in the third special performance are satisfied when the operation button is held in a predetermined area for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the maximum protrusion position may be included in the first area or may not be included. However, when the configuration includes the maximum protrusion position, it is preferable to start counting the hold period at least once the displacement from the maximum protrusion position is triggered. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous determination as if the first area E1 was selected even though the operation button 721 was not operated.

<Modification 5>
In the third special performance shown in the fourth embodiment, the magnitude of the driving torque generated by the stepping motor 753 during the performance selection period (operation valid period) is changed over time. It is also possible to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty in holding the operation button 721 in a desired area, and it is possible to prevent the holding operation from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 6>
When the third special effect is executed, at least one of the first area E1 to third area E3 is set as a winning area, and the hold operation is performed by keeping the operation button 721 in the winning area according to the operation suggestion. is performed, an effect corresponding to area winning is executed, and when the above-mentioned hold operation is performed, an effect corresponding to area non-winning is executed by keeping the operation button 721 in an area other than the concerned winning area. It is also possible to have a configuration in which:

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to have a configuration in which period information indicating the period of stay in the area of the operation button 721 is taught to the player using the symbol display device 253, the speaker unit 27, or the like. However, in a configuration in which the operation button 721 is held and operated, there is a possibility that the operation button 721 may move between areas due to a slight adjustment of force. There is a concern that if events such as the hold period (stay period) being measured are reset frequently due to movement between areas like this, it would give the impression that it is bothersome to the player, and the user would not be able to operate the corresponding operation button 721. be done. Considering that it is necessary to adjust the force when holding, the above-mentioned stay period teaching (display of period information) may not be performed at the beginning of the stay when staying in the area continuously. It is preferable to do so.

<Modification 8>
In the fourth embodiment, the first area E1 to the third area E3 are made to have the same size, but the size is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the second area E2 between them larger than the first area E1 on the side of the maximum protrusion position and the third area E3 on the side of the maximum pressing position.

When performing a hold operation on the operation button 721, it is assumed that the operation to stay in the second area E2 in between is more difficult than in the upper and lower limit areas E1 and E3 due to the presence or absence of a guide. This is expected to make it easier for players who desire easy operation to exclude the second area E2 from their options. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this modification, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably alleviated.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is characterized by a fourth special effect, which is one of the effects corresponding to the operation using the effect button device 40. The fourth special performance is similar to the first special performance and the second special performance in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated in a situation where the performance button device 40 is in the second form. However, the structure is different from the first to third special effects in that the second form is maintained over a plurality of game rounds. The fourth special effect and its related configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and display mode, FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a in the second display mode, and FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a in the third display mode. A schematic diagram showing the screen 253a, FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between display modes and variable display modes.

As shown in FIG. 94, the lottery results based on winnings to the operating ports 83a and 83b include a 16R probability variable jackpot result, 4R probability variable jackpot result A, 4R probability variable jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B. It is provided.

The 16R probability-variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which after the special gaming state corresponding to 16 rounds ends, the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the third normal gaming state A where the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the high-probability mode. It is. This third normal game state A continues until the next jackpot.

4R guaranteed variable jackpot result A is a jackpot in which after the special gaming state corresponding to 4 rounds ends, the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the third normal gaming state A where the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the high probability mode. This is the result. This third normal game state A continues until the next jackpot.

4R probability variable jackpot result B is a jackpot in which after the end of the special gaming state corresponding to 4 rounds, the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the third normal gaming state B, where the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the high probability mode. This is the result. This third normal game state B continues until the next jackpot.

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot in which after the end of the special gaming state corresponding to 4 rounds, the support mode by the electric accessories 91 shifts to the second normal gaming state A in which the support mode corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the low probability mode. This is the result. This second normal game state A continues until the number of games played reaches a specified number (100 times).

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot in which after the special gaming state corresponding to 4 rounds ends, the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the second normal gaming state B in which the support mode corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the low probability mode. This is the result. This second normal game state B continues until the number of games played reaches a specified number (100 times).

When the result is a 16R definite variable jackpot, "7", "7", and "7" are stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a as a symbol combination clearly indicating that it is a 16R definite variable jackpot result, and the 4R probable variable jackpot result A In this case, the symbol combinations "1", "1", "1", "3", "3", "3", "5" are displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a to clearly indicate that the 4R probability-variable jackpot result A. ”, “5”, “5”, “9”, “9”, and “9” are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of 4R guaranteed variable jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B, "2", "2", "2", "4" are displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a. Any one of "4", "4", "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8" is stopped and displayed. In other words, it is difficult to specify which jackpot result is the 4R probability variable jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, or 4R normal jackpot result B from the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. Among these, the 4R normal jackpot result A is clearly shown to the player as the 4R normal jackpot result A by the display effect during the special gaming state, while the 4R guaranteed variable jackpot result B and the 4R normal jackpot result B are not. The game will proceed to the normal gaming state as specified.

In addition, to provide a supplementary explanation of each gaming state, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the game hall, the second normal gaming state A, the second normal gaming state B, the third normal gaming state A, and the third normal gaming state Both the normal game state B and the special game state (open/close execution mode) are advantageous to the player.

Here, a first display mode to a fourth display mode are provided as display modes for determining the background display on the display screen 253a and the BGM output from the speaker unit 27.

The first display mode corresponds to a first normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode and a low probability mode. During the first display mode, the background of the display screen 253a becomes blue, and the first display mode clearly indicates that the first normal game state is in progress.

The second display mode corresponds to the second normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and low probability mode. During the second display mode, the background of the display screen 253a becomes yellow, clearly indicating that the second normal game state A is in progress by the second display mode. During this second display mode, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the words "Chance Zone" are displayed above the display screen 253a, and the remaining number of games to be played in the game state is counted down.

The third display mode corresponds to a second normal game state B corresponding to the high frequency support mode and low probability mode, and a third normal game state B corresponding to the high frequency support mode and high probability mode. During the third display mode, the background of the display screen 253a becomes green, suggesting that the third display mode is either the second normal gaming state B or the third normal gaming state B. During this third display mode, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the words "WARNING" are displayed above the display screen 253a. However, unlike the second display mode, the remaining number of games is not displayed even in the second normal game state B with a limited number of times.

The fourth display mode corresponds to the third normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and high probability mode. During the fourth display mode, the background of the display screen 253a becomes red, clearly indicating that the fourth display mode is the third normal game state A.

In this embodiment, the third display mode among the first to fourth display modes corresponds to the fourth special effect. Here, the third display mode will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIG. 96.

In the third display mode corresponding to the second normal game state B, the variation display mode of symbols executed on the display screen 253a is limited to complete miss and normal reach A, and normal reach B and super reach A to C are limited to completely off and normal reach A. The configuration is such that it does not occur. Regarding the variable display time, 2 to 8 seconds is set in the case of a complete miss, and 10 seconds is set in the case of normal reach A.

In the third normal game state B, the third display mode is set until the number of games executed in the third normal game state B reaches a specified number of times, and when the number of games played reaches the specified number of times, the mode is switched to the fourth display mode. There is. In the third display mode, similarly to the second display mode, the variation display mode of symbols executed on the display screen 253a is limited to complete miss and normal reach A, and normal reach B and super reach A to C. The configuration is such that it does not occur. Regarding the variable display time, 2 to 8 seconds is set in the case of a complete miss, and 10 seconds is set in the case of normal reach A. In the fourth display mode, the variation display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a is completely off, and becomes either normal reach A to B or super reach A to C, and the above limitation does not occur. Regarding the variable display time, 1 to 6 seconds is set for a complete miss, 20 seconds for normal reach A, 24 seconds for normal reach B, 36 seconds for super reach A, and 36 seconds for super reach A. In the case of reach B, 37 sec is set, and in the case of super reach C, 38 sec is set. In other words, in the 4th display mode, the variable display time is shorter than in the 3rd display mode for game times that result in a complete miss, while the variable display time when a reach display occurs is set in the 3rd display mode. It is longer than.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97, the display mode switching process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular process will be described.

(Display mode switching process)
In the display mode switching process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether the third display mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the third display mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether it is time to transition to the first normal gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the first display mode setting process is executed in step S2503, and then the present display mode switching process is ended.

In the first display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the first display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, and the first display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to BGM corresponding to the first display mode, and a first display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the first display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background etc. of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the first display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2502, if a negative determination is made in step S2502, that is, if it is not the timing to shift to the first normal gaming state, the process advances to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the second display mode setting process is executed in step S2505, and then the main display mode switching process is ended.

In the second display mode setting process, the display mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, a second display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, and the second display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to BGM corresponding to the second display mode, and a second display mode command is sent to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the second display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background etc. of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the second display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2504, if a negative determination is made in step S2504, that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A, the process advances to step S2506. In step S2506, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, the third display mode setting process is executed in step S2507, and then the present display mode switching process is ended.

In the third display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, a third display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, and the display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to BGM corresponding to the third display mode, and a third display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the third display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background etc. of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the third display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2506, if a negative determination is made in step S2506, that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to 4R probability variable jackpot result B or 4R normal jackpot result B, The process advances to step S2508. In step S2508, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 4R probability variable jackpot result A. If a negative determination is made in step S2508, the present display mode switching process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the fourth display mode setting process is executed in step S2509, and then the present display mode switching process is ended.

In the fourth display mode setting process, the display mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, a fourth display mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 933, and the fourth display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to BGM corresponding to the fourth display mode, and a fourth display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142. Based on receiving the fourth display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) to a display corresponding to the fourth display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, that is, if the current display mode is the third display mode, the process advances to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not it is time for the game round to end. If a negative determination is made in step S2510, the present display mode switching process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2510, the process advances to step S2511. In step S2511, it is determined whether a third display mode premature end flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2511, the process advances to step S2502. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, the process advances to step S2512. In step S2512, the third display mode premature end flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process advances to step S2505. In other words, if the third display mode premature end flag is stored, a transition will be made to the second display mode. In addition, in the second display mode to which the third display mode is halfway terminated and transferred, the variable display time is not changed and the BGM, background display, etc. are only switched to those corresponding to the second display mode.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 98 to 102, the fourth special effect process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular process will be described.

(4th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 98, in the fourth special effect processing, first, in step S2610, it is determined whether the current display mode is the third display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to 4R probability variable jackpot result B or 4R normal jackpot result B is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the fourth special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process advances to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the final round (fourth round). If a negative determination is made in step S2603, the fourth special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, a switching process is executed to drive and control the stepping motor 753 to switch the production button device 40 to the second mode. That is, if the shift to the third display mode is confirmed, the production button device 40 will be switched from the first mode to the second mode in the final round in the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). This switching is completed before the opening/closing execution mode ends, that is, before the third display mode starts.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if the third display mode is in progress, the process advances to step S2605. In step S2605, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the third normal gaming state B or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the third normal game state process is executed in step S2606, and then the fourth special performance process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2605, the second normal game state process is executed in step S2607, and then the fourth special performance process is ended.

The third normal game state process in step S2606 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 100.

(Third normal game state processing)
As shown in FIG. 99, in the third normal game state process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the process advances to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to a jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process advances to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the third normal game state process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the process advances to step S2704. In step S2704, an operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereby, the operation of the production button device 40 will be effectively accepted until the operation validity period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S2702, if a negative determination is made in step S2702, that is, if the game round corresponds to a losing result, the process advances to step S2705. In step S2705, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the missed reach. If a negative determination is made in step S2705, the third normal game state processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, the process advances to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not there is a game corresponding to the jackpot result in the subsequent game round executed during the third normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2706, the third special effect execution process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After executing the process of step S2707, the process of setting the valid operation period is executed in step S2704, and the process for executing the third special effect is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, that is, if the operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S2708. In step S2708, it is determined whether or not the operation of the production button device 40 is being suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2708, the process advances to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the operation suggestion. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, an operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2710.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message “Press the button” for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button, and the rest on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

After executing the process of step S2710, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2708, and if a negative determination is made in step S2709, the third normal game state operation corresponding process is executed in step S2711, and then the present 3. End the normal game state processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the third normal game state operation corresponding process of step S2711 will be explained.

(Third normal game state operation response process)
In the third normal game state operation corresponding process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the operation validity period has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the third normal game state operation corresponding process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, the process advances to step S2803. In step S2803, operation correspondence display processing and operation suggestion termination processing are executed. In the operation-compatible display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out, and a message indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, one of "Chance", "Very Hot", and "Super Lucky" is selected based on the game result. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the button pattern, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S2804, the operation validity period is cleared. Thereafter, in step S2805, it is determined whether a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form in step S2806, and then the third normal game state operation corresponding process is ended. Specifically, if the production button device 40 is already in the first form, it is maintained in the first form, and if it is in the second form, a driving torque for lowering is generated in the stepping motor 753. The effect button device 40 is forcibly switched to the first mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the continuation process is executed in step S2807, and then the third normal game state operation corresponding process is ended. The continuation process is a process for maintaining the production button device 40 in the first form until the end of the game round, and returning it to the second form at the start of the next game round. In other words, if the continuation flag is set, the second mode will be returned even if the production button device 40 is operated during the valid operation period and a missed result is clearly displayed. Furthermore, in the continuation process, the continuation flags stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914 are deleted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, the process for the second normal gaming state in step S2607 will be explained.

(Second normal game state processing)
As shown in FIG. 101, in the second normal game state process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the process advances to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the process advances to step S2903. In step S2903, an operation valid period setting process is performed. As a result, the operation of the production button device 40 will be effectively accepted until the operation validity period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S2902, if a negative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if it is not the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first out-of-reach game round after the transition to the current second normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the process for the second normal game state is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the operation valid period setting process is executed in step S2903, and then the second normal game state process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, that is, if the operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not the operation of the production button device 40 is being suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the process advances to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the operation suggestion. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, an operation suggestion start process is executed in step S2907.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message “Press the button” for operation suggestion, a pattern imitating a button, and the rest on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

After executing the process of step S2907, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, and if a negative determination is made in step S2906, the second normal game state operation corresponding process is executed in step S2908, and then the main 2 End the normal game state processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, the second normal game state operation corresponding process in step S2908 will be described.

(Second normal game state operation response process)
In the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the operation validity period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the process advances to step S3002, and it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the second normal game state operation corresponding process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process advances to step S3003. In step S3003, operation correspondence display processing and operation suggestion termination processing are executed. In the operation-compatible display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out, and a message indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, either "Very Hot" or "Super Lucky" is selected based on the game result. In addition, "Super Lucky" corresponds to jackpot results, and "Gekitsu" corresponds to both jackpot results and miss results.

In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the button pattern, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S3004, the operation validity period is cleared, and in step S3005, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S3006, it is determined whether the number of games played during the current second normal game state has reached the specified number of times. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, the third display mode premature end flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 in step S3007, and the second normal game state operation corresponding process is ended. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3006, the second normal game state operation corresponding process is immediately ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the production button device 40 is operated during the operation validity period even before the specified number of times is reached, or the production button device 40 is not operated during the operation validity period, the corresponding If the operation validity period has elapsed, the third display mode may end midway and shift to the second display mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, that is, if the operation validity period has elapsed, the process advances to step S3008. In step S3008, an operation suggestion termination process is executed, and in the following step S3009, an operation non-correspondence display process is executed. In the operation-incompatible display processing, the variable display of symbols is continued without performing the above-mentioned blackout display.

Thereafter, the processes of steps S3005 to S3007 are executed, and the second normal game state operation corresponding process is ended.

Next, the flow of the fourth special effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the fourth special effect occurs, and FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the fourth special effect. In addition, in FIG. 103, a case where a jackpot result is obtained in the fifth game round in the third normal game state B is illustrated.

(Flow of the 4th special performance)
The game round started at td1 corresponds to 4R probability variable jackpot result B. In this game round, the symbol combination (for example, "2", "2", "2") corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B is stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a at the timing td2. At timing td3 after the confirmed display period has elapsed, the first normal gaming state has shifted to the special gaming state. In addition, in accordance with this, the display mode is also switched from the first display mode to a display mode (special display mode) corresponding to the special game state.

At timing td4 when the final round (fourth round) ends in the special game state, the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. In addition, in conjunction with this, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 and the speaker section 27 are used to notify that the production button device 40 will be switched to the second mode.

At timing td5, the special gaming state shifts to the third normal gaming state B, and the first game round in the third normal gaming state B has started. In the third normal game state B, the display mode switches to the third display mode, and the characters "WARNING" corresponding to the third display mode are displayed at the top of the display screen 253a (FIG. 104 (a1) reference). At the timing td6, the fifth game round after the transition to the third normal game state B has started. This game round corresponds to the jackpot result.

At the timing td6 when the game round is started, an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button device 40 is valid is set. Thereafter, the operation of the production button device 40 is valid until the valid operation period has elapsed. At timing td7 after the display mode on the display screen 253a becomes the ready-to-reach display, the player is suggested to operate the performance button device 40 (see FIG. 104 (a2)). At timing td8 when the performance button device 40 is operated in accordance with the operation suggestion, the display screen 253a goes black and a message indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (for example, "Super Lucky" or "Very Hot") is displayed. (See FIG. 104(a3)). At the same time, the above-mentioned operation suggestion and operation validity period will end. By this operation, the effect button device 40 is switched from the second form to the first form.

At the timing of td9 immediately after, the above-mentioned blackout and message display are canceled, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a, clearly indicating to the player that the jackpot result has been achieved. (See FIG. 104(a4)). Thereafter, the game shifts to a special gaming state at the timing of td10.

According to the fifth embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

In the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B, the form of the production button device 40 (corresponding to the "state suggesting means") provided on the front door frame 14, which is the "front part of the gaming machine" is This suggests that the game state is advantageous to the player. The front door frame 14 is a part that is more easily seen by other players than, for example, the symbol display device 253 disposed on the back side of the gaming machine, so the effect provided on the front door frame 14 is By configuring the button device 40 to indicate that the gaming state is advantageous to the player, it is possible to suitably arouse a sense of superiority in the player who is playing the game at the gaming machine.

Here, the production button device 40 can be operated even when it is in the second form. In this way, if the performance button device 40 can be operated in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the performance button device 40 will give the player a good impression of the performance button device 40, which is the state suggesting means. This is advantageous in increasing attention to the second form.

When the performance button device 40 (second form) is operated in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, a performance corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round in which the operation was performed is executed. be done. Since the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B are gaming states that are advantageous to the player, the opportunities for production advantageous to the player to occur will increase due to the operation. This is advantageous in making the player's impression of the performance button device 40 favorable and increasing the degree of attention to the second form of the performance button device 40.

When the production button device 40 which is in the second form in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B is operated according to the operation suggestion, the subsequent form is divided into the first form/second form. With such a configuration, a sense of tension can be imparted to the operation of the effect button device 40.

If a decision is made to return to the second mode during the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B, the relevant one will remain at least until the end of the gaming round in which the production button device 40 was operated according to the operation suggestion. The configuration is such that recovery is delayed. In this way, by configuring the return to be delayed until the end of the game round, it is possible to suitably prevent the movement of the performance button device 40 from being transmitted to the player's hand, thereby reducing the level of attention to the game.

When the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the amount of protrusion of the effect button device 40 from the front door frame 14 increases. Although this is preferable for making the effect button device 40 stand out, it becomes difficult to access the back of the effect button device 40. It is not preferable that the restrictions concerning the arrangement of the effect button device 40 become stronger due to such circumstances, in order to improve the convenience and attention of the effect button device 40. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the production button device 40 is configured to switch to the second mode in the high-frequency support mode in which the decrease in game balls is suppressed, the production button device 40 can be used as a storage means. Even if it is arranged around the upper tray 33 (particularly on the front side), it is possible to prevent the production button device 40 from becoming a substantial hindrance to the supply of game balls. In this way, by relaxing the restrictions regarding the arrangement of the effect button device 40, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

When performing the fourth special effect in the third display mode, there is no need to switch the button to the second mode upon starting the effect. In this way, by eliminating the need for a preliminary operation for switching the form of the effect button device 40, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of the fourth special effect being exposed due to the preliminary operation.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B are made substantially difficult to identify, and then the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B are supported. During the third display mode, the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second mode to indicate an advantageous gaming state to the player. Considering that the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B are both gaming states that are advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage is different, it is necessary to separate the display modes to make it easier to identify each gaming state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second mode in the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B to suggest that the gaming state is advantageous to the player. .

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special performance is executed in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, which are "advantageous states", but in the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode. The fourth special effect can be applied to any game state that is more advantageous to the player than the corresponding first normal game state. For example, instead of or in addition to the second normal gaming state B and the third normal gaming state B, a second normal gaming state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and low probability mode, a second normal gaming state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and high probability mode It is also possible to have a configuration in which the fourth special performance is executed in the 3 normal game state A.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special performance is generated not only in the game rounds related to jackpot results but also in some of the game rounds related to lose results, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the fourth special performance occurs only in the game round related to the jackpot result, that is, a configuration in which occurrence of the fourth special performance = jackpot is confirmed.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result in the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, the operation suggestion is made after a certain period of time after the operation button is activated. In other words, even if the operation button is operated before the operation suggestion is made, the configuration is such that the operation reception→operation response effect can occur. This may be changed so that the operation suggestion is performed at the same time as the operation is enabled. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which operation suggestions are made after operation validation for only a part of the jackpot results.

<Modification 5>
When the production button device 40 is operated outside the valid operation period in the normal gaming state corresponding to the third display mode, the production button device 40 is switched to the first form by the operation and is maintained in the first form. It is also possible to do this. As a result, it is preferable that the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 33 become difficult to check or access to the upper tray 33 becomes difficult, which worsens the player's impression of the fourth special performance. can be suppressed to In addition, if the operation is performed outside the operation validity period, it is preferable that the effect button device 40 is configured to be switched from the first form to the second form in the game round in which the fourth special effect is executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment described above, by maintaining the performance button device 40 in the second mode during a part of the second normal game state and the third normal game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, the game is advantageous to the player. The structure is designed to suggest that it is a state of affairs. Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is alleviated, but the number of balls held gradually decreases as the game is repeated. It is also possible to change the configuration to maintain the production button device 40 in the second form when the game state is such that the number of balls held increases (slightly increases) as the game progresses (so-called small hit RUSH, etc.). . With such a configuration, it is virtually unnecessary to replenish game balls to the upper tray 33 during the game state, so that the second form is achieved while facilitating access to the production button device 40. It is possible to suitably avoid the effect button device 40 from interfering with the progress of the game.

<Modification 7>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when the normal gaming state corresponding to the third display mode is established, by maintaining the form of the production button device 40 in the second form, a gaming state advantageous to the player is established. Although the configuration is designed to suggest that For example, in the case of a normal gaming state compatible with the third display mode, by maintaining the second movable presentation device 400 in the protruding state, it is suggested that the gaming state is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to have a configuration in which: By configuring the second movable presentation device 400 to be switched to a non-protruding state by the player's push-down operation, it is possible to prevent the data display device, etc. located above the pachinko machine 10 from becoming difficult to see in the island equipment of the game hall. It can be avoided.

<Modification 9>
If the production button device 40 is operated during the period in which the production button device 40 is in the second form during the third display mode and no operation suggestion is made, the production button device 40 is operated in the third display mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the return to the second mode is restricted. As described above, in the structure where the effect button device 40 functioning as a state suggestion means suggests that the player is in an advantageous gaming state, the effect button device 40 may be operated without warning, etc. If the production button device 40 is out of order, the above-mentioned suggestion function will not be performed properly. This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that impairs the reliability of the state suggestion function of the gaming machine (performance button device 40). In this regard, with the configuration shown in this modification, it is possible to reduce the chances that the production button device 40 is operated without notice, and to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

<Sixth embodiment>
Regarding the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, the form of the effect button device 40 is divided into a first form in which the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is relatively small and a second form in which the operation stroke is relatively large. Switching is possible, and in some operation-compatible presentations, the attention level of the presentation button device 40 is improved by prompting the player to operate the presentation button device 40 with the presentation button device 40 switched to the second form. Ta.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the larger the change before and after switching, the stronger the impact will be when switching to the second mode. In view of these circumstances, it is effective to take measures such as increasing the operation stroke in the second mode, for example, from the viewpoint of increasing attention. However, if an attempt is made to greatly expand the operation stroke, it is assumed that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40. Considering the premise that the performance button device 40 is an object to be operated by the player, a decrease in the strength of the performance button device 40 may lead to malfunction of the performance button device 40, and become a factor that reduces the reliability of the gaming machine. There are concerns that this will happen. One of the features of this embodiment is that in consideration of such circumstances, a device is devised to suitably exhibit the effect of increasing the attention level while suppressing a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the sixth special performance that involves a change in the form of the performance button device 40 and the various configurations related to the sixth special performance are distinctive. The sixth special performance is a performance that is executed after the transition to the ready-to-reach display (after development) in the game round corresponding to the ready-to-reach display, and under the situation where the production button device 40 is in the first form. The first part executes an operation-compatible production (cut-in production using a character image) based on the operation of the operation button 721, and the operation button 721 in a situation where the production button device 40 is in the second form. and a second half part that executes an operation-responsive effect (interlocking effect of the first movable effect device 300) based on the operation of the first movable effect device 300.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the 6th special performance includes a 6th special performance It is broadly divided into production Y. In the sixth special effect Y, the light emitting effect by the first movable effect device 300 is executed when the operation button 721 is operated during the operation validity period of the second half part. The difference is that the production X is configured such that the light emission production by the first movable production device 300 is not executed when the operation button 721 is operated during the valid operation period of the second half part.

Hereinafter, first, the process for the sixth special effect (process for the sixth special effect) executed by the MP912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 105(b) and 106. The sixth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of the regular process, similar to the first special effect process and the like described above.

(6th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 105(b), in the process for the sixth special performance, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the sixth special performance. Whether or not to execute the sixth special performance is determined by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 at the start of the game round. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the sixth special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process advances to step S3102.

In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first half part is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation corresponding effect based on the first operation (a cut-in effect using a character image) is being executed, and if the operation corresponding effect is not being executed, various flag storage areas of the RAM 914 are stored. It is determined whether either a continuation flag or a non-continuation flag, which will be described later, is stored in 933. If the operation corresponding effect is being executed, or if the operation corresponding effect is not being executed but neither the continuation flag nor the non-continuation flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 and the first half part Proceed to processing. After executing the first half part process in step S3103, the sixth special effect process ends. On the other hand, if the operation-compatible production is not being executed and either the continuation flag or the non-continuation flag is stored, a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the second half part processing is performed. After execution, this sixth special effect processing is ended.

Next, the first half part processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 106.

(Processing for the first half part)
In the first half part processing, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "first operation") in the sixth special effect is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process advances to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether it is the suggestion start timing to start suggesting the first operation. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the process for the first half of this process is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process advances to step S3203.

In step S3203, a process for setting the validity period of the first operation is performed. During this valid period, the operation of the operation button 721 will be monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791.

In the following step S3204, first operation suggestion start processing is executed. In the first operation suggestion start processing, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as “Press a button”), and the display control device 142 is Outputs the operation suggestion start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the suggestion start command, a message “Press!!” for operation suggestion and a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. , controls the symbol display device 253 to display an indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

Thereafter, in step S3205, a hold standby process is executed and the sixth special effect process is ended. In the sixth special effect shown in this embodiment, a second operation (hereinafter referred to as second operation) is suggested after the first operation is completed. The operation button 721 pushed into the operation completion position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held at the operation completion position and is prevented from returning to the initial position. Here, with reference to FIG. 107, a supplementary explanation will be given of the configuration related to the regulation.

The movable base 741 of the performance button device 40 is provided with a hold mechanism 795 that holds the operation button 721 at the operation detection position (maximum press position). The hold mechanism 795 includes a movable piece 796 that can slide in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operation button 721, and a drive section (solenoid) that slides the movable piece 796. When the drive unit is de-energized, the movable piece 796 of the hold mechanism 795 waits at a retracted position that does not overlap the operating trajectory of the operation button 721, and when the drive unit is energized, the operation button 721 is activated. It is configured to move to a protruding position that overlaps the orbit.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) → FIG. 107(b), when the drive part of the hold mechanism 795 is excited, the movable piece 796 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and its tip touches the operating button 721. It will be pressed against a vertical wall. When the operation button 721 descends from this state to the maximum pressing position, the tip of the movable piece 796 enters the groove 739 formed on the side surface of the operation button 721, as shown in FIG. 107(b) → FIG. 107(c). The movable piece 796 and the groove portion 739 engage with each other. As a result, the operation button 721 is held at the operation completion position, and the return to the position before the operation is restricted. Thereafter, the driving part of the hold mechanism 795 is de-energized and the movable piece 796 moves to the retracted position, so that the operation button 721 is returned to its pre-operation position by the biasing force of the coil spring 745 (Fig. 107(c)→see FIG. 107(a)). In the following description, a state in which the return of the operation button 721 is restricted by the hold mechanism 795 is referred to as a "hold state", and a state in which the return is not restricted is referred to as a "free state", as appropriate.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 106 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if it is determined that the first operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S3206. In step S3206, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the validity period of the first operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process advances to step S3207. In step S3207, it is determined whether the first operation has been performed based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S3207, the process for the first half of the present process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, the process advances to step S3208.

In step S3208, first operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S3209, an operation corresponding production execution process is performed. In this operation-compatible production execution process, the speaker unit 27 outputs a sound effect for the operation-compatible production (cut-in production of a character image), and a command for the operation-compatible production is sent to the display control device 142, so that the operation is supported. Set the performance execution period (2 seconds). Based on receiving the command, the display control device 142 displays (cut-in display) the character image selected based on the win/fail result in the game round on the display screen 253a.

Thereafter, in step S3210, a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process for the first half of this process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S3206, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, that is, if the validity period of the first operation has elapsed without being performed, the process advances to step S3211. In step S3211, a first operation suggestion termination process is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S3212, hold standby cancellation processing is executed. Specifically, the drive section of the hold mechanism 795 is de-energized, and the movable piece 796 is returned to the retracted position. In the following step S3213, a non-continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the processing for the first half part ends.

Next, the second half part processing in step S3104 (see FIG. 105(b)) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 108 and 109.

(Processing for the second half)
In the second half part processing, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, the process advances to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second half part. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process advances to step S3303. In step S3303, a process for starting a guiding performance to draw the player's attention to the performance button device 40 is executed, and thereafter, the process for the second half of the book ends. In the guidance performance start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second mode, and outputs a guidance performance command to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for guidance performance on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 based on receiving the guidance performance command. The video for guidance performance is an animation video in which the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, that is, if it is not the start timing for the second half part, the continuation process is executed in step S3304, and then the second half part process ends. This continuation process will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of step S3301, if a negative determination is made in step S3301, that is, if the continuation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process advances to step S3305. In step S3305, it is determined whether a non-continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the non-continuation flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3305, and the process for the second half of the present process is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the non-continuation process is executed in step S3306, and then the second half part process is ended. In the non-continuation process, the speaker unit 27, lamp unit 24, and display control device 142 are controlled to execute an alternative performance (operation-incompatible performance) when the first operation is not performed on the performance button device 40. .

Next, the continuation process in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 109.

(Continuation processing)
In the continuation process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether the second operation is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process advances to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the switching grace period for switching the production button device 40 to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, the process advances to step S3403. In step S3403, it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3403, the present continuation process is immediately terminated.

If the determination is made in step S3403, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the second form in step S3404. After that, hold release processing is executed in step S3405. In the hold release process, the drive section of the hold mechanism 795 is de-energized to return the movable piece 796 to the retracted position. Thereafter, in step S3406, a switching grace period setting process is executed, and the present continuation process ends. The period required for switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. Then, the above-mentioned guidance performance will be completed at the timing when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3402, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S3407. In step S3407, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the answer in step S3407 is affirmative, the process advances to step S3408. In step S3408, a process for setting the validity period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3409, the second operation suggestion start process is executed, and the present continuation process ends.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and the display control device 142 is given the operation suggestion. Outputs the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, a message such as “One hit!!” for operation suggestion is displayed in the second form on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guiding effect ends and the operation suggestion begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S3407, if a negative determination is made in step S3407, the process advances to step S3410. In step S3410, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. That is, if the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period because the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, etc., the switching to the second mode is canceled.

Thereafter, an alternative effect execution process is performed in step S3411, and the present continuation process is ended. Through the alternative performance execution process, an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, that is, if the second operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S3412. In step S3412, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the valid period of the second operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3412, the process advances to step S3413.

In step S3413, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3413, and the present continuation process ends. If an operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3413 and the process advances to step S3414. In step S3414, second operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S3415, an operation corresponding performance execution process is performed. In the operation-corresponding performance execution process, a performance that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player is executed. Specifically, in the case of a winning result, the first movable presentation device 300 executes a light emitting effect (confirmed effect) and displays the letter "V" in the center of the display screen 253a, and in the case of a losing result, displays the word "unfortunate". Thereafter, the process advances to step S3416, where the continuation flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the present continuation process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S3412, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3412, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has elapsed without being performed, the process advances to step S3417. In step S3417, second operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S3418, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S3419, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and then the present continuation process is ended. In the alternative performance, the light emitting performance by the first movable performance device 300 is not performed regardless of the winning result/missing result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the flow of the sixth special effect will be explained. The group in FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a and the first movable production device 300, and the group in FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40. In the example shown in FIG. 110, the game round in which the sixth special effect (specifically, the sixth special effect Y) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and the sequence from FIG. 110 (1) → FIG. 110 (2) → FIG. The sixth special effect progresses in the order of 110(3)→FIG. 110(4)→FIG. 110(5).

At a timing after the variable display mode of symbols changes to ready-to-reach display on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a button icon imitating the operation button 721 and a message suggesting an operation (for example, "Press! !”) and an indicator indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed. When the operation button 721 is operated during the valid operation period, a cut-in image of the character is displayed based on the operation. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 110, the game round corresponds to a winning result, and an image of a girl holding a flag with the words "Very Hot" attached is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. When the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) due to this first operation (first operation), the operation button 721 is held by the hold mechanism 795 and the return to the initial position is restricted. becomes. In other words, the operation button 721 remains at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) even after the player's hand leaves the operation button 721. After the cut-in display is completed, the sixth special effect will shift from the first half to the second half.

Note that the first half part of the sixth special performance has a configuration that can occur as an operation-compatible performance other than the sixth special performance, that is, a performance corresponding to the first half part can also occur independently. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to identify from the first half part that the current performance is the sixth special performance.

After moving to the second half part, the display on the display screen 253a switches from the girl's image to the above-mentioned animation video for guiding effect. This animation suggests to the player that the situation is such that switching of the performance button device 40 may occur, and draws attention to the performance button device 40. Switching from the first form to the second form of the effect button device 40 is started after a certain interval from the start of the guidance effect. Specifically, when the movement restriction by the hold mechanism 795 is released and the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled, the operation button 721 is raised.

At the timing when the switching to the second mode is completed, the above-mentioned guidance effect ends and the operation suggestion of the operation button 721 starts. For example, on the display screen 253a, a button icon imitating the operation button 721 in the second form, a message suggesting an operation (for example, "One hit!!"), and an indicator indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed. Ru.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 110, the game times correspond to the winning results. Therefore, when the player operates the operation button 721 during the valid operation period, the first movable presentation device 300 executes the light emission effect, and the display screen 253a displays the character "V" indicating a winning result. will be displayed. This clearly indicates to the player that the game round is a winning result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, supplementary explanation will be given of the flow when switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form in the sixth special effect. FIG. 111 is a timing chart illustrating the flow when switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form.

At timing te1 after the start of the sixth special performance (first half part), the operation suggestion of the operation button 721 is started, and in conjunction with the start of the operation suggestion, the drive section of the hold mechanism 795 is switched from de-energized to energized. At the subsequent timing te2, the operation button 721 is operated by the player, and at the immediately following timing te3, the operation button 721 has reached the lower limit position (operation detection position). As a result, the cut-in display described above is executed.

At this timing, the hold mechanism 795 is already in a hold standby state, and the operation button 721 is held at the lower limit position by the hold mechanism 795. At the subsequent timing te4, although the player's hand leaves the operation button 721 and the pressure is released, the operation button 721 is held by the hold mechanism 795, so it returns to the upper limit position (initial position). There isn't.

At timing te5 after the cut-in display ends and the transition to the second half part occurs, the drive section of the hold mechanism 795 switches from energized to de-energized, and output of a drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is started. As a result, the operation button 721 starts moving toward the upper limit position (initial position), and the movable base 741 also starts moving from the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Here, in the production button device 40, from the viewpoint of posture stability, there is a slight time lag between when the stepping motor 753 starts operating and when the movable base 741 starts rising (for example, as shown in FIG. 53 etc.). However, during the time lag, the operation button 721 is first raised by itself due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and then the operation button 721 is raised due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and the movable base 741 is also raised due to the driving force of the stepping motor 753. do. As a result, stroke expansion is achieved through continuous movement without any breaks, and responsiveness during stroke expansion is improved by simultaneously moving the operation button 721 and movable base 741 in parallel (overlapping the rising periods). Improvements have been achieved.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as described above, the visual impact of the effect button device 40 can be strengthened and attention can be drawn to the effect button device 40 itself. Here, it is advantageous to increase the amount of displacement of the operation button 721 when switching from the first form to the second form in order to strengthen the impact when switching to the second form. However, if the amount of displacement is simply increased, there is a concern that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40 in the second embodiment. This is not preferable because it may cause the production button device 40 to malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, as a preliminary operation before switching to the second mode, the operation button 721 is moved to a position further back than the standby position (initial position or upper limit position) of the operation button 721 in the first mode. By configuring it to stay at a predetermined position (lower limit position), it is possible to increase the amount of displacement when switching to the second mode. This makes it possible to more suitably exhibit the effect of increasing the attention level while resolving the above-mentioned structural concerns.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment described above, when the first operation (first operation) → second operation (second operation) is repeated, the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) is reached by the first operation. The configuration is such that the operation button 721 is held. In other words, the player's operation was used as a means to temporarily lower the operation button 721 before switching to the second mode. It is also possible to change this and use an actuator such as a motor to temporarily lower the operation button 721 to the operation detection position before switching to the second mode. According to such a configuration, for the sixth special effect based on the premise of switching to the second mode, it is not necessary to continuously operate the operation button 721, and the above-mentioned first half part can be omitted.

Note that in order to make the first half part a preparatory part for the second half part, it is also possible to omit the operation corresponding performance based on the first operation and set the first operation as the preparation operation for the second operation.

<Modification 2>
In the case where the entire stroke is within the drive range of the stepping motor 753, a configuration may be adopted in which when the operating button 721 reaches the lower limit position, the stepping motor 753 is statically controlled to keep the operating button 721 at the lower limit position, A configuration may also be adopted in which the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped and the operation button 721 remains at the lower limit position due to its own weight.

<Modification 3>
The specific configuration for restricting the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position after reaching the operation detection position (maximum press position) is arbitrary. For example, instead of a configuration in which the return to the initial position is restricted by engaging the movable piece 796 and the groove portion 739, a configuration may be adopted in which the return to the initial position is restricted by attraction by the magnetic force of a magnet or the like. It is possible.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment, when switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40, the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position are set. Although the configuration is such that the operation periods overlap, the manner in which the operation periods overlap can be arbitrarily changed. For example, when switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40, instead of moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position at the beginning of the change, the operation button 721 may be moved to the upper limit position at the end of the change. It is also possible. Furthermore, when switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40, the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position is partially overlapped with the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position. It is also possible to configure the entire operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the entire operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position to overlap.

<Modification 5>
In the sixth embodiment, when switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40, the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position are set. Although the configuration is such that they overlap, it is not limited to this. When switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position do not overlap. be. For example, when switching from the first form to the second form of the production button device 40, the movable base 741 may be moved to the upper limit position after the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position, or the movable base 741 may be moved to the upper limit position. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position after being moved.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the stepping motor 753 is started to be driven at the same time as the hold on the operation button 721 is released (removal of movement restriction to the initial position). It is also possible to configure the system to start. However, in order to strengthen the impact of switching to the second mode, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to discern the preceding operation of the stepping motor 753 so that the switching to the second mode is not revealed in advance.

<Seventh embodiment>
As shown in each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that an operation-responsive performance linked to the movable performance device is executed based on an operation when the performance button device 40 is switched to the second mode (state in which the operation stroke is expanded). This is advantageous in terms of increasing attention to the game. However, if this kind of behavior occurs in the final phase of a game performance, there is a concern that the result will be more likely to be a failure as the operation → movable performance device becomes non-operational, and a negative impression will likely remain as a reaction to heightened expectations. be done. This may be a factor in refraining from operating in the second mode, or even refraining from operating in the first mode. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation suggestion in the second form is directly connected to the winning result, not only will the significance of operating the production button device 40 be diminished, but also the operation opportunity, that is, the form switching function of the production button device 40 will be exhibited. It is assumed that the chances of this happening will be greatly reduced. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into account. Specifically, the seventh special performance, which is an operation-corresponding performance associated with the operation in the second form, is distinctive. Hereinafter, an overview of the seventh special effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 112. Note that the description of the configurations common to each of the above embodiments will be basically omitted.

The 7th special performance is a performance that occurs in the final phase of the game round performance in which the reach display occurs, and is mainly the 7th special performance The seventh special effect Y is executed when the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, and the seventh special effect Z is executed only when the result of the lottery is a winning result.

In the 7th special effect becomes inactive. In other words, the 7th special effect X is a very strong effect. On the other hand, in the seventh special effect Y, operation of the operation button 721 is suggested after switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form, and when the operation button 721 is operated according to the suggestion, the operation button 721 is operated according to the suggestion. The configuration is such that three movable performance devices 803 operate. In other words, the seventh special effect Y is a highly successful effect.

Regarding the seventh special performance X and the seventh special performance Y, the number of times the performance button device 40 is switched to the second mode is one time. On the other hand, in the seventh special effect Z, the number of times the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form is two. Specifically, after switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form, even if the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion, the third movable production device 803 is configured not to operate. Although it is similar to the seventh special effect X in that the effect button device 40 is in the second mode, the effect button device 40 switches again to the second form, and if the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion after the switching, the third movable effect device 803 The configuration is such that it works. In other words, while the 7th special performance 7. It consists of two parts that perform special effects. Since this seventh special performance Z is a performance that occurs only in the case of a winning result, if the third movable performance device 803 operates due to the second operation suggestion, a win is confirmed.

In the following explanation, for convenience, the first half of the seventh special performance ”.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 113 to 117, the seventh special performance process (seventh special performance process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described. The seventh special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(7th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 113, in the process for the seventh special performance, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the seventh special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the seventh special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the first part. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3502, the process advances to step S3503, and a process for starting a guidance performance that urges the player's attention to the performance button device 40 is executed. In the guidance performance start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second mode, and outputs a guidance performance command to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for guidance performance on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 based on receiving the guidance performance command. The video for guidance performance is an animation video in which the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. In addition, in the guidance performance start process of step S2503, the third movable performance device 803 is switched from a light-off state to a lighting state or a blinking state.

After executing the process in step S3503, or if a negative determination is made in step S3502, the process advances to step S3504. In step S3504, it is determined whether or not the first part is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, the process for the seventh special effect is ended after executing the process for the first part in step S3505. If a negative determination is made in step S3504, the process for the second part is executed in step S3506, and then the process for the seventh special effect is ended.

(Processing for 1st part)
As shown in FIG. 114, in the first part processing, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the first operation (hereinafter referred to as the first operation) is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the process advances to step S3602. In step S3602, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the switching grace period for switching the production button device 40 to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the process advances to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the process for the first part is immediately terminated.

If the determination is made in step S3603, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the second form in step S3604. Thereafter, in step S3605, a switching grace period setting process is executed, and the first part process ends. The period required for switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. Note that the guidance performance described above will be completed at the timing when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3602, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S3606. In step S3606, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the answer is affirmative in step S3606, the process advances to step S3607. In step S3607, processing for setting the validity period of the first operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3608, a first operation suggestion start process is executed, and the first part process ends.

In the first operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and the display control device 142 is given the operation suggestion. Outputs the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, a message such as “Press!!” for operation suggestion is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 in the second form. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guiding effect ends and the operation suggestion begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S3606, if a negative determination is made in step S3606, the process advances to step S3609. In step S3609, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 to the first form. That is, if the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period because the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, etc., the switching to the second mode is canceled.

Thereafter, in step S3610, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the process for the first part ends. Through the alternative performance execution process, an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, that is, if the first operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S3611. In step S3611, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3611, the process advances to step S3612. In step S3612, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3612, and the first part processing ends. If an operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3612, and the process advances to step S3613. In step S3613, first operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S3614, a first operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the first operation-compatible production execution process, if the current seventh special production is the seventh special production Y, the third movable production device 803 is turned toward the center of the display screen 253a while being maintained in a lighting state or a blinking state. move it. As a result, the degree of expectation for a winning result will greatly increase. On the other hand, if the current seventh special performance is the seventh special performance X or the seventh special performance Z, the third movable performance device 803 is stopped at the standby position and Switch to off state. As a result, the level of expectation for a winning result will decrease.

After performing the first operation corresponding performance execution process in step S3614, the process advances to step S3615. In step S3614, it is determined whether the current seventh special performance is the seventh special performance Z or not. If a negative determination is made in step S3614, the process for the first part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3614, a second part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 in step S3616, and the first part processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S3611, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3611, that is, if the validity period of the first operation has elapsed without being performed, the process advances to step S3617. In step S3617, first operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S3618, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S3619, an alternative effect is executed, and then the first part process ends. In the alternative performance, the linked performance by the third movable performance device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/miss result or the like.

Next, the second part processing in step S3506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 115.

(Processing for the second part)
In the second part processing, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the second operation is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3701, the process advances to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3703. In step S3703, it is determined whether switching to the second mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S3703, the process advances to step S3704. In step S3704, it is determined whether the switching trigger is within the valid period. In this embodiment, the fact that the operation button 721 is out of the operation detection position, that is, the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is OFF, is set as the trigger for switching to the second mode. It is specified that the period for determining whether or not is satisfied is until 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the second part. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3705.

In step S3705, it is determined based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 whether the operation button 721 is out of the operation detection position (ie, whether it is turned OFF). If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the second part processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, the process advances to step S3706, and processing for starting switching to the second mode is executed. Here, the switching process to the second mode is executed with reference to FIG. 116.

(Processing to start switching to the second form)
In the switching start process to the second mode, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the switching trigger validity period remains. For example, if the player releases the operation button 721 and the operation button 721 returns to the initial position before the start of the second half, it is determined that the switching trigger validity period remains, and the remaining period is 3 seconds. becomes. Furthermore, if the operation button 721 is turned off 3 seconds after the start of the second half part, it is determined that there is no switching effective period remaining (the remaining period is 0 sec).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, the process advances to step S3802. In step S3802, low-speed drive processing is executed. In this embodiment, the stepping motor 753 is provided with a low-speed drive control mode in which the stepping motor 753 is rotated at a low speed (first speed) and a high-speed drive control mode in which the stepping motor 753 is rotated at a high speed. ing. The low-speed drive process shown in step S3802 is a drive control process using a low-speed drive control mode, and this process causes the stepping motor 753 to rotate at a low speed. This causes the movable base 741 to rise at a low speed.

In the following step S3803, a speed change flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. Although the details will be described later, by setting the speed change flag, the drive control mode of the stepping motor 753 is switched from the low-speed drive control mode to the high-speed drive control mode midway. Thereafter, in step S3804, a low-speed drive period setting process is executed, and the main switching start process is ended. In the low-speed drive period setting process, the low-speed drive period is set with reference to a map stored in the ROM 913, specifically a map showing the relationship between the remaining period and the low-speed drive period. Although details will be described later, this map is configured such that the longer the remaining period is, the longer the low-speed drive period is, and the shorter the remaining period is, the shorter the low-speed drive period is.

Returning to the explanation of step S3801, if a negative determination is made in step S3801, that is, if the remaining period is 0, high-speed drive processing is executed in step S3805, and then the main switching start processing is ended. The high-speed drive process shown in step S3805 is a drive control process using a high-speed drive control mode, and the stepping motor 753 rotates at a high speed (second speed). This causes the movable base 741 to rise at high speed.

Note that the first speed and the second speed are different so that they are both slower than the rotational speed (third speed) of the stepping motor 753 when switching the production button device 40 to the second mode in the first part. It is provided. As already explained, when the switch to the second form occurs in the latter part, the winning result is effectively revealed. The reason for intentionally delaying the switch to the second form in the second half as described above is to ensure that there is enough time to enjoy the switch to the second form.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 115, after executing the switching start process to the second form in step S3706, the switching grace period setting process is executed in step S3707, and the guidance effect start process is executed in step S3708. After that, the process for the second part ends. In the second part of the seventh special performance, the period required for switching the performance button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 5 seconds. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. In other words, the required period and grace period are longer than in the first part. Furthermore, although the guiding effect is basically the same moving image as the guiding effect executed in step S3503, the deformation speed of the button in the animation is changed to be slower than that in step S3505. Furthermore, at the beginning of the animation, a cut-in display is performed to indicate that the seventh special effect will continue. Note that the guidance performance described above will be completed at the timing when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3704, if a negative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3709. In step S3709, it is determined whether or not the switching trigger valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3709, the second part processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3709, the process for the second part ends after performing an alternative effect execution process in step S3715, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of step S3703, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, that is, if the production button device 40 is being switched to the second mode, a switching speed change process is executed in step S3710. After that, the process for the second part ends. Here, the switching speed changing process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 117.

(Switching speed change process)
In the switching speed change process, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether a speed change flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S3901, the main switching speed change process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process advances to step S3902.

In step S3902, it is determined whether the timing has elapsed after the low-speed drive period set in step S3804. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, the main switching speed change process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, high-speed drive processing is executed in step S3903, and then this switching speed change processing is ended. By executing the high-speed drive process, the stepping motor 753 switches from low-speed rotation to high-speed rotation, and the rising speed of the movable base 741 (operation button 721) changes from low speed to high speed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the low speed/high speed switching pattern. FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the seventh special effect Z is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 118, the operation corresponding performance is executed at the timing tf1, and the process moves to the second part at the timing tf2. With the transition to the second part, the above-mentioned switching trigger validity period comes to an end. If the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed before moving to the second part (when the detection sensor 791 is OFF), the stepping motor 753 is activated at the start timing of the second part. Start low speed rotation. As a result, the movable base 741 (operation button 721) starts to rise at a low speed. In this case, the low speed drive period is the longest, and the operation of the stepping motor 753 is switched from low speed to high speed at timing tf6 when the low speed drive period has elapsed. Thereafter, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at timing tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

On the other hand, when the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed at the timing of tf3 during the switching trigger validity period (when the detection sensor 791 is turned off), as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. The stepping motor 753 starts rotating at a low speed at the timing of tf3. As a result, the movable base 741 (operation button 721) starts to rise at a low speed. In this case, compared to the case where the operation is started at a low speed at the timing of tf2, the low speed drive period is shortened, and the operation of the stepping motor 753 changes from low speed to high speed at the timing of tf5 after the low speed drive period has passed. Switch to . Thereafter, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at timing tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

Next, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 118, when the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed at the timing tf4 when the switching trigger validity period ends (when the detection sensor 791 is turned OFF), , the stepping motor 753 starts rotating at high speed at the timing of tf4. As a result, the movable base 741 starts rising at high speed. In this case, the low-speed drive period is zero. Thereafter, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at timing tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed at any timing during the switching trigger validity period (when the detection sensor 791 is turned off), The period from the start of the second part to the timing when the movement of the movable base 741 is completed (timing tf7) is set to be the same. In the second part, the timing at which switching to the second mode is started differs depending on the timing when the player releases the operation button 721, but while allowing such diversity, the second part This is a device to prevent the flow of performances from becoming too diverse.

Returning to the explanation of step S3702 in FIG. 115, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S3711. In step S3711, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the answer is yes in step S3711, the process advances to step S3712. In step S3712, a process for setting the validity period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3713, a second operation suggestion start process is executed, and the second part process ends.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and the display control device 142 is given the operation suggestion. Outputs the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, a message such as “One hit!!” for operation suggestion is displayed in the second form on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guiding effect ends and the operation suggestion begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S3711, if a negative determination is made in step S3711, the process advances to step S3714. In step S3714, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. That is, if the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period because the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, etc., the switching to the second mode is canceled.

Thereafter, in step S3715, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the process for the second part ends. Through the alternative performance execution process, an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the second operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S3716. In step S3716, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the valid period of the second operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3716, the process advances to step S3717.

In step S3717, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated (second operation) based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If the second operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3717, and the second part processing ends. If the second operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3717 and the process advances to step S3718. In step S3718, second operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S3719, a second operation corresponding performance execution process is performed. In the second operation-compatible performance execution process, a performance that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player is executed. Specifically, in the case of a winning result, the third movable performance device 803 is driven to move the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 from the standby position to the performance position. At the same time, effects are displayed on the display screen 253a to emphasize the decoration.

Returning to the explanation of step S3716, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3716, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has elapsed without being performed, the process advances to step S3720. In step S3720, second operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S3721, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. After that, in step S3722, the process for executing the alternative effect is performed, and then the process for the second part ends. In the alternative performance, the linked performance by the third movable performance device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit/miss result.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams in FIGS. 119 to 120, we will supplement the flow of the seventh special performance when the seventh special performance (seventh special performance Z) is executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result. explain. 119(a) group and FIG. 120(a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the third movable production device 803, and FIG. 119(b) group and FIG. 120(b) group are schematic diagrams showing the production button device 40. It is a diagram. In the example shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the game round in which the seventh special performance (more specifically, the seventh special performance Z) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and the sequence from FIG. 119 (1) to FIG. 119 (2) ) → Figure 119 (3) → Figure 119 (4) → Figure 120 (5) → Figure 120 (6) → Figure 120 (7) → Figure 120 (8).

After the variable display mode of symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-reach display, the seventh special performance (seventh special performance Z) is started. After the guidance effect indicating that the form change will occur on the display screen 253a, a button icon imitating the operation button 721 and a message suggesting operation (for example, "Press!!") are displayed on the display screen 253a. An indicator indicating the remaining operation validity period is displayed.

If the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, a display is performed in which the button icon being displayed is shattered, and the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 remains in the standby position. Thereafter, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a.

Immediately after the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is once stopped and displayed, a cut-in display of a girl occurs on the display screen 253a, and the symbols start changing again. Thereafter, the display changes from the cut-in display to the animation video of the guiding effect, and the form of the effect button device 40 switches again to the second form. The speed at which the operation button 721 is raised at this time is set to be slower than when switching to the second mode occurs in the first part.

After the operation button 721 is raised to a certain extent at low speed, the speed changes from low speed to high speed, and the switch to the second mode is quickly completed. After the switch to the second mode is completed, a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message suggesting an operation (for example, "One hit!!"), and an indicator indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed on the display screen 253a. be done.

When the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 falls from the standby position to the performance position, and an effect is displayed on the display screen 253a that emphasizes the movable decoration. is displayed. Thereafter, the symbol combination corresponding to the hit result is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the display screen 253a.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this embodiment, the visual impact of the effect button device 40 will be strengthened and attention will be directed to the effect button device 40 itself. can be encouraged. When the operation button 721 is operated after switching the performance button device 40 to the second form, a first special performance with a relatively low expectation level (a performance not linked to the third movable performance device 803) and a winning result, which is a winning result. One of the second special effects (effects linked to the third movable effect device 803) with a relatively high expectation level is executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs even though expectations for the second special effect have been aroused, there is a concern that a strong impression will remain that the second form→operation was a waste. In this case, even if the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode to prompt the user to operate, there is a concern that the chances of performing the operation will be reduced. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, the effect button device 40 returns to the second form. By making it possible to perform the operation again in the second form, it is possible to maintain expectations for an opportunity for a highly anticipated operation-corresponding performance to occur. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and to improve the degree of attention to the game using the effect button device 40.

As shown in this embodiment, when the first special effect on the disadvantageous side is executed, the second special effect can be generated by returning to the second form → re-operating, so that the first special effect can be generated. When a special performance occurs, it is possible to suppress a rapid drop in the degree of attention of the player who expects the second special performance to the game.

A configuration in which returning to the second form is avoided when the second special performance on the advantageous side is executed is a configuration in which return to the second form is possible only when the first special performance on the disadvantageous side is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game when the first special performance is executed.

By diversifying the displacement speed of the operation button 721 when switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form, it is possible to suitably suppress the return operation from becoming monotonous. In particular, by adopting a configuration in which the displacement speed is switched from low speed to high speed and ensuring a drive period at low speed, it is possible to suitably prevent the movement of the operation button 721 from being overlooked. The configuration is such that the earlier the timing at which the return operation start condition is met, the longer the low-speed displacement period becomes. According to such a configuration, the driving period at low speed can be ensured as long as possible.

As mentioned above, it is preferable to gain drive time at low speeds in order to improve player satisfaction. However, the fact that the progress of the performance is delayed by such a function causes excessive diversification of the progress pattern of the performance. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the game round until the return to the second mode is completed is the same regardless of the timing at which the start condition for the return operation is satisfied. By limiting the number of times, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably eliminated.

It is preferable to quickly switch to the second form for the first time in order to strengthen the impact. By making the period required for the first switching different from the period required for the second switching, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the switching to the second mode has simply occurred twice. In particular, differentiating the game so that the second time switching to the second form takes longer than the first time switching to the second form allows you to gain time to visually track the movements when returning to the game. This is preferable in terms of improving customer satisfaction.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode in the second part to clearly indicate a winning result, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the production button device 40 switches to the second mode in the second half part, it is possible to have a configuration in which it does not result in a winning result (it may result in a losing result). In other words, it is possible to configure such a configuration that the seventh special effect Z can occur even in a game round corresponding to a winning result.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, when switching the production button device 40 to the second form in the second part, the switching speed (rotational speed of the stepping motor 753) is switched from low speed to high speed during switching. , it is also possible to have a configuration in which the switching is not performed. That is, the switching speed when switching the production button device 40 to the second form in the second part may be limited to one speed.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the switching speed when switching the production button device 40 to the second form in the second part is slower than the switching speed when switching the production button device 40 to the second form in the first part. Although the difference is set so that In order to make the switching speed in the first part different from the switching speed in the second part, the switching speed when switching the production button device 40 to the second form in the second part is different from the switching speed when switching the production button device 40 to the second form in the first part. It is also possible to provide a difference so that the switching speed is faster than when switching to the second mode.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh special effect Z in the seventh embodiment, by using the hold mechanism shown in the sixth embodiment, etc., when the operation button 721 is operated in the first half part, the operation button 721 is It is also possible to hold the button at the operation detection position (maximum press position) and release the hold when switching to the second mode in the second part.

<Eighth embodiment>
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of forms in which the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is different. This embodiment is characterized by the eighth special effect, which is an operation-compatible effect using the form switching function of the effect button device 40. The 8th special performance has two major parts: the first half where the operation-compatible performance is executed based on a long-press operation (first operation), and the second half where the operation-compatible performance is executed based on a single operation (second operation). The operation suggestion is executed a maximum of two times during the eighth special effect. The configuration related to the eighth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from each of the above embodiments. First, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 124, the eighth special performance process (eighth special performance process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described. The eighth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(8th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 121, in the process for the eighth special performance, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the eighth special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S4001, the eighth special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the process advances to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not a latter part transition flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, that is, if the second half part shift flag is not stored, the first half part process is executed in step S4003, and the eighth special effect process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S4002, that is, if the second half part shift flag is stored, the process advances to step S4004.

In step S4004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second half part. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, a guidance performance start process is executed in step S4005. In the guidance performance start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second mode, and outputs a guidance performance command to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for guidance performance on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 based on receiving the guidance performance command. The video for guidance performance is an animation video in which the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form.

After executing the guidance performance start process in step S4005, or when a negative determination is made in step S4004, the process for the second half part is executed in step S4006, and the eighth special performance process ends.

(Processing for the first half part)
As shown in FIG. 122, in the first half part processing, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the first operation, which is a long press operation, is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process advances to step S4102. In step S4102, it is determined whether it is the timing to start suggesting the first operation. If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process for the first half of the present process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, the process advances to step S4103. In step S4103, a process for setting the validity period of the first operation is executed. In the following step S4104, a determination reference period setting process for the first operation is performed. The determination reference period is a period during which the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum press position), and is a reference period for determining that the operation is completed in later determination processing. There are multiple candidates for this criterion period, and in the case of a wrong result, a relatively long period is likely to be set, and in the case of a winning result, a relatively short period is likely to be set. . Thereafter, in step S4105, the first operation suggestion start process is executed, and the process for the first half part ends.

Note that, as a performance similar to the eighth special performance, a similar special performance is provided in which the second half part of the eighth special performance is omitted. In other words, the outline of this similar special performance is the same as the first half of the 8th special performance, and it is difficult to determine from its behavior whether it is the similar special performance or the 8th special performance. ing. Even in this similar special performance, multiple candidates are provided for the judgment reference period, and in the case of a losing result, a relatively long period is likely to be set, and in the case of a winning result, a relatively short period is likely to be set. It is easier to set up. In the game round that is a winning result, when the long press period reaches the determination reference period, the first movable presentation device 300 immediately operates to clearly indicate to the player that the winning result is a winning result, while the non-winning result In a certain game round, even if the long press period reaches the determination reference period, the first movable presentation device 300 remains inactive.

In the first operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message (for example, a voice such as "Press and hold a button") prompting the operation, and the display control device 142 is operated to Outputs the suggested start command. In response to receiving the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message such as “Press and hold button” for operation suggestion on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 in the first form. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating a button with a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Further, on the display screen 253a, an operation indicator whose display mode changes depending on the long press period of the operation button 721 is displayed. When this operation indicator reaches MAX, it is suggested to the player that the operation has been completed.

Returning to the explanation of step S4101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, the process advances to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4106, the process advances to step S4107. In step S4107, it is determined whether the cumulative period of long press operations (first operation) has reached the determination reference period. If a negative determination is made in step S4107, the process for the first half part is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, the process advances to step S4108. In step S4108, operation completion notification processing and suggestion termination processing for the first operation are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S4109, a first operation corresponding performance execution process is performed. In the first operation-compatible performance execution process, a countdown display of "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" is performed on the display screen 253a. Note that the eighth special performance does not end in the first half, and the first movable performance device 300 remains inactive even after the countdown display is completed.

Thereafter, in step S4110, a second half part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. Then, in step S4111, a hold standby process, which is a control process for the drive unit of the hold mechanism 795 (see the sixth embodiment), is executed, and then the first half part process ends.

In the eighth special effect shown in this embodiment, a second operation (hereinafter referred to as second operation) is suggested after the first operation is completed. The operation button 721 pushed into the operation completion position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held at the operation completion position and is prevented from returning to the initial position.

Returning to the explanation of step S4106, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4106, that is, if the validity period of the first operation has elapsed, the process advances to step S4112. In step S4112, it is determined whether the first operation is continuing. That is, it is determined whether or not the first operation is not completed within the valid operation period, but continues until the timing when the valid operation period expires. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, it is assumed that the operation is completed although the conditions related to the determination reference period are not satisfied, and each process of steps S4108 to S4111 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4112, the process advances to step S4113. In step S4113, the first operation suggestion termination process is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Thereafter, in step S4114, an alternative effect execution process is executed, and then the process for the first half part ends.

Next, the second half part processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 123.

(Processing for the second half)
In the second half part processing, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the second operation is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the process advances to step S4202. In step S4202, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the process advances to step S4203. In step S4203, it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the process advances to step S4204.

In step S4204, a switching grace period setting process is performed. In the following step S4205, hold standby release processing is executed. As a result, the movable piece of the hold mechanism 795 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the restriction on the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is released. As a result, the operation button 721 starts moving toward the initial position by the biasing force of the coil spring 745.

Thereafter, in step S4206, the process of setting the stop position of the movable base 741 is executed, and the process for the second half of this process ends. In the stop position setting process, the stop position of the movable base 741 in the current eighth special performance, that is, the form of the performance button device 40, is determined based on the success or failure result. In this embodiment, in addition to the first, second, and third forms of the production button device 40, the protrusion level (operation stroke) of the operation button 721 is different from the first form and the third form. A fourth form, which is in between, is provided. That is, as shown in FIGS. 124(a) to 124(d), the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is configured to increase in the order of first form < fourth form < third form < second form. In the following explanation, for convenience, the protrusion level of the first form is "LV0", the protrusion level of the fourth form is "LV1", the protrusion level of the third form is "LV2", and the protrusion level of the second form is "LV3". It is called.

As shown in FIG. 124(e), the 8th special effect includes an 8th special effect A defined to have a prominence level of "LV1", and an 8th special effect A defined to have a prominence level of "LV2". It is roughly divided into 8 special effects B and 8 special effects C whose prominence level is defined as "LV3", and the special effects are arranged in the order of 8th special effects A < 8th special effects B < 8th special effects C. A difference is provided so that the degree of expectation for transition to the gaming state is high. In step S4206, it is determined which one of the eighth special effects AC to be used as the current eighth special effect is based on the validity result and the operation status of the first operation.

Specifically, if the first operation moves to the second half without reaching the criteria period, "LV3" is excluded from the setting candidates and either "LV1" or "LV2" is set. . At this time, a difference is provided so that "LV2" is more likely to be set in the case of a winning result, and "LV1" is more likely to be set in the case of a losing result.

On the other hand, when the first operation reaches the determination reference period and moves to the second half, one of the prominence levels "LV1" to "LV3" is set. At this time, if it is a winning result, it is likely to be set in the order of "LV1" < "LV2" < "LV3", and if it is a losing result, it is likely to be set in the order of "LV3" < "LV2" < "LV1". The difference is made so that

Returning to the explanation of step S4203 in FIG. 123, if a negative determination is made in step S4203, that is, if it is not the timing to start switching to the second mode, the process advances to step S4207. In step S4207, it is determined whether the grace period for switching to the second mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S4207, the process for the second half of the main part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, the form switching process is executed in step S4208, and then the second half part process is ended. Here, the format switching process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 125.

(Form switching process)
In the mode switching process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 753 is being rotated at a low speed. If a negative determination is made in step S4301, the process advances to step S4302. In step S4302, it is determined whether the operation button 721 is turned off based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S4302, the present mode switching process is directly ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, low-speed drive processing is executed in step S4303, and then the present mode switching processing is ended.

In this low-speed drive process, the stepping motor 753 is rotated at a low speed. Here, "low speed" in this embodiment means that, like the first special effect shown in the first embodiment, the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 is adjusted according to the expectation degree of transition to the special game state. This speed is lower than the rotational speed of the stepping motor 753 when the form is switched in a non-changing type of special performance. In this way, by lengthening the period required for switching between forms, it is possible to prevent the process in which a difference in protrusion level occurs from being overlooked.

Returning to the explanation of step S4301, if low speed driving is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301 and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, it is determined whether movable base 741 has reached the stop position set in step S4206. If a negative determination is made in step S4304, the present mode switching process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, the process advances to step S4305. In step S4305, processing for stopping the stepping motor 753 is executed. Thereby, the mode switching of the production button device 40 is completed.

Returning to the explanation of step S4202 in FIG. 123, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the switching grace period has elapsed, the process advances to step S4209. In step S4209, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the answer is yes in step S4209, the process advances to step S4210. In step S4210, a process for setting the validity period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S4211, the second operation suggestion start process is executed, and the second half part process ends.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and the display control device 142 is given the operation suggestion. Outputs the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as “One hit!!” for operation suggestion and an operation stroke are expanded on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guiding effect ends and the operation suggestion begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S4209, if a negative determination is made in step S4209, the process advances to step S4211. In step S4211, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. That is, if the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period because the movement of the operation button 721 is obstructed by a hand, etc., the switching to the second mode is canceled.

Thereafter, in step S4212, alternative performance execution processing is performed, and the processing for the second half of the main part is ended. Through the alternative performance execution process, an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S4201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, that is, if the second operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S4214. In step S4214, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the valid period of the second operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S4214, the process advances to step S4215.

In step S4215, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated (second operation) based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If the second operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S4215, and the second half part processing ends. If the second operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4215 and the process advances to step S4216. In step S4216, second operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S4217, a second operation corresponding performance execution process is performed. In the second operation-compatible performance execution process, a performance that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player is executed. Specifically, the first movable presentation device 300 is driven to perform a light emission presentation using the first movable presentation device 300. In conjunction with this, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blackout effect).

Returning to the explanation of step S4214, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4214, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has elapsed without the second operation being performed, the process advances to step S4218. In step S4218, second operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S4219, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S4220, an alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the second half of the main part ends. In the alternative performance, the light emission performance by the first movable performance device 300 and the lights-out performance (blackout performance) of the symbol display device 253 are not executed regardless of the winning result/missing result.

Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 126 and 127, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the eighth special performance (eighth special performance C) when the eighth special performance (eighth special performance C) is executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result. do. 126(a) group and FIG. 127(a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the first movable production device 300, and FIG. 126(b) group and FIG. 127(b) group are schematic diagrams showing the production button device 40. It is a diagram. In the example shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the game round in which the eighth special performance (more specifically, the eighth special performance C) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and the sequence from FIG. 126(1) to FIG. 126(2) ) → Figure 126 (3) → Figure 126 (4) → Figure 127 (5) → Figure 127 (6) → Figure 127 (7) → Figure 127 (8).

The eighth special performance (eighth special performance C) is started after the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-reach display. The eighth special performance in this embodiment is a so-called mission performance, and the player is informed of information indicating what kind of event should occur in the current performance to cause a shift to a special game state. Specifically, a message "Turn on the police lamp" is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a.

After that, instead of the message, a message such as "Press and hold the button" to suggest the operation, a pattern imitating a button with an extended operation stroke, and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period will be displayed on the pattern. Display device 253 is controlled. Further, on the display screen 253a, an operation indicator whose display mode changes depending on the long press period of the operation button 721 is displayed.

When the operation button 721 is pressed for a long time according to the operation suggestion, the display mode of the operation indicator changes depending on the period during which the long press is continued. When the period during which the long press is continued reaches a preset determination reference period, a message indicating the completion of the operation (for example, characters "Completed") is displayed on the display screen 253a. In conjunction with this, the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum press position), and return to the initial position is restricted. Thereafter, a guiding effect that calls attention to the operation button 721 is performed on the display screen 253a. In the guidance performance, first, the words "Attention the button" and a picture of an arrow pointing toward the operation button 721 are displayed, and then a moving image simulating the shape change of the performance button device 40 is displayed.

In accordance with the display of the moving image, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to any of the second form to fourth form. In other words, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is changed. The degree of expectation for achieving the mission described above, that is, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state, increases in the order of salient level LV1 < salient level LV2 < salient level LV3, and a player who expects to accomplish the mission presses the operation button 721. It is assumed that attention will be paid to the behavior of

After the form change of the production button device 40 is completed, a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message suggesting an operation (for example, "One hit!!"), and an indicator indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed on the display screen 253a. is displayed.

When the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the display screen 253a goes dark (blacks out) and the first movable presentation device 300 starts a light emission effect. Thereafter, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the active line of the display screen 253a while the light emitting effect continues.

According to this embodiment, after the performance is executed by operating the operation button 721, by releasing the operation button 721, the operation button is switched to one of the protrusion levels LV1 to LV3. These prominence levels LV1 to LV3 are determined according to the results of the lottery. In this way, if the configuration is such that the displacement destination (return destination) of the operation button 721 can be changed depending on the result of success or failure, it is possible to suitably suppress the attention to the production button device 40 from rapidly decreasing due to the operation. .

When the shape changes of the production button device 40 occur continuously, it is not preferable in terms of increasing attention that the impression becomes strong that the shape changes are simply repeated. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by creating a difference by making the displacement speed of the operation button 721 slower during the shape change after the operation than the displacement speed of the operation button 721 during the shape change before the operation. , the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. In the deformation after the operation, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the reached position, so by purposefully making the displacement slowly, the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, when switching the protrusion level based on the operation of the operation button 721, the protrusion levels LV1 to LV3 are targeted for switching, but the present invention is not limited to this. When switching the protrusion level based on the operation of the operation button 721, it is also possible to set the protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV3 as switching targets.

<Modification 2>
When executing the eighth special effect in the eighth embodiment, the switching operation is temporarily stopped at the boundary between each protrusion level when switching the form of the effect button device 40 in accordance with the transition to the second half. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the speed is reduced or a configuration in which the speed is decelerated.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth special performance in the eighth embodiment, the rotational speed of the stepping motor 753 when switching the form of the performance button device 40 in accordance with the transition to the second half part is set from the protrusion level "LV1" to the protrusion level "LV3". '', the rotational speed of the stepping motor 753 may be different depending on the set protrusion level. For example, the rotational speed of the stepping motor 753 may be made faster as the amount of protrusion is larger, or the rotational speed of the stepping motor 753 may be made faster as the amount of protrusion is smaller.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment, if the operation period of the first operation in the first half part does not reach the determination reference period, the protrusion level "LV3" is excluded from the setting candidates for the protrusion level of the operation button 721 in the second half part. However, it is also possible to include the protrusion level "LV3".

<Modification 5>
In the eighth embodiment described above, in the case where the operation period of the first operation in the first half part has not reached the judgment reference period, and when the operation period of the first operation in the first half part has reached the judgment reference period, the operation period in the second half part is Although the configuration is such that the setting manner of the protrusion level is different, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting mode of the prominence level in the second half part is the same when the operation period of the first operation has not reached the determination reference period and when it has reached the determination reference period.

<Ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a ninth special performance is executed in which the shape change of the performance button device 40 continues over a plurality of game rounds, and the above-mentioned first to eighth embodiments are different from each other in that the ninth special performance is executed. are different in form and composition. The configuration of the ninth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from those embodiments. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 128, the setting process for the ninth special effect (ninth special effect setting process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The ninth special effect setting process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(9th special effect setting process)
In the ninth special performance setting process, first, in step S4401, the main controller 162 issues a hold command indicating that hold information has been added, or a shift command indicating that the hold information has been digested and moving on to the next game round. Determine whether any is being received. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the ninth special effect setting process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, the process advances to step S4402. In step S4402, it is determined whether the ninth special effect has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether a ninth special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, the ninth special effect setting process is directly ended. If a negative determination is made in step S4402, the process advances to step S4403.

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not a performance corresponding to an operation using the performance button device 40 is scheduled to be executed in the current game round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, the ninth special effect setting process is directly ended. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, the process advances to step S4404. In step S4404, one target reservation among the currently stored reservations is tentatively determined. In this provisional determination, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold corresponding to the reach indication, and if there are multiple holds corresponding to the reach indication, one hold from among the multiple holds is selected as the 10th special hold. Tentatively decided as a candidate for production. In this determination, a hold with a long variable display time is given preferential treatment so that it is more likely to be subject to provisional determination than a hold with a short variable display time.

If there is no hold that is subject to tentative determination, a negative determination is made in step S4405 and the ninth special effect setting process is ended. If there is a reservation subject to tentative determination, an affirmative determination is made in step S4405 and the process advances to step S4406.

In step S4406, it is determined whether or not all the reservations that precede the reservation that is the target of the tentative determination correspond to complete failures (results of failures that do not correspond to reach display). If a negative determination is made in step S4406, the ninth special effect setting process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4406, a ninth special effect lottery process is executed in step S4407. By winning this lottery process, the tentative decision will be changed to the start confirmation (final decision).

When the start of the ninth special effect is confirmed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4408 and the process proceeds to step S4409. In step S4409, the maximum number of steps up to the determined target suspension is specified. Specifically, the number of holds that exist between the determined target hold and the hold related to the current game round is specified.

In the following step S4410, the final form of the production button device 40 before the operation suggestion is determined based on the pending information (C1, C2, C3, CS) that was the subject of the above-mentioned tentative determination. In the production button device 40 in this embodiment, the protrusion levels of the operation button 721 are provided from protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV5, and protrusion level LV1
Differences are provided so that the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state increases in the order of <protrusion level LV2<prominence level LV3<prominence level LV4<prominence level LV5. In other words, regarding the 9th special performance, 9th special performance A whose final form is a prominence level LV1, 9th special performance B whose final form is a prominence level LV2, and 9th special performance C whose final form is a prominence level LV3 , a ninth special effect D whose final form is a prominence level LV4, and a ninth special effect E whose final form is a protrusion level LV5 (see FIG. 129(a)).

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 129(b), the difference in the amount of protrusion at each protrusion level is basically set to be the same, but the difference in protrusion amount between protrusion level LV0 and protrusion level LV1 is The difference in amount X1 is differentiated to be larger than the differences X2 to X5 between other protrusion levels. This is a contrivance to strengthen the visual impact when the form changes for the first time.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 128, after the final form is determined in step S4410, the process up to the final form, that is, the form switching pattern is determined in step S4411. After that, in step S4412, a mode switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from the protrusion level LV0 to the protrusion level LV1, and in the subsequent step S4413, the ninth special effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. This ninth special effect setting process ends.

Regarding the form switching pattern, when the number of games advances by "1", the prominence level also increases by at least "1 level". In other words, the configuration is such that the event that the prominence level decreases as the game progresses does not occur. However, it is difficult for players to specify which game round the 9th special effect started, and expectations are high that the 9th special effect will continue for as long as possible. .

In addition, there may be multiple prominence levels that can change as the game progresses by one, and such behavior may cause the prominence level to rise all at once, so when the 9th special effect starts Even when the number of reservations is small, it is possible to suitably suppress the player's attention from decreasing.

For example, FIG. 130(a) illustrates a form switching pattern when the final form is at prominence level LV3. In pattern 1, the level is stepped up in the order of protrusion level LV1→protrusion level LV2→protrusion level LV3, and in pattern 2, the protrusion level LV1 is stepped up to the protrusion level LV3 by skipping the protrusion level LV2. In other words, in pattern 1, the corresponding number of holds (excluding holds in progress) is "2", and in pattern 2, the corresponding number of holds (excluding holds in progress) is "1". There is.

FIG. 130(b) illustrates a form switching pattern when the final form is the protrusion level LV4. In pattern 1, the steps are stepped up in order from protrusion level LV1 → protrusion level LV2 → protrusion level LV3 → protrusion level LV4, and in pattern 2, protrusion level LV1 → protrusion level LV2 skips protrusion level LV3 and reaches protrusion level LV4. In pattern 3, the protrusion level LV2 is skipped from the protrusion level LV1, and the protrusion level is stepped up to the protrusion level LV3, and then to the protrusion level LV4. It skips LV2 and protrusion level LV3 and steps up to protrusion level LV4. In other words, in pattern 1, the corresponding number of holds (excluding holds in progress) is "3", and in pattern 2 and pattern 3, the corresponding number of holds (excluding holds in progress) is "2". In pattern 4, the corresponding number of pending operations (excluding pending operations) is "1".

Next, the ninth special performance process (ninth special performance process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 131 and 132. The ninth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(9th special effect processing)
In the process for the ninth special effect, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether the ninth special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the ninth special effect processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the process advances to step S4502. In step S4502, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to the ninth special effect, that is, a game time related to the target suspension that was actually determined in the ninth special effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S4502, the process advances to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S4503, the ninth special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, the process advances to step S4504. In step S4504, it is determined whether or not it is a game session related to mode switching. If a negative determination is made in step S4504, the ninth special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, a form switching process is executed in step S4505, and then the ninth special effect process is ended. In the form switching process of step S4505, the form of the production button device 40 is switched according to the form switching pattern determined in step S4411.

Returning to the explanation of step S4502, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, the process advances to step S4506. In step S4506, the final game round process (final game round process) related to the ninth special performance is executed. The final game reuse process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132.

(Final game recycle processing)
In the final game reuse process, first, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S4601, the process advances to step S4602. In step S4602, it is determined whether the grace period for switching to the final form has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4602, the process advances to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the final game round related to the ninth special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4603, the final game reuse process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, the process advances to step S4604.

In step S4604, a switching grace period setting process is performed. In the following step S4605, form switching processing is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 753 to raise the movable base 741 so that the effect button device 40 assumes a predetermined final form.

Returning to the explanation of step S4602, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, that is, if the switching grace period has elapsed, the process advances to step S4606. In step S4606, it is determined whether it is the operation validation timing to validate the operation of the operation button 721. If a negative determination is made in step S4606, the final game reuse process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4606, the process advances to step S4607. In step S4607, an operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereafter, in step S4608, an operation suggestion start process is executed to suggest the operation of the operation button 721, and this final game reuse process is ended.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message such as “Press!!” for operation suggestions and an extended operation stroke on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

Returning to the explanation of step S4601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, that is, if the operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S4609. In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the operation validity period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4609, the process advances to step S4610.

In step S4610, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S4610 and the final game reuse process ends. If an operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4610, and the process advances to step S4611. In step S4611, operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S4612, an operation corresponding production execution process is performed. In the operation-corresponding performance execution process, a performance that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player is executed. Specifically, the first movable presentation device 300 is driven to perform a light emission presentation using the first movable presentation device 300. In conjunction with this, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blackout effect).

Returning to the explanation of step S4609, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4609, that is, if the operation validity period has elapsed without any operation being performed, the process advances to step S4610. In step S4610, operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In subsequent step S4614, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S4615, an alternative performance execution process is performed, and then the final game reuse process is ended. In the alternative performance, the light emission performance by the first movable performance device 300 and the lights-out performance (blackout performance) of the symbol display device 253 are not executed regardless of the winning result/missing result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 133, supplementary explanation will be given of the flow of the ninth special performance when the ninth special performance (ninth special performance E) is executed. 133(a) to 133(f) are schematic diagrams in which the hold display area NE and the production button device 40 are arranged vertically on the display screen 253a, and in the example shown in FIG. 133, FIG. 133(a) → FIG. 133 The game round progresses in the order of (b)→FIG. 133(c)→FIG. 133(d)→FIG. 133(e)→FIG. 133(f). In addition, in FIG. 133, the hold that triggered the start of the 9th special effect and the hold corresponding to the final game round in the 9th special effect match, and the hold that triggered the start of the 9th special effect coincides with the hold that corresponds to the last game round in the 9th special effect. Although the display mode of the icons is different, the appearance of the actually displayed hold icon is the same as that of other hold icons. Please note that this does not apply if this 9th special effect occurs in duplicate with other hold notice effects, but if the appearance of the hold icon of the relevant hold is changed to a special one that is different from other hold icons. There is also.

When a winning occurs in the actuation port 83a during a game round and the number of reservations increases from "3" to "4", the reservation display area NE of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the fourth in the reservation number display area Da) A hold icon is added to the unit hold display area Da4). This added hold (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding hold) corresponds to a winning result, and the hold related to the current game round and the three preceding holds correspond to a complete loss (operation-compatible effects). does not occur).

If you win the ninth special effect generation lottery for the corresponding hold, an operation corresponding effect will occur in the final phase of the game round related to the corresponding hold, and the form of the effect button device 40 will change at the timing when the hold is acquired. . Specifically, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is switched from protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV1. In conjunction with this, the words "Waiting for Opportunity" are displayed at the top of the display screen 253a as a suggestion of the ninth special effect, and effects are added to the outer circumference of the display screen 253a. These characters and effects of "waiting for an opportunity" are hidden when the ninth special effect ends.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 133, although the newly added hold is the start opportunity of the ninth special effect and the final game, the start opportunity and the final game in the ninth special effect shown in this embodiment are different from each other. times do not necessarily match. Making the target unspecified in this way is an effort to widen the range of estimation of the number of occurrences of morphological changes.

As shown in FIG. 133(b)→FIG. 133(c), when the game time advances by "1", the form of the effect button device 40 also switches from the protruding level LV1 to the protruding level LV2. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 133 (c) → FIG. 133 (d) → FIG. 133 (e) → FIG. It switches in the order of LV3→protrusion level LV4→protrusion level LV5. The prominence level LV5 is maintained until the production button device 40 is operated in the final game round, and is switched to the protrusion level LV0 (first form) by the player's operation or by the elapse of the valid operation period.

Note that the maintenance control of the prominence level is executed from the start of the ninth special performance until the operation validity period of the final game round is set. Even if the operation button 721 is operated during the process, it will automatically return to the latest configuration. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation stroke from becoming short when an operation suggestion is made and the impact at the time of operation from decreasing.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the standby position of the operation button 721 of the production button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 is changed to correspond to the number of stored hold information. There is. In other words, the form of the performance button device 40 changes as the game rounds progress. In this way, by changing the form of the performance button device 40 provided at a position close to the player as the game progresses, it is emphasized that the game is progressing, dramatically increasing the attention to the game. can be improved.

It is preferable to increase the number of standby positions for the operation button 721 in order to achieve diversification. However, if the standby position is set inadvertently, it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the performance button device 40, and there is a concern that this will become a factor that impairs the reliability of the performance button device 40. In this regard, such concerns can be suitably eliminated by setting a plurality of standby positions so as to be lined up in the operating direction as shown in the present embodiment, that is, by limiting the standby positions to positions in the operating stroke.

As shown in this embodiment, by changing the protrusion level so that the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is extended each time the number of preceding holds decreases, the player can control how far the expansion of the operation stroke continues. can attract the attention of Here, since there is an upper limit on the number of hold information that can be stored, there is also a practical upper limit on the expansion of the operation stroke, and the relationship between the number of hold information stored and the protrusion level is will attract increasing attention.

According to the configuration in which the protrusion level is changed at the timing when the hold icon displayed in the hold display area NE shifts, the correlation between the movement of the operation button 721 and the number of hold information can be strengthened. As a result, the performance button device 40 can essentially function as a pending number display section similar to the reservation display area NE, and it is easy to check the progress of the game in a situation where attention is being paid to the performance button device 40. becomes detectable.

<Modification 1>
If the operation button 721 is operated while the ninth special effect is being executed, it is also possible to use the operation as a trigger to end the ninth special effect midway.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the width of the change in the protrusion amount when the protrusion level LV0 → the protrusion level LV1 and the width of the change in the protrusion amount when the protrusion level LV(N) → the protrusion level LV(N+1) (N=1 to 4) are explained. ), but it is also possible to unify these widths.

<Modification 3>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the structure includes both a case in which the ninth special effect is started by a shift in hold and a case in which the ninth special effect is started in response to an addition of hold. , but not limited to this. It is also possible to limit the start trigger to either shifting of a hold or addition of a hold.

<Modification 4>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the form switching pattern in the ninth special performance includes a form switching pattern that skips some forms, but it is also possible to have a structure that does not include these form switching patterns. be.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, when the ninth special effect is executed, at least one stage of change in form occurs each time the game progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a pattern in which the form does not change as the game progresses is added.

<Tenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, each of the first to eighth embodiments described above is configured such that a tenth special effect is executed in which the shape change of the effect button device 40 continues over a plurality of game times. are different in form and composition. The configuration of the tenth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from those embodiments. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134, the setting process for the 10th special effect (10th special effect setting process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The tenth special effect setting process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(10th special effect setting process)
In the 10th special effect setting process, first, in step S4701, the main controller 162 issues a hold command indicating that hold information has been added, or a shift command indicating that hold information has been digested and moving to the next game round. Determine whether any is being received. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, the tenth special effect setting process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, the process advances to step S4702. In step S4702, it is determined whether the tenth special effect has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether a tenth special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4702, the tenth special effect setting process is directly ended. If a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process advances to step S4703.

In step S4703, it is determined whether or not a performance corresponding to an operation using the performance button device 40 is scheduled to be executed in the current game round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4703, the tenth special effect setting process is directly ended. If a negative determination is made in step S4703, the process advances to step S4704. In step S4704, one target reservation among the currently stored reservations is tentatively determined. In this provisional determination, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold corresponding to the reach indication, and if there are multiple holds corresponding to the reach indication, one hold from among the multiple holds is selected as the 10th special hold. Tentatively decided as a candidate for production. In this determination, a hold with a long variable display time is given preferential treatment so that it is more likely to be subject to provisional determination than a hold with a short variable display time.

If there is no hold that is subject to tentative determination, a negative determination is made in step S4705, and the tenth special effect setting process is ended. If there is a reservation subject to tentative determination, an affirmative determination is made in step S4705 and the process advances to step S4706.

In step S4706, it is determined whether all the reservations preceding the reservation that is the target of the tentative determination correspond to complete failures (results of failures that do not correspond to reach display). If a negative determination is made in step S4706, the tenth special effect setting process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, a tenth special effect lottery process is executed in step S4707. By winning this lottery process, the tentative decision will be changed to the start confirmation (final decision).

If the start of the 10th special effect is confirmed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4708 and the process advances to step S4709. In step S4709, the maximum number of steps up to the determined target suspension is specified. Specifically, the number of holds that exist between the determined target hold and the hold related to the current game round is specified.

In the following step S4710, it is determined which form the initial form of the production button device 40 should be based on the pending information (C1, C2, C3, CS) that was subject to the above-mentioned tentative determination. In the production button device 40 in this embodiment, protrusion levels LV0 to LV5 are provided as the protrusion levels of the operation button 721, and protrusion level LV1 < protrusion level LV2 < protrusion level LV3 < protrusion level LV4 < protrusion. They are differentiated so that the amount of protrusion increases in the order of level LV5. Note that the difference in protrusion amount at each protrusion level is basically set to be the same, but the difference in protrusion amount between protrusion level LV0 and protrusion level LV1 is different from the difference between other protrusion levels. differentiated to be larger than Although details will be described later, in the 10th special performance, an operation suggestion of the operation button 721 will occur in the corresponding game round. At this time, the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 is the protrusion level LV1, but this is a contrivance to make clear the difference from the first embodiment, which is the protrusion level LV0.

After determining the initial form in step S4710, the process advances to step S4711. In step S4711, a form switching process is executed to switch the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 to the initial form determined in step S4710. Thereafter, in step S4712, the tenth special effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the tenth special effect setting process is ended.

The form switching pattern in the tenth special performance is defined as follows, unlike the ninth special performance. That is, the configuration is such that when the number of games advances by "1", the outstanding level also decreases by "1 level". In other words, the number of reservations and the prominence level are completely linked, and it is possible to identify which reservation the tenth special effect is targeting from the initial form.

Next, the process for the 10th special effect (process for the 10th special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 135. The tenth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(10th special effect processing)
In the process for the tenth special effect, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the tenth special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, the tenth special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, the process advances to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to the 10th special effect, that is, a game time related to the target reservation that was actually determined in the above-mentioned 10th special effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the process advances to step S4803.

In step S4803, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S4803, the tenth special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, the process advances to step S4804, and after executing the form switching process, the tenth special effect process ends. In the form switching process of step S4804, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched so that the protrusion level is lowered by "1 level".

Returning to the explanation of step S4802, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, the process advances to step S4806. In step S4806, the final game round process (final game round process) related to the 10th special effect is executed. The final game reuse process will be explained below.

(Final game recycle processing)
In the final game reuse process, first, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If the operation is within the valid period, it is determined whether or not the grace period for mode switching in the last game round has passed. If it is not the timing at which the grace period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for the final game round related to the tenth special effect. If it is not the start timing of the final game round, the final game round process is ended. If it is the start timing of the final game round, the process of setting the grace period for switching the form change and the process of changing the form of the performance button device 40 described above are executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 753 to lower the movable base 741 so that the effect button device 40 reaches the final protrusion level LV1.

On the other hand, if the above-described grace period for mode switching has elapsed, it is determined whether or not it is the operation validation timing to validate the operation of the operation button 721. If it is not the operation validation timing, the final game reuse process is ended as it is. If it is the operation valid timing, the operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereafter, an operation suggestion start process is executed to suggest the operation of the operation button 721, and this final game reuse process is ended.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message such as “Press!!” for operation suggestions and an extended operation stroke on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

On the other hand, if the operation is still valid, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has expired. If the timing has not elapsed during the valid operation period, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If no operation has been performed, the final game reuse process is ended. If an operation is being performed, operation acceptance notification processing and suggestion termination processing are executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and displays a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

Subsequently, operation corresponding performance execution processing is performed. In the operation-corresponding performance execution process, a performance that clearly shows the game result of the current game round to the player is executed. Specifically, the first movable presentation device 300 is driven to perform a light emission presentation using the first movable presentation device 300. In conjunction with this, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blackout effect).

Here, if the operation validity period is still within the operation validity period but the operation validity period has elapsed, that is, if the operation validity period has elapsed without any operation being performed, the operation suggestion termination process is executed. In the suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

Subsequently, a switching process for switching the production button device 40 to the first mode is executed. Thereafter, after performing the execution process of the alternative performance, the present final game circulation process is ended. In the alternative performance, the light emission performance by the first movable performance device 300 and the lights-out performance (blackout performance) of the symbol display device 253 are not executed regardless of the winning result/missing result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the tenth special effect when the tenth special effect is executed. 136(a) to 136(f) are schematic diagrams in which the hold display area NE and the production button device 40 are arranged vertically on the display screen 253a, and in the example shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 136(a) → FIG. 136 The game round progresses in the order of (b)→FIG. 136(c)→FIG. 136(d)→FIG. 136(e)→FIG. 136(f). In addition, in FIG. 136, the hold that triggered the start of the 10th special performance is the same as the hold corresponding to the final game round in the 10th special performance, and the hold that triggered the start of the 10th special performance coincides with the hold that corresponds to the last game round in the 10th special performance. Although the display mode of the icons is different, the appearance of the actually displayed hold icon is the same as that of other hold icons. Please note that this does not apply if this 10th special effect occurs in duplicate with other hold notice effects, and if the appearance of the hold icon of the relevant hold is changed to a special one that is different from other hold icons. There is also.

When a winning occurs in the actuation port 83a during a game round and the number of reservations increases from "3" to "4", the reservation display area NE of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the fourth in the reservation number display area Da) A hold icon is added to the unit hold display area Da4). This added hold (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding hold) corresponds to a winning result, and the hold related to the current game round and the three preceding holds correspond to a complete loss (operation-compatible effects). does not occur).

If you win the 10th special effect generation lottery for the corresponding hold, an operation corresponding effect will occur in the final phase of the game round related to the corresponding hold, and the form of the effect button device 40 will change at the timing when the hold is acquired. . Specifically, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is switched from protrusion level LV0 to protrusion level LV5. In conjunction with this, the words "Waiting for Opportunity" are displayed at the top of the display screen 253a as a suggestion of the 10th special effect, and effects are added to the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. These characters and effects of "waiting for an opportunity" are hidden when the 10th special effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 136(b)→FIG. 136(c), when the game time advances by "1", the form of the effect button device 40 also switches from the protruding level LV5 to the protruding level LV4. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 136 (c) → FIG. 136 (d) → FIG. 136 (e) → FIG. It switches in the order of LV3 → protrusion level LV2 → protrusion level LV1. The prominence level LV1 is maintained until the production button device 40 is operated in the final game round, and is switched to the protrusion level LV0 (first form) by the player's operation or by the elapse of the valid operation period.

Note that the maintenance control of the prominence level is executed from the start of the 10th special performance until the operation validity period of the final game round is set. Even if the operation button 721 is operated during the process, it will automatically return to the latest configuration. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation stroke from becoming short when an operation suggestion is made and the impact at the time of operation from decreasing.

As shown in this embodiment, by changing the protrusion level by reducing the operation stroke of the operation button 721 each time the number of preceding hold information decreases, it is possible to control how long the reduction in the operation stroke lasts. can attract people's attention. Here, since there is an upper limit on the number of hold information that can be stored, there is also a practical lower limit on the reduction of the operation stroke, and the relationship between the number of hold information stored and the prominence level is will attract increasing attention.

<Modification 1>
According to the tenth embodiment, during the tenth special performance, the protrusion level is lowered by a certain level as the game progresses, but it is denied that the protrusion level is changed each time. It's not something you do. For example, there may be cases in which the level drops by "1 level", cases in which it descends by "2 levels", cases in which it descends by "3 levels", and cases in which it descends by "4 levels".

<Modification 2>
According to the tenth embodiment, during the tenth special performance, the protrusion level is always lowered as the game rounds progress, but a pattern is provided in which the protrusion level is not effective in some game rounds. It is also possible.

<Modification 3>
According to the tenth embodiment described above, in the final game round (when an operation is suggested) in the tenth special performance, the protrusion level of the production button device 40 is specified to be the protrusion level LV1, but this is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done. The prominence level in the final game round (when the operation is suggested) may be set to a value other than the protrusion level LV1. For example, the protrusion level LV0 may be used, or the protrusion level LV2 or higher may be used.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of candidates for the outstanding level in the final game round, and to create a configuration in which the level of expectation for transition to the special game state differs depending on the candidates. For example, differences may be set in the expectations so that the salient level in the final game round becomes higher in the order of salient level LV0 < salient level LV1 < salient level LV2 < salient level LV3 < salient level LV4 < salient level LV5.

<Eleventh embodiment>
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of forms in which the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is different. The present embodiment is characterized by an eleventh special performance that is an operation-compatible performance that utilizes the form switching function of the performance button device 40.

The 11th special effect creates a tactile difference by varying the magnitude of the operation resistance (resistance torque) when the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion after the form of the effect button device 40 is set to the second form. These effects are roughly divided into the 11th special effect A, which is set so that the operating resistance is relatively small, and the 11th special effect B, which is set so that the operating resistance is relatively large. (See schematic diagram in FIG. 137(a)).

When the production button device 40 switches to the second mode, the button unit 720 (movable base 741) is held at the maximum protrusion position (upper limit position) by the static torque (holding torque) of the stepping motor 753. As described in the other embodiments, the static torque of the stepping motor 753 is sufficiently large compared to the biasing force of the coil spring 745 that supports the operation button 721. Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in a situation where the production button device 40 is in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed and the operation button 721 is lowered, and the operation button 721 After the button 721 contacts the movable base 741, the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together against the resistance torque of the stepping motor 753.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 137(a), in the section (first detection position CP1 to thirteenth detection position CP13) where the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together, the resistance torque is It is not a variable range of resistance torque, but is roughly divided into a variable range of resistance torque (4th detection position CP4 to 13th detection position CP13) and a non-variable range (1st detection position CP1 to 4th detection position CP4). be done. Although the details will be described later, this non-variable section is a speed detection section in which the displacement speed of the operation button 721 is detected, and a signal is generated in the stepping motor 753 according to the speed detected in this speed detection section. The configuration is such that the resistance torque is corrected. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 138 to 140, the eleventh special performance process (eleventh special performance process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described. The eleventh special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(11th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 138, in the process for the 11th special effect, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the game round corresponds to the 11th special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the eleventh special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, the process advances to step S4902. In step S4902, an 11th special effect main process is executed, and in the following step S4903, a torque variable process is executed. Details of these eleventh special effect main processing and torque variable processing will be described later.

In step S4904, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 is still valid. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the process advances to step S4905. In step S4905, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process advances to step S4906, and it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If it is not the timing to start switching to the second mode, a negative determination is made in step S4906, and the eleventh special effect process is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, the process advances to step S4907.

In step S4907, switching processing to the second mode is executed. Specifically, outputting a drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is started. Thereafter, in step S4908, a switching grace period setting process is executed, and the eleventh special effect process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S4905, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4905, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S4909. In step S4909, processing for setting the operation validity period is executed. In the following step S4910, operation suggestion start processing is executed.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a message such as “Press!!” for operation suggestions and an extended operation stroke on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S4911, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is ended, and the movable base 741 (operation button 721) is stopped. More specifically, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched from driving torque to static torque. As a result, when operating the operation button 721, a resistance torque that obstructs the operation is generated, but even if the movable base 741 descends against the resistance torque, returning to the position of the movable base 741 is avoided. The Rukoto. In other words, the active operation of the operation button 721 ends by switching from the driving torque to the static torque.

In the following step S4912, it is determined whether the current 11th special performance corresponds to the 11th special performance B. If a negative determination is made in step S4912, the eleventh special effect processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4912, the variable torque flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and then the eleventh special effect processing is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S4904, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4904, that is, if the operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S4914. In step S4914, it is determined whether it is the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4914, the process advances to step S4915. In step S4915, based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4915, the process advances to step S4916.

Note that in this embodiment, the operation itself is effectively accepted based on reaching the first detection position CP1, and whether or not an operation response effect occurs depending on the presence or absence of further pressing operations is determined. There is no difference. However, by continuing the operation even after reaching the first detection position CP1, the player will notice that the current performance is the 11th special performance A (low expectations) and the 11th special performance B (high expectations) due to the difference in operational resistance. ) can be inferred.

In step S4916, operation suggestion partial termination processing is executed. In the operation suggestion partial termination process, an operation suggestion partial termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion partial end command, and ends the display with the indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Note that messages for suggesting operations and patterns imitating buttons continue to be displayed.

In the subsequent step S4917, an interlocking flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and in step S4918, after executing a standby time setting process, the eleventh special effect process is ended. In the standby time setting process, a predetermined value (equivalent to 1 sec) is set in a standby counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914. The value of this standby counter is decremented by 1 each time the eleventh special effect process is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S4914, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4914, that is, if the operation validity period has elapsed, the process advances to step S4919. In step S4919, operation suggestion termination processing is executed. In the operation suggestion termination process, an operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the button pattern, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

Thereafter, in step S4920, the switching process to the first form is executed, and the eleventh special effect process ends. Regarding the eleventh special performance shown in this embodiment, the third movable performance device 803 is configured to operate when the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion, but the operation button 721 is not operated within the valid period. If not, the operation of the third movable presentation device 803 will be avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the eleventh special effect main process of step S4902 (see FIG. 138) will be described.

(11th special effect main process)
In the eleventh special effect main process, first, in step S5001, it is determined whether the third movable effect device 803 is in operation. If a negative determination is made in step S5001, the process advances to step S5002. In step S5002, it is determined whether the interlocking flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5002, the eleventh special effect main process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5002, the process advances to step S5003. In step S5003, it is determined whether or not the waiting period set in step S4918 has elapsed with reference to the value of the standby counter. If a negative determination is made in step S5003, position specifying processing is executed in step S5004. Specifically, the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741) is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. Specifically, it is specified which one of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 is located. If the button unit 720 has not reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, the eleventh special effect main process is ended. If the thirteenth detection position CP13 has been reached, the process advances to step S5006.

In step S5006, the operation process of the third movable presentation device 803 is executed. As a result, the movable decorative body of the third movable presentation device 803 emits light and descends from the standby position to the presentation position. Thereafter, in step S5007, the interlocking flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and in step S5008, an active flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. After executing the operation suggestion complete termination process in step S5009, the eleventh special effect main process is terminated. In the operation suggestion complete termination process, an operation suggestion complete termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion complete termination command, and hides the operation suggestion message and the pattern imitating the button that have been continuously displayed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5003, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5003, that is, if the waiting period has elapsed, after executing each process of steps S5006 to S5009, the eleventh special effect main process end. That is, in the eleventh special performance shown in this embodiment, the operation condition is satisfied when the operation button 721 is pushed to the first detection position CP1 according to the operation suggestion, and when the thirteenth detection position CP13 has not been reached, The third movable presentation device 803 is configured to operate after the waiting period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5001, that is, if the third movable presentation device 803 is in operation (if the in-operation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 933 of the RAM 914) If so, the process advances to step S5010. In step S5010, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the eleventh special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S5010, the eleventh special effect main process is immediately ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5010, the eleventh special effect end process is executed in step S5011, and then the eleventh special effect main process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the torque variable processing in step S4903 (see FIG. 138) will be described.

(Torque variable processing)
In the torque variable processing, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether a torque variable flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the present torque variable processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process advances to step S5102. In step S5102, a process for specifying the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741) is executed. Specifically, based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 79, it is determined in which of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 the button unit 720 is located.

In the following step S5103, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741). If a negative determination is made in step S5103, the present torque variable processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the process advances to step S5104. In step S5104, it is determined whether a detection condition for the displacement speed of the button unit 720, in other words, the operation speed is satisfied. Specifically, the detection condition is satisfied when the button unit 720 passes between the first detection position CP1 and the fourth detection position CP4. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, speed correction value determination processing is performed in step S5105. The speed correction value determination process is a process of determining a correction value for correcting the magnitude of the resistance torque according to the detected operation speed.

After that, it is determined in step S5106 whether or not a correction value has been set, and if the correction value has not been set, the resistance torque first setting process is executed in step S5107, and then the main torque variable process is executed. finish. If a correction value has been set, the resistance torque second setting process is executed in step S5108, and then the main torque variable process is ended.

The first resistance torque setting process corresponds to the speed detection section, and basically the resistance torque is set so that the resistance torque is constant, and the stepping motor 753 is controlled based on this set resistance torque. be done. On the other hand, the second resistance torque setting process corresponds to outside the speed detection area, and the resistance torque is specified to increase smoothly from the fourth detection position CP4 to the thirteenth detection position CP13. . Here, by setting the above-mentioned correction value, a torque curve indicating a pattern of increase in torque is changed. Hereinafter, the relationship among the position (protrusion amount) of the operation button 721, detection speed, and resistance torque will be supplementarily explained with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 141.

As shown in FIG. 141, the magnitude of the resistance torque is defined regardless of the operating speed until the speed detection section is passed. In this speed detection section, there is no difference in the resistance torque between the 11th special performance A and the 11th special performance B, and it is difficult to identify which performance is being performed from the resistance (tactile sensation) from the operation button 721. ing.

After passing through the speed detection section, the magnitude of the resistance torque is adjusted according to the speed detected when passing through the speed detection section. Specifically, a correction value is calculated from the detected speed in the speed detection section, and the resistance torque (target value) to be generated is changed based on this correction value. Specifically, when the detected speed is lower than the reference speed, the resistance torque becomes smaller than the reference resistance torque, and when the detected speed is higher than the reference speed, the resistance torque becomes larger than the reference torque. It is corrected to The relationship between the detected speed and the resistance torque is determined by referring to a correction value determination map stored in the ROM 913.

As shown in this embodiment, when the operation button 721 (button unit 720) is displaced in the operation direction, the position of the operation button 721 in the operation direction is specified, and the operation resistance is varied based on the specified position. With this configuration, the tactile changes that occur in the hand that operates the operation button 721 enable novel performances that have not been seen before.

For transformation type performance button devices, occurrence of transformation (second form) is often an opportunity. Due to these circumstances, in the second embodiment, there is a high possibility that the operation button 721 will be operated vigorously. In such an operation, there is a concern that the impact generated on the hand or the effect button device 40 will be large. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the operation resistance is amplified so that the resistance becomes larger on the back side in the operation direction, the shock at the time of operation is alleviated, and the player's hand or the production button This can contribute to the protection of the device 40.

As for a hardened type performance button device, if the hardness is drastically changed on the back side, there is a high possibility that the player will be mistaken as having reached the innermost position. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the increase rate of the operating resistance is greater on the back side than on the front side, as shown in this embodiment, the operating resistance will change smoothly, suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. can. Further, it is preferable to configure the operating resistance so that the rate of increase is greater on the rear side than on the front side, in order to reduce the impact when the operation button 721 is operated with force.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in reaching the operation detection position itself due to the increase in the operation resistance, while leaving room for enjoying the change in the operation resistance of operation detection.

<Twelfth embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the performance button device 40 is designed to improve the convenience of the player. The invention will be described below with reference to FIG. 142, focusing on the configuration that is different from each of the embodiments described above. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40. In addition, please refer to the first embodiment regarding the basic structure etc. of the performance button device 40.

This embodiment is configured so that the player can arbitrarily change the protrusion level of the basic effect button device 40. Specifically, by driving the stepping motor 753 and adjusting the height position of the movable base 741, the height can be changed to a total of 12 levels from the protrusion level LV0 to the protrusion level LV11. Note that the protrusion level LV11 is defined so that the operation button 721 is below the maximum protrusion position in order to leave room for expansion in the operation stroke of the operation button 721.

Considering the amount of eye movement from the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 and the ease with which the hand can be placed, the height position of the operation button 721 (operation surface) may be determined depending on the player's physical differences, etc. It may be different. Being able to change the height position as described above can contribute to improving convenience for players.

Here, the basic form of the production button device 40 is a form in which the production button device 40 is maintained (residing) except during production to extend the operation stroke of the operation button 721, and when extending the operation stroke. , the basic mode is switched to another mode by raising the operation button 721. Furthermore, it can be said that the basic form is the form that is maintained for the longest period at least in the first normal gaming state.

Hereinafter, the height position adjustment process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 in order to realize the height adjustment described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 143. The height position adjustment process is a process executed as part of the regular process in the first normal game state.

(Height position adjustment process)
In the height position adjustment process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether a height position adjustment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process advances to step S5202. In step S5202, it is determined whether or not a game is being played. Specifically, if the game is in progress or a game ball firing operation is being performed, it is determined that the game is in progress; if the game is not in a game round and the game ball firing operation is not being performed, the game is determined to be in progress. It is determined that the player is not playing a game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the main height position adjustment process is immediately ended. If a negative determination is made in step S5202, the process advances to step S5203. In step S5203, it is determined whether a height position adjustment start operation has been performed. Specifically, a cross key 41 (see FIG. 1) is provided on the upper bulge portion 28 of the front door frame 14 along with a production button device 40. This cross key 41 is connected to a notification/performance control device 143, and the operation information from the cross key 41 is input to the notification/performance control device 143. In the determination process of step S5203, it is determined based on the operation information from the cross key 41 whether or not an operation for starting height position adjustment (specifically, a long press operation of the center button of the cross key 41) has been performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5203, the main height position adjustment process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, the process advances to step S5204. In step S5204, it is determined whether the current protrusion level is the protrusion level LV0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, an operation confirmation process is executed in step S5205. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is operated within a range where the protrusion level (height position) of the operation button 721 does not change (see FIG. 53), and it is confirmed whether the stepping motor 753 is operating normally.

If it is confirmed that the stepping motor 753 is operating normally, an affirmative determination is made in step S5206 and the process advances to step S5207. In step S5207, a height position adjustment flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the main height position adjustment process is ended. Further, even when a negative determination is made in step S5204, the height position adjustment flag is set in step S5207, and the main height position adjustment process is ended.

Note that if the stepping motor 753 is not operating normally, that is, if the height position adjustment function cannot be performed well, a negative determination is made in step S5205 and the height position adjustment process is immediately terminated. do.

Returning to the explanation of step S5201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, that is, if the height position adjustment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process advances to step S5208. In step S5208, it is determined whether a game round has started. Specifically, it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S5208, the process advances to step S5209.

In step S5209, it is determined whether the height position is being changed or the height position is being changed by the player pressing the operation button 721 or the like. If a negative determination is made in step S5209, the process advances to step S5210. In step S5210, it is determined whether the timing has elapsed after the standby reference period. In the height position adjustment mode shown in this embodiment, after the protrusion level is changed, the standby standard period (5 seconds) is maintained without any height position adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 41). The height position adjustment mode is configured to end when the height position adjustment mode has elapsed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5210, the process advances to step S5211. In step S5211, it is determined whether a height position adjustment operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S5211, the main height position adjustment process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S52111, the drive control process is executed in step S5212, and then the main height position adjustment process is ended.

In the drive control process of step S5212, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to raise the protrusion level by "1" when the upper button of the cross key 41 is operated, and when the lower button of the cross key 41 is operated, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to raise the protrusion level by "1". Then, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to lower the protrusion level by "1". Furthermore, if the protrusion level has changed as a result of the player operating the operation button 721 on a trial basis, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to return to the protrusion level before the change.

Returning to the explanation of step S5210, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5210, that is, if the standby reference period has elapsed without any adjustment operation being performed, the process advances to step S5215. In step S5215, it is determined whether the protrusion level is other than protrusion level LV0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5215, the current height position (protrusion level) is determined and stored as a reference position in step S5216. In the subsequent step S5217, a position control flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and in step S5218, adjustment completion notification processing is executed. This clearly indicates to the player that the adjustment of the height position has been completed. Thereafter, in step S5219, the height position adjustment flag is cleared, and the height position adjustment process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S5215, each process in steps S5218 and S5219 is executed, and then the main height position adjustment process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S5209, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5209, that is, if the height position is being changed or the height position is changing due to the player pressing the operation button 721, etc. If it is inside, the process advances to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether the position (projection level) specified by the operation of the cross key 41 has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S521, the main height position adjustment process is directly ended in order to continue driving control of the stepping motor 753. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5213, the stationary control process is executed in step S5214, and then the main height position adjustment process is ended. By executing this process, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to static torque.

Returning to the explanation of step S5208, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, that is, if it is the start timing of the game round, a forced termination process is executed in step S5220, and then the main height position adjustment process is ended. do. In this forced termination process, various flags for height position adjustment are erased, and the protrusion level is forcibly switched to the protrusion level LV0.

As already explained, the static torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the player operates the operation button 721, the coil spring 745 deforms first. The operation button 721 is configured to descend. However, if the operation is performed forcefully, the operation force exceeds the static torque and the button unit 720 (movable base 741) may descend. If a positional deviation occurs in this manner, it has a function of automatically returning to the position before the deviation (the reference position). The automatic return process (position control process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/information/performance control device 143 will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 144. The position control process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Position control processing)
In the position control process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether the position control flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5301, the present position control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, the process advances to step S5302. In step S5302, it is determined whether a return operation to the reference position is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, the process advances to step S5303.

In step S5303, the current height position of the button unit 720 (movable base 741) is specified based on information from the rotary encoder 792. In the following step S5304, it is determined whether the specified current height position is out of the reference position. If a negative determination is made in step S5304, the present position control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the return control process is executed in step S5305, and then the present position control process is ended. In the return control process, the stepping motor 753 is driven to move the button unit 720 toward the reference position.

Returning to the explanation of step S5302, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, that is, if the return operation to the reference position is in progress, the process advances to step S5306. In step S5306, it is determined whether the depression is complete. That is, it is determined whether the current height position and the reference position match. If a negative determination is made in step S5306, the present position control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5306, the process advances to step S5307. In step S5307, standstill control processing is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched from driving torque to static torque.

Thereafter, in step S5308, the execution frequency of return control is calculated. That is, how long the return control in step S5305 has been executed per unit time (for example, one hour) is calculated from past cumulative information. Then, in step S5309, torque correction processing is executed based on the calculation result of step S5308. In the torque correction process, when the execution frequency of the return control is higher than the determination reference frequency, a process is performed to increase the resistance torque (driving torque or static torque) generated by the stepping motor 753. It is specified that as the frequency of execution of the return control increases, the amount of increase in the resistance torque also increases.

As described in detail above, in this embodiment, convenience is improved by allowing the player to arbitrarily change the height position (protrusion level) of the performance button device 40. Here, no matter how the height position is adjusted, the stroke until the operation of the operation button 721 is detected by the detection sensor 791 will be constant (about 10 mm), and as a result of adjusting the height position, the stroke will be constant (approximately 10 mm). The stroke does not increase unnecessarily (see X0, X5, and X11 in FIG. 145). This is preferable in order to increase satisfaction with the height position adjustment function.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the maximum protrusion position is excluded from the adjustment range, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration that includes the maximum protrusion position.

<Modification 2>
The condition for forced termination may be the start of a game round. However, in this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which no operation-responsive effects (particularly operation-responsive effects related to changing the operation stroke) are generated for the game round that triggered the forced termination.

<Modification 3>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 in the basic form can be changed by operating the cross key 41, but there is no need to provide a separate operation section for adjustment. For example, when the operation button 721 is pressed for a long time during non-gaming, it is also possible to configure the height position adjustment to be executed based on the operation. More specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode is entered in which the height position is adjusted by a long press operation, and thereafter, the protrusion level is changed by one step each time the operation button 721 is operated.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of forms in which the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is different. The present embodiment is characterized by a 12th special effect, which is an operation-compatible effect using the form switching function of the effect button device 40.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 146, the twelfth special effect is a twelfth special effect in which the third movable effect device 803 operates based on a specific single operation after the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form. Production A and continuous operation (repeated operation) after switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form → 12th special production B in which the third movable production device 803 operates based on a specific single operation Broadly classified. Furthermore, regarding the 12th special performance A and the 12th special performance B, in the 12th special performance A, the emitting color of the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 is limited to white, and in the 12th special performance B, the The difference is that the emitted light color of the movable decorative body of the three movable presentation devices 803 can change from white to blue or red based on repeated operations. In addition, when comparing the 12th special performance A and the 12th special performance B, the 12th special performance B has a higher expectation of transitioning to the special game state, and the luminous color of the movable decoration is white < A difference is made so that the expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state increases in the order of blue < red.

Hereinafter, the configuration related to the twelfth special effect will be explained, focusing on the differences from each of the above embodiments. First, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 147 to 150, the processing for the 12th special effect (processing for the 12th special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The twelfth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(12th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 147, in the process for the twelfth special performance, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to the twelfth special performance. If a negative determination is made in step S5401, the twelfth special effect processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, the process advances to step S5402.

In step S54, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the first half part in the twelfth special performance. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the process advances to step S5403, and a process for starting a guiding performance that urges the player's attention to the performance button device 40 is executed. In the guidance performance start process, the speaker unit 27 starts outputting a sound effect for switching to the second mode, and outputs a guidance performance command to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for guidance performance on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 based on receiving the guidance performance command. The video for guidance performance is an animation video in which the performance button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. In addition, in the guidance performance start process of step S5403, the third movable performance device 803 is switched from a light-off state to a lighting state or a blinking state.

After executing the process in step S5403, or if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the process advances to step S5404. In step S5404, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the process for the first half part is executed in step S5405, and then the process for the twelfth special effect is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S5404, the process for the second half part is executed in step S5406, and then the process for the twelfth special effect is ended.

(Processing for the first half part)
As shown in FIG. 114, in the first half part processing, first, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S5501, the process advances to step S5502. In step S5502, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the switching grace period for switching the production button device 40 to the second mode has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the process advances to step S5503. In step S5503, it is determined whether it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S5503, the process for the first half of this process is directly ended.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5503, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the second form in step S5504. Thereafter, in step S5505, a switching grace period setting process is executed, and the process for the first half part ends. The period required for switching the production button device 40 from the first form to the second form is 0.5 sec. The switching grace period is set to be longer than this required period. Note that the guidance performance described above will be completed at the timing when the grace period has elapsed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5502, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, that is, if the grace period for switching to the second mode has elapsed, the process advances to step S5506. In step S5506, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the answer is affirmative in step S5506, the process advances to step S5507. In step S5507, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to either the 12th special performance A or the 12th special performance B. If the twelfth special effect A is supported, an affirmative determination is made in step S5507 and the process proceeds to step S5508.

In step S5508, a valid period setting process for a specific single operation is performed, and in step S5509, a process for starting a suggestion for a specific single operation is executed. In the specific single operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and the display control device 142 is given an operation suggestion. Outputs the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, a message such as “One hit!!” for operation suggestion is displayed in the second form on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends and the operation suggestion begins.

In the following step S5510, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the generated torque is switched from the drive torque to the static torque. Thereafter, in step S5511, the second half part shift flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the first half part processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5507, if the current game round corresponds to the 12th special effect B, a negative determination is made in step S507 and the process proceeds to step S5512. In step S5512, a process for setting a valid period of repeated operations is performed. This validity period is specified to be longer than the validity period of the specific single operation. In the following step S5513, a process for starting the suggestion of repeated operations is executed. In the process of starting the suggestion of repeated operations, the speaker section 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "hit the button repeatedly"), and the display control device 142 is instructed to perform the operation. Outputs the suggested start command. Based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 displays a second form of message such as “Continuous Hit!!” for operation suggestions on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends and the operation suggestion begins. Furthermore, an operation indicator whose display mode changes depending on the number of times the operation button 721 is operated is displayed on the display screen 253a.

In the following step S5514, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the generated torque is switched from the drive torque to the static torque. Here, the static torque set in step S5514 is specified to be larger than the static torque set in step S5511. This prevents the movable base 741 from sinking when repeated hits are performed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5506, if a negative determination is made in step S5506, that is, if the switching to the second form is not completed within the grace period, the process advances to step S5515, and the switching to the first form is performed. Execute processing. In other words, the switching to the second mode is canceled.

Thereafter, in step S5516, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the process for the first half part ends. Through the alternative performance execution process, an alternative performance that does not correspond to the operation of the performance button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S5501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5501, that is, if the continuous operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S5517, and the process for continuous operation is executed. The continuous operation process will be described below with reference to FIG. 149.

(Processing for continuous operation)
In the process for repeated operations, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether the validity period of the repeated operations has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5601, the process advances to step S5602. In step S5602, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S5602, the present continuous operation processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5602, the process advances to step S5603.

In step S5603, operation reception notification processing is executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted, and an operation acceptance command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 changes the display mode of the operation indicator based on receiving the operation acceptance command for the continuous operation.

In the following step S5604, it is determined whether the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the change reference number of times. In this embodiment, when it is decided to perform the 12th special effect B at the start of a game round, the number of operations (change reference number) that triggers the change of the light emitting color of the third movable effect device 803 and the continuous operation are determined. The number of operations that triggers completion (termination reference number of times) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5604, the process advances to step S5605, and a light emitting color change control process is executed to change the light emitting color of the third movable presentation device 803 (more specifically, the movable decoration).

After executing the change process in step S5606, or if a negative determination is made in step S5604, the process advances to step S5606. In step S5606, it is determined whether the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the end reference number of times. If a negative determination is made in step S5606, the present continuous operation processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, the process advances to step S5607.

In step S5607, a repeated operation completion display execution process is performed, and in the subsequent step S5608, a repeated operation suggestion termination process is performed. As a result, instead of the message for suggesting an operation on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a message indicating that the repeated operation has been completed (for example, the words "operation completed") is displayed. After that, the message is hidden along with a button-like pattern and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

After executing the process in step S5608, the process advances to step S5609. In step S5609, a continuous operation completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. In the following step S5610, a transition flag for the second half part is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process advances to step S5611. In step S5611, a delay period is set in the delay timer counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and this continuous operation processing is ended.

Regarding the effect button device 40 shown in this embodiment, the holding torque (resistance torque) of the stepping motor 753 in the second mode is set to be sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745. . Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in the second embodiment, the coil spring 745 is first compressed, thereby allowing the operation button 721 to descend. Here, after the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position and reaches the movable base 741, the operation force exceeds the above-mentioned holding torque, so that the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are lowered together. becomes. In this way, when the movable base 741 itself is lowered, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to return the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, but this takes a certain amount of time. In this way, the second form of the production button device 40 is not a completely fixed form and is configured to take some time to return to the second form, so when moving from continuous operation to specific operation. In this case, the delay timer counter is used to buy time for returning the effect button device 40 to the second mode. In other words, the value set in the delay timer counter in step S5611 is defined to be longer than the time required to switch from the first mode to the second mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S5601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, that is, if the validity period of the repeated operation has elapsed, the process advances to step S5612. In step S5612, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated at least once during the validity period. If a negative determination is made in step S5612, the process advances to step S5613, and a process for terminating the suggestion of repeated operations is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S5614, switching processing to the first mode is executed. After that, in step S5615, an alternative effect is executed, and then the main continuous operation operation process is ended. In the alternative performance, the linked performance by the third movable performance device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/miss result or the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5612, that is, if the operation button 721 has been operated at least once, an affirmative determination is made in step S5612 and the process proceeds to step S5607, where each process of steps S5607 to S5611 is executed. After that, this continuous operation process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second half part processing will be described.

(Processing for the second half)
In the second half part processing, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether the specific single operation is within the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process advances to step S5702. In step S5702, it is determined whether the above-described repeated operation completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If a negative determination is made in step S5702, the process for the second half of the main part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the process advances to step S5703.

In step S5703, it is determined whether the value of the delay timer counter set in step S5611 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S5703, the second half part processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5703, the process advances to step S5704.

In step S5704, a valid period setting process for a specific single operation is performed, and in the following step S5705, a specific single operation suggestion start process is executed. In the specific single operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting the operation (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and the display control device 142 is given an operation suggestion. Outputs the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on receiving the operation suggestion start command, a message such as “One hit!!” for operation suggestion is displayed in the second form on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display a symbol imitating the current button and a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period. In other words, as the grace period elapses, the above-mentioned guidance performance ends and the operation suggestion begins.

In the following step S5706, the static torque of the stepping motor 753 is reduced. In other words, switching from static torque (large) to static torque (small). Thereafter, in step S5707, the repeated operation completion flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process for the second half of the book ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5701, that is, if the specific single operation is within the valid period, the process advances to step S5708. In step S5708, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the valid period of the specific single operation. If a negative determination is made in step S5708, the process advances to step S5709. In step S5709, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791. If a negative determination is made in step S5709, the process for the second half of the main part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5709, the process advances to step S5710.

In step S5710, a specific single operation acceptance notification process is executed, and in step S5711, a specific single operation suggestion termination process is executed. In the reception notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion termination process, a specific single operation suggestion termination command is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on receiving the suggestion end command, and displays a message for suggesting an operation, a picture for suggesting a button indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period. Terminate it.

In the following step S5712, a performance execution process corresponding to a specific single operation is performed. In the production execution process corresponding to a specific single operation, the third movable production device 803 is moved toward the center of the display screen 253a while being maintained in a lighting state or a blinking state, and the movable decoration of the third movable production device 803 is displayed on the display screen 253a. Displays an effect that emphasizes the body. Thereafter, in step S5713, the second half part transition flag is deleted from the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the second half part processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5708, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5708, that is, if the valid period of the specific single operation has elapsed, the process advances to step S5714. In step S5714, specific single operation suggestion completion processing is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In subsequent step S5715, a switching process is executed to switch the production button device 40 to the first form. Thereafter, in step S3619, an alternative effect is executed, and then the first part process ends. In the alternative performance, the linked performance by the third movable performance device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/miss result or the like.

Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 151 and 152, supplementary explanation will be given of the flow of the 12th special performance (more specifically, the 12th special performance B). 151(a) group and FIG. 152(a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the third movable production device 803, and FIG. 151(b) group and FIG. 152(b) group are schematic diagrams showing the production button device 40. It is a diagram. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the game round in which the 12th special performance (more specifically, 12th special performance B) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and the sequence from FIG. 151 (1) to FIG. 151 (2) ) → Figure 151 (3) → Figure 151 (4) → Figure 152 (5) → Figure 152 (6) → Figure 152 (7) → Figure 152 (8).

In the example shown in FIG. 151, the 12th special performance (12th special performance B) is started after the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-reach display. With the start of the twelfth special performance, the form of the performance button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form. In line with this, the display screen 253a also includes a message "Make repeated hits!!" to suggest repeated operations, a pattern imitating a button with an expanded operation stroke, a period indicator indicating the remaining validity period, and a message indicating the operation button 721. An operation indicator whose display mode changes depending on the number of operations is displayed. Further, the movable decorative body of the third movable presentation device 803 emits white light in the standby position.

When the operation button 721 is repeatedly pressed in accordance with the suggestion of repeated operations, the display mode of the operation indicator changes depending on the number of times the operation button 721 is pressed repeatedly. Then, when the number of operations reaches the change reference number described above, the color of the movable decoration of the third movable presentation device 803 changes from white to blue. In other words, the first half of the 12th special performance functions as a chance-up performance based on continuous hits.

Thereafter, when the number of operations reaches the end reference number, the operation indicator becomes MAX, and a message "Preparation Complete" indicating the completion of the operation is displayed on the display screen 253a. After that, after a short interval, the message "One-shot!!" indicating a specific single-shot operation is displayed.

When the operation button 721 is operated in accordance with the suggestion of the specific single operation, the movable decoration of the third movable presentation device 803 descends from the standby position to the presentation position, and the movable decoration is highlighted on the display screen 253a. The effect will be displayed. Thereafter, the movable decoration returns from the performance position to the standby position, and the symbol combination corresponding to the hit result is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the effective line of the display screen 253a.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature, the visual impact of the effect button device 40 will be strengthened and attention will be drawn to the effect button device 40 itself. I can do it. Here, when the production button device 40 is in the second form, the position of the movable base 741 that pairs with the operation button 721 rises, and the operation button 721 is operated and the operation button 721 descends, so that the corresponding operation button 721 is lowered. The operation button 721 and the movable base 741 come into contact with each other. Thereby, tactile changes can be conveyed to the player through the operation button 721. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is just around the corner. This is preferable in order to facilitate the operation in the second mode in which the operation stroke is extended and to suitably exhibit the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect.

As shown in this embodiment, the operation stroke in which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 come into contact with each other in the first form is the same as the operation stroke in which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 make contact in the second form. If the position of the movable base 741 is changed so that the position of the movable base 741 is changed, the appearance of the production button device 40 can be greatly changed depending on each form, and it is preferable that the operation in one form is more difficult than the operation in the other form. It can be avoided.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the performance button device 40 is designed to improve the convenience of the player. The invention will be described below with reference to FIG. 153, focusing on the configuration that is different from the thirteenth embodiment described above. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40. In addition, please refer to the first embodiment regarding the basic structure etc. of the performance button device 40.

In the above-described twelfth special performance, the color of the emitted light of the movable decoration of the third movable performance device 803 can be changed by repeatedly operating the performance button device 40 in the second mode. It has become. Here, the production button device 40 shown in this embodiment is configured such that automatic repeated presses are enabled by pushing the operation button 721 further back (lower) than the operation detection position by the detection sensor 791. ing. Specifically, a detection position for automatic repeated hits is provided on the back side (lower side) of the detection sensor 791, and the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 performs the operation based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. The configuration is such that it is monitored whether or not the button 721 has reached the detection position for automatic repeated presses. When the operation button 721 reaches the detection position for automatic repeated presses, the automatic repeated press function is enabled, and the operation button 721 is handled as if the operation button 721 had been repeatedly pressed without repeatedly pressing/releasing the operation button 721. becomes.

The player is informed on the display screen 253a that the auto-repeat detection position has been reached. Then, the player can directly grasp that the auto-repeat detection position has been reached by a change in the tactile sensation of the hand touching the operation button 721. Specifically, when the operation button 721 reaches the auto-repeat detection position, the resistance torque by the stepping motor 753 is raised from a medium level to a high level. In other words, the resistance torque increases stepwise (suddenly) by reaching the auto-repeat detection position.

Hereinafter, first, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154, the continuous operation processing corresponding to the 12th special effect will be described. The basic flow of the repeated operation process is the same as the repeated operation process shown in the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 149), so the explanation will be simplified.

(Processing for continuous operation)
In the process for repeated operations, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether the validity period of the repeated operations has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5801, the process advances to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated based on detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791. Specifically, the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is switched from a LOW level to a HI level by detecting the operation button 721. In step S5802, it is determined whether a rising edge of this signal has occurred. If the rising edge of the signal has not occurred, a negative determination is made in step S5802, and the process advances to step S5803. On the other hand, if a rising edge of the signal has occurred, an affirmative determination is made in step S5802 and the process advances to step S5806.

In step S5806, operation reception notification processing is executed. In the acceptance notification process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted, and an operation acceptance command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 changes the display mode of the operation indicator based on receiving the operation acceptance command for the continuous operation.

In the following step S5807, it is determined whether the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the change reference number of times. In this embodiment, when it is decided to perform the 12th special effect B at the start of a game round, the number of operations (change reference number) that triggers the change of the light emitting color of the third movable effect device 803 and the continuous operation are determined. The number of operations that triggers completion (termination reference number of times) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5604, the process advances to step S5808, and a light emitting color change control process is executed to change the light emitting color of the third movable presentation device 803 (more specifically, the movable decoration).

After executing the change process in step S5808, or if a negative determination is made in step S5807, the process advances to step S5809. In step S5809, it is determined whether the number of times the operation button 721 has been operated has reached the end reference number of times. If a negative determination is made in step S5809, the present continuous operation processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5809, the process advances to step S5810.

In step S5810, a repeated operation completion display execution process is performed, and in the subsequent step S5811, a repeated operation suggestion termination process is performed. As a result, instead of the message for suggesting an operation on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a message indicating that the repeated operation has been completed (for example, the words "operation completed") is displayed. After that, the message is hidden along with a button-like pattern and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

After executing the process in step S5811, the process advances to step S5812. In step S5812, a continuous operation completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. In the following step S5813, a transition flag for the second half part is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process advances to step S5814. In step S5814, a delay period is set in the delay timer counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and this continuous operation processing is ended.

Regarding the effect button device 40 shown in this embodiment, the holding torque (resistance torque) of the stepping motor 753 in the second mode is set to be sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745. . Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in the second embodiment, the coil spring 745 is first compressed, thereby allowing the operation button 721 to descend. Here, after the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position and reaches the movable base 741, the operation force exceeds the above-mentioned holding torque, so that the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are lowered together. becomes. In this way, when the movable base 741 itself is lowered, the stepping motor 753 is controlled to return the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, but this takes a certain amount of time. In this way, the second form of the production button device 40 is not a completely fixed form and is configured to take some time to return to the second form, so when moving from continuous operation to specific operation. In this case, the delay timer counter is used to buy time for returning the effect button device 40 to the second mode. In other words, the value set in the delay timer counter in step S5814 is defined to be longer than the time required to switch from the first mode to the second mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S5801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5801, that is, if the validity period of the repeated operation has elapsed, the process advances to step S5815. In step S5815, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has been operated at least once during the validity period. If a negative determination is made in step S5815, the process advances to step S5816, and a process for terminating the suggestion of repeated operations is executed. In the suggestion termination process, a suggestion termination command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the symbol display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion termination command, and terminates the display of the operation suggestion message, the symbol imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S5817, switching processing to the first mode is executed. Thereafter, in step S5818, an alternative effect is executed, and then the present continuous operation operation process is ended. In the alternative performance, the linked performance by the third movable performance device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/miss result or the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5815, that is, if the operation button 721 has been operated at least once, an affirmative determination is made in step S5815, the process proceeds to step S55810, and each process of steps S5810 to S5814 is executed. After that, this continuous operation process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5802, if a negative determination is made in step S5802, that is, if the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 does not rise from the LOW level to the HI level, the process advances to step S5803. In step S5803, it is determined whether an auto-repeat flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the automatic repeated firing flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5803 and the present repeated firing operation processing is ended. If the auto-repeat flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S5803 and the process advances to step S5804.

In step S5804, the automatic continuous hit timer counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 is referred to, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter is "0". This automatic repeated hit timer counter defines the time interval at which it is determined that a pseudo operation has been performed by automatic repeated hit, and its value increases by "1" each time the 12th special effect process is executed in the MPU 912. It is configured to be subtracted. If a negative determination is made in step S5804, this continuous operation process is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5804, the process advances to step S5805, and after executing automatic continuous hit timer resetting processing, the processing from step S5806 onward is executed. In the resetting process, a predetermined value (equivalent to 0.3 sec) is set in the auto-repeat timer counter.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 155 and 156, the automatic continuous hit process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described. The automatic continuous hit process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as a part of the 12th special effect process, which is a regular process.

(Auto continuous hit processing)
In the auto-repeating operation process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the executable operation is still valid. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, the process advances to step S5902. In step S5902, auto-repeat torque control processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S5903, based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, it is determined whether the movable base 741 is located in the auto-repeat detection range, specifically, in the auto-repeat detection position or a position below it. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5903, the process advances to step S5904. In step S5904, it is determined whether the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at HI level. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5904, the process advances to step S5905.

In step S5905, it is determined whether or not the auto-repeat flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the automatic repeated hitting flag has already been stored, an affirmative answer is made in step S5905, and the present automatic repeated hitting processing is ended. If the automatic repeated hit flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5905 and the process advances to step S5906.

In step S5906, the auto-repeat flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. Thereafter, in step S5907, automatic repeated hit display start processing is executed, and the present automatic repeated hit processing is ended. In the automatic repeated hit display start process, an automatic repeated hit start command for the display control device 142 is output. The display control device 142 displays, on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a message indicating that the auto-repeat function is enabled (for example, the words "Auto-repeat ON") based on the reception of the auto-repeat-hit start command. do.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5901, S5903, and S5904, the process advances to step S5908. In step S5908, it is determined whether or not the auto-repeat flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. If the automatic repeated hit flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5908, and the automatic repeated hit processing is immediately terminated. If the automatic repeated hit flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S5908 and the process advances to step S5909. In step S5909, the auto-repeat flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased.

In the following step S5910, the automatic continuous hit timer counter is cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S5911, auto-repeating display termination processing is executed, and the present auto-repeated-hitting processing is ended. In the automatic repeated hit display termination process, an automatic repeated hit display end command is output to the display control device 142. The display control device 142 hides the above-mentioned message for automatic continuous hitting on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 based on receiving the automatic continuous hitting end command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the automatic continuous stroke torque control process in step S5902 will be described.

(Torque control processing for automatic continuous hitting)
In the auto-repeat torque control process, first, in step S6001, detection information from the rotary encoder 792 is referred to to determine whether the movable base 741 is located at the upper limit position in the movable range. If the movable base 741 is located at the upper limit position, an affirmative determination is made in step S6001 and the process proceeds to step S6002, where the stationary control process is executed, and then the present auto-repeat torque control process is ended. In the static control process, if the stepping motor 753 is generating static torque, that state is maintained, and if the stepping motor 753 is generating drive torque, the generated torque is switched to the static torque.

If the movable base 741 is not located at the upper limit position, a negative determination is made in step S6001 and the process advances to step S6003. In step S6003, it is determined whether the movable base 741 is located between the torque switching reference position below the auto-repeat detection position and the lower limit position in the movable range (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined section). In this embodiment, the return process for returning the movable base 741 to the upper limit position includes a first return control process in which the stepping motor 753 generates a medium-level drive torque (medium torque), and a high-level drive torque in the stepping motor 753. A second return control process that generates a drive torque (high torque) of the same level is provided. If it is not located in the predetermined section, the first return control process is executed in step S6004, and then the automatic continuous stroke torque control process is ended. As a result, a middle level drive torque (medium torque) is generated in the stepping motor 753 (see FIG. 157). On the other hand, if it is located in the predetermined section, the second return control process is executed in step S6005, and then the present auto-repeat torque control process is ended. By executing the second return control process, a high level drive torque (high torque) is generated in the stepping motor 753 (see FIG. 157).

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the operation button 721 is pressed repeatedly, a special effect is executed when the number of times the operation button 721 is pressed reaches a predetermined number of times. Such repeated hitting operations may give the impression that they are troublesome to the player, but in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the operation button 721 can be operated to the auto repeated hitting detection position and maintained in that state. This is essentially the same treatment as when the above-mentioned continuous hit operation is performed. In other words, the player can select whether to actually make consecutive hits or to use a long press as a substitute for consecutive hits, thus meeting the various needs of the players. This is preferable in order to suitably perform the function of encouraging active participation in the game using the performance button device 40.

Here, with regard to the performance button device 40, there is a possibility that the operation mode changes from repeated presses to long presses due to fatigue or other reasons. At this time, if the acceptance of the operation is not quickly switched from determining the number of times to determining the period, there is a high possibility that the valid operation period will elapse in vain due to the time lag. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the detection position for determining the period is shifted from the detection position for determining the number of times so that it is on the back side in the operation direction. There is no need to distinguish between a continuous press operation and a long press operation. Therefore, the time lag for switching from frequency determination to period determination can be minimized. Thereby, the effect of encouraging the operation of the operation button 721 and improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the operating stroke during the repeated tapping operation is shorter than the operating stroke during the long press operation, the above function does not make the repeated tapping operation difficult.

<Modification 1>
In the fourteenth embodiment described above, when the auto-repeat hit is ON, an operation is accepted in a pseudo manner every time the auto-repeat timer reaches "0". At the time of this acceptance, it is also possible to configure the system to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Modification 2>
In the fourteenth embodiment, when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at HI level and it is determined that the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined section based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, the Although the configuration is such that the automatic repeated hit function is enabled, the conditions for enabling the automatic repeated hit function may be changed as follows. That is, it is determined that the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at HI level and the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined section based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, and this situation continues for a predetermined period. The auto-repeat function may be turned on when the key is pressed. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the predetermined period be shorter than the interval period defined by the automatic continuous hit timer.

<Modification 3>
In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the auto continuous hit function is effective when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at HI level and the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined area based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to omit the condition related to the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 and configure the auto-repeat function to be enabled when the movable base 741 is located in a predetermined section by the rotary encoder 792.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the movable base 741 reaches the auto-repeat detection position, the driving torque is changed to notify the player that the movable base 741 has reached the auto-repeat detection position through a tactile change. . For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 158, a high torque section is set in a part of the section including the detection position for automatic repeated hits, and a medium torque section → high torque is set further back in the operating direction from the detection position for automatic repeated hits. It is a good idea to set an interval.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the operation of the performance button device 40 is enabled (a predetermined validity period is set) when the first special performance, etc., which is the operation-compatible performance, is executed. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation of the performance button device 40 is always validly accepted, and a configuration in which operations during a predetermined validity period are differentiated so as to trigger the start/continuation/end of the special performance.

(2) Although the production button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to be pressed downward, the present invention is not limited to this. The operating direction of the operating means for production may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the direction of the production button device 40 may be changed from upward to forward, and the configuration may be changed to a configuration that assumes a pushing operation toward the rear of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the configuration of the operation means for performance may be changed so that pulling operation toward the front side of the gaming machine is a prerequisite. For example, a lever-type operating means such as a joystick may be provided, or a rotary-type operating means such as a rotary switch may be provided.

(3) In the production button device 40 shown in each of the embodiments described above, a biasing member such as a spring that biases the button unit 720 toward the side (upper side) away from the holder unit 750 is missing; however, the holder unit It is also possible to include a biasing member such as a spring that biases the button unit 720 on the side away from the button unit 750 (upper side). In this case, by rotating the rotor 752 by the stepping motor 753, the protruding pin 747 attached to the movable base 741 moves within the engagement groove 772 of the rotor 752 and moves from the horizontal portion 775 to the inclined portion 776, thereby moving the upper It is preferable that the button unit 720 is configured to be displaced upward by the biasing force of the biasing member when the displacement restriction is released.

(4) In the production button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, when the operation stroke of the operation button 721 changes with switching between the first form and the second form, the operation button 721 is operated according to the change in stroke. Although the configuration is such that the detection position changes, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation detection position may be the same in either the first form or the second form. That is, instead of a configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position is the same regardless of whether the first form or the second form is used, there is a configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position changes depending on the first form or the second form. You can also use it as

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, but the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified. The specific configuration for doing so is arbitrary. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a linear encoder is provided in place of the rotary encoder 792 and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on detection information from the linear encoder. Further, it is also possible to provide a configuration in which a position detection sensor such as a photo sensor or a magnetic sensor is provided for each detection position, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on detection information from these position detection sensors. be.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, a stepping motor is used as a driving means for switching the production button device 40 between the first form and the second form, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to use a motor other than a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like as the driving means.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the production button device 40 is disposed on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14, but the position of the production button device 40 may be changed arbitrarily. For example, it is possible to arrange it in the lower bulge 29 or above or to the side of the window part 22.

(8) Regarding the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, the operation direction (operation method) is the same for all of the first to third forms, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a configuration in which the form of the effect button device can be changed, the operating direction (operation method) of the effect button device may be changed for each form.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and the relative displacement between the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 is made at least in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX. Although the configuration allows for this, it is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are fixed and the above-mentioned relative displacement is not possible.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the stepping motor generates static torque even under the situation of the first embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the first form, it is originally possible to have a configuration in which static torque is not generated.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the effect button device 40 is disposed on the front side of the front door frame 14, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is also possible to arrange the performance button device 40 on the side surface or top surface of the front door frame 14.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, based on the fact that the winning/failure lottery (judgment process) has been performed in the main controller 162, the symbols on the actuating mouth display units DU and DL and the symbols on the symbol display device 253 are displayed in a variable manner. Although the configuration is such that a variable display is started, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the fluctuating display of the symbols on the actuating mouth display units DU and DL and the fluctuating display of the symbols on the symbol display device 253 are started prior to the lottery (judgment process) in the main control device 162.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the transition is made to the second normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode. The trigger for transitioning to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the normal jackpot result. In addition to or in place of the transition trigger, for example, the number of games played in the first normal gaming state compatible with the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (the number of games played without shifting to another gaming state) It may be configured such that when a predetermined reference number of times is reached, a transition is made to the second normal gaming state. In addition, for example, a transition random number counter CX, etc. that performs a lottery for transition to the second normal gaming state is provided, and when a lottery using the value of the transition random number counter CX and a transition lottery table is won, the transition to the second normal gaming state is performed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which: It is also possible to combine these two migration triggers. In other words, if the number of games played in the first normal gaming state reaches a predetermined standard number of times and a transition lottery using the transition random number counter CX is won, the configuration may be such that the transition to the second normal gaming state occurs. It is possible. In addition, in a configuration in which the transition to the second normal game state is triggered by reaching a predetermined standard number of times, the remaining number of games until the predetermined standard number of times is reached is clearly indicated or suggested on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. It is also possible to have a configuration.

As described in detail above, if the configuration is such that the transition to the second normal gaming state can be made without going through the special gaming state, the effect button device 40 may be used to suggest or explicitly indicate the transition to the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to do this. For example, in a configuration in which the number of games played in the first normal gaming state reaches a predetermined reference number as described above, the transition to the second normal gaming state is made, a countdown effect until reaching the predetermined reference number of times is produced using a button. It may also be performed using the device 40. Specifically, the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 may be changed in stages (UP or DOWN) each time the number of games progresses toward a predetermined reference number of times. In addition, in the configuration in which the transition lottery using the transition random number counter CX is won as described above, the transition to the second normal game state is made, the configuration suggests an operation to switch the production button device 40 to the second mode in the corresponding game round. It is also possible to do so. In other words, it is also possible to create a configuration in which when the operation corresponding performance is executed based on the operation in the second form, the jackpot result or the losing result corresponding to the transition to the second normal gaming state is determined or highly probable. be.

Furthermore, if there is a range in the upper limit of the number of games to be played in the second normal game state to which the special game state is transferred without going through the special game state (for example, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, etc.) , by switching the form of the production button device 40 from the first form to another form, it suggests a transition to the second gaming state, and also sets the upper limit of the number of games when transitioning to the second normal gaming state depending on the prominence level. It may also be a suggested configuration. Specifically, it may be configured such that the higher the prominence level is, the higher the upper limit will be when the transition from successful production to second normal game state occurs.

(14) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is formed on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, pachinko machines and slot machines are equipped with a retrieval device, and the reels start rotating when a start lever is operated after the retrieval device has taken in a predetermined number of game balls stored in a storage section. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines in which the

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
The following features group A are as follows: ``A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball firing means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. An operation means (performance button device 40) provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
A performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a manipulation-compatible performance (for example, a first special performance, etc.) based on the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation validity period; A gaming machine comprising:
When a predetermined switching condition (development to reach display in the game round related to the first special effect) is satisfied, the form of the operating means is switched from the first form to a second form having a different appearance from the first form. A switching means (a function for executing processing for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
When a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the mode of the operating means is switched to the second mode, an operation suggestion means (operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that suggests the player to operate the operating means functions),
The performance execution means is
A special performance (first special performance) as the operation corresponding performance when the operation means is operated during the predetermined operation validity period and the operation means is in the second mode. a means of carrying out the
It has a period setting means for setting any one of a plurality of periods of different lengths as the predetermined waiting period (a function for determining the start timing of the operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143). A gaming machine featuring:

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature A1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second mode, the operation of the operating means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second mode. Since a plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined standby period, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second mode varies variously. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the change in shape but also to the length maintained in the second shape. This is preferable in order to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase attention to the game.

Feature A2. Information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes the winning process for the actuating ports function) and
Acquired information storage means (retained ball storage area 632 provided in RAM 604 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). function to perform processing such as), and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode);
An operation means (performance button device 40) provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
A performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a manipulation-compatible performance (for example, a first special performance, etc.) based on the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation validity period; A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
When a predetermined switching condition (development to reach display in the game round related to the first special effect) is satisfied, the form of the operating means is switched from the first form to a second form having a different appearance from the first form. A switching means (a function for executing processing for switching the form in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143),
When a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the mode of the operating means is switched to the second mode, an operation suggestion means (operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that suggests the player to operate the operating means (a function to execute a process for the operation); and when the operation means is operated in a situation where the predetermined operation validity period is in progress and the operation means is in the second mode, the operation corresponding effect is executed. means for executing a special performance (first special performance),
A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period,
The effect execution means includes a period setting means (a period setting means for setting one of the plurality of different periods as the predetermined standby period based on a determination result by the transition determination means (operation suggestion by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143). 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of determining start timing.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature A2, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second mode, the operation of the operating means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second mode. A plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second mode varies variously based on the determination result by the transition determining means. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the change in shape but also to the length maintained in the second shape. This is preferable in order to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase attention to the game.

Feature A3. The predetermined period includes a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period,
The period setting means is configured to increase the probability that the second period will be set as the predetermined period when the determination result by the transition determining means is the transition compatible result than when the determination result is not the transition compatible result. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to feature A3, it is possible to make a player who desires to shift to the special gaming state to expect that the period in which the second mode is maintained will be as long as possible (so that it will be the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in increasing attention to switching to the second mode.

Feature A4. The predetermined period includes a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the difference between the first period and the second period is longer than the first period.

According to feature A4, it is possible to prevent the difference in predetermined waiting periods from becoming obscured and becoming difficult to understand.

Feature A5. The switching means is configured to switch the operating means to the second mode when the predetermined switching condition is satisfied when transitioning to the reach display,
The display effect executed after the transition to the reach display includes a first part and a second part,
The predetermined waiting period includes a first period in which the operation is suggested during the first part, and a second period in which the operation is suggested in the second part. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with.

As shown in feature A5, if the operating means switches to the second form upon transition to the reach display, and an operation suggestion occurs in the first part or the second part after the transition to the reach display, The player can estimate the period during which the second mode is maintained from the progress of the display performance without measuring the period. By clarifying the difference between the first period and the second period in this way, the effects shown in feature A1 etc. can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A6. The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the switching means includes means for maintaining the operating means in the second mode until the predetermined standby period elapses. Machine.

If the operating means suddenly switches to the first mode while waiting for an operation suggestion, it may confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the operating means is switched to the second mode, the second mode is maintained until the predetermined waiting period has elapsed, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably avoided. It can be suppressed.

Feature A7. The operating means is configured to be switchable from the second mode to the first mode by a player's operation,
If the operation means is operated after switching to the second mode and before the predetermined standby period has elapsed, the method further comprises means for regulating the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the special performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

If the operating means is operated between the switching to the second mode and the generation of the operation suggestion, the operation suggestion and special performance are regulated. With this configuration, the player is urged to wait until an operation suggestion occurs after switching to the second mode, and it is possible to prevent the operation means from being blindly operated after switching to the second mode. This is preferable in order to effectively exhibit the effects shown in feature A1 and the like.

Feature A8. Any of features A1 to A7, wherein the operating means is configured such that the operating stroke of the operating means in the second form is longer than the operating stroke of the operating means in the first form. The gaming machine described in item 1.

As shown in feature A8, if the configuration is such that the operation stroke is larger in the second form than in the first form, the operation means can be made more conspicuous while suppressing the complexity of the operation due to the change to the second form. can do.

Feature A9. The apparatus further includes elapsed period corresponding display means for displaying elapsed period correspondence by changing the display according to the elapsed period at least during a period from a change in the form of the operating means until a suggestion is made by the suggestion means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

As shown in feature A9, it is preferable to perform a display corresponding to the elapsed period so that the display changes according to the elapsed period, in order to encourage the player to understand the game.

Feature A10. An operation means (performance button device 40) provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a manipulation-compatible performance (for example, a first special performance, etc.) based on the operation of the operating means. There it is,
a switching means for switching the operating means from a first state to a second state having a different appearance from the first state when a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in a game round related to a first special effect) is satisfied; (Function to execute form switching processing in the MPU 902 of the notification/effect control device 143),
When a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the state of the operating means was switched to the second state, an operation suggestion means (an operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that suggests the player to operate the operating means functions),
The performance execution means is
means for executing a special performance (first special performance) as the operation corresponding performance when the operation means is operated in a situation where the operation means is in the second state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: period setting means for setting any one of a plurality of periods of different lengths as the predetermined waiting period.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first state and the second state as shown in feature A10, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second state, the operation of the operating means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since switching to the second state. Since a plurality of periods having different lengths are provided as the predetermined standby period, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second state varies variously. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player's attention not only to the shape change but also to the length of time the second state is maintained. This is preferable in order to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase attention to the game.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features A1 to A9 to feature A10.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature group B is defined as: ``A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature B1. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A performance execution means (the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 executes processing for the first special performance) that executes an operation corresponding performance (for example, a first special performance for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine having the following functions:
The effect executing means executes a first effect (character image CA means for executing a production (a production that adds an effect EF to a scene); and after execution of the first production, the operating means moves to a second position further back in the predetermined direction from the first position (for example, a second detection position CP2 to a fifth detection position CP2 to a fifth detection position); A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second performance (a performance that changes an effect EF) when a position CP5) is reached.

According to feature B1, when the operating means reaches a first position on a path along which the operating means is displaced by being operated in a predetermined direction, the first effect is executed, and after the first effect is executed, the first effect is executed. The second effect is executed when the operating means reaches a second position further back than the first position in the predetermined direction. In this way, if the configuration is such that the first performance → second performance is executed in conjunction with the operation of one of the operating means, an unprecedented and novel performance becomes possible. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature B2. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A performance execution means (the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 executes processing for the first special performance) that executes an operation corresponding performance (for example, a first special performance for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine having the following functions:
The performance execution means is
a starting means (notification means) for starting a special display as an effect corresponding to the operation when the operation means reaches a predetermined position (for example, a first detection position CP1) on a path where the operation means is displaced by an operation directed in the predetermined direction;・Function to start the second special performance in the MPU 912 of the performance control device 143);
At least part of the special display when the operating means reaches a specific position further back in the predetermined direction than the predetermined position (for example, second detection position CP2 to fifth detection position CP5) after the start of the special display. (a function of changing the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143).

According to feature B2, when the operating means reaches a predetermined position on a path along which the operating means is displaced by being operated in a predetermined direction, the special display is started, and after the start of the special display, the At least a portion of the special display is changed when the operating means reaches a specific position further back in the predetermined direction than the predetermined position. In this way, if the configuration is such that the special display starts → special display changes in conjunction with the operation of one of the operating means, an unprecedented and novel performance becomes possible. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature B3. The effect execution means includes a maintenance means (a control means for maintaining the special display as it is when the operating means reaches the specific position after the start of the special display (a control unit that maintains the special display as it is) (a control unit that controls the magnitude of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of maintaining the same temperature.

According to feature B3, when a specific position is reached, the special display is divided into a case where the special display changes and a case where the special display does not change. This is advantageous in suppressing the monotony of the operation results and enhancing the attention level improvement effect shown in feature B2.

Feature B4. The changing means can change the special display when the specific position is reached based on the displacement in the predetermined direction, and the specific position is reached based on the displacement in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the special display cannot be changed in the case where the special display is changed.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the operating means is displaced in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction due to, for example, the hand being removed from the operating means before or after reaching a specific position, the change in the special display is undone. Never. This is preferable in order to avoid unintended changes in the special display due to operational errors or the like.

Note that instead of or in addition to the configuration shown in this feature, a configuration may be adopted in which "displacement in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction is suppressed when the operating means is operated".

Feature B5. The changing means does not change the special display if the operating means reaches the specific position after a predetermined period has elapsed since the operating means reached the predetermined position and the special display started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that the gaming machine has the following configuration.

When creating a configuration in which the special display changes in conjunction with an operation, it is assumed that the impact of the display change will be stronger if the change has a certain degree of speed. Here, if a time limit is set for changing the special display as shown in this feature, the player is encouraged to point the operating means at a specific position and operate it all at once, and the above-mentioned impact is strengthened to change the special display. The degree of attention can be suitably improved.

Feature B6. The specific position includes a first position and a second position further back than the first position in the predetermined direction,
The changing means is
a first means for changing the special display when the operating means reaches the first position;
and a second means for further changing the special display when the operating means reaches the second position after the special display has been changed by the first means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B5.

As shown in feature B6, if the special display is configured to change in multiple stages by operating the operating means in a predetermined direction, the expressive power of changing the special display can be suitably improved.

Feature B7. comprising a resistance generating means (a function of generating resistance torque in the stepping motor 753) that generates operation resistance when the operation means is operated in the predetermined direction;
The resistance generating means is configured such that operational resistance generated between the first position and the second position is greater than operational resistance generated between the predetermined position and the first position. The gaming machine according to feature B6.

According to feature B7, by increasing the operation resistance on the back side in the operation direction, it is possible to prevent the change in the special display from ending too quickly and making it difficult to identify the change.

Feature B8. Feature B6 or B7, wherein the distance from the second position to the first position in the predetermined direction is larger than the distance from the first position to the predetermined position in the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

According to feature B8, the further back in the operating direction, the more grace period until the special display can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the change in the special display from ending too quickly and making it difficult to identify the change.

Feature B9. The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operating stroke than the first form,
Features B1 to B8 are characterized in that, when the operation corresponding performance is executed, a switching means is provided for switching the operating means to the second mode before the operation suggestion of the operating means is performed. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

As shown in feature B1 and the like, in a configuration in which the movement of the operating means and the special display are linked, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by expanding the operating stroke of the operating means in advance. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operation of the operating means is often performed vigorously. In this regard, according to the configuration in which the operation stroke is extended in advance, it is possible to buy the display change period and to suitably suppress the difficulty in identifying changes in the special display.

Feature B10. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). etc.) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
A gaming machine in which a game performance is executed based on a determination result by the transition determining means,
An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
An operation corresponding performance execution means (a first special performance executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes an operation corresponding performance (for example, a first special performance for the second part) that is the game performance based on the operation of the operation means. Equipped with a function to execute processing for production),
The operation corresponding performance execution means is
a starting means (notification means) for starting a special display as an effect corresponding to the operation when the operation means reaches a predetermined position (for example, a first detection position CP1) on a path where the operation means is displaced by an operation directed in the predetermined direction;・Function to start the second special performance in the MPU 912 of the performance control device 143);
At least part of the special display when the operating means reaches a specific position further back in the predetermined direction than the predetermined position (for example, second detection position CP2 to fifth detection position CP5) after the start of the special display. (a function of changing the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143).

According to feature B10, the special display is started when the operating means reaches a predetermined position on the path along which the operating means is displaced by being operated in a predetermined direction, and after the start of the special display, the At least a portion of the special display is changed when the operating means reaches a specific position further back in the predetermined direction than the predetermined position. In this way, if the configuration is such that the special display starts → special display changes in conjunction with the operation of one of the operating means, an unprecedented and novel performance becomes possible. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Note that each of the technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B9 may be applied to Feature B10.

Furthermore, each of the technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B10 may be applied to the feature A group.

<Feature C group>
The following characteristic group C is defined as: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for a third special performance in the MPU 902 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means;
Monitoring means (position monitoring function in MPU 902 of notification/performance control device 143 and rotary encoder 792) for dividing the operation stroke of the operation means into a plurality of areas and monitoring the position of the operation means,
The monitoring means includes:
position detection means (rotary encoder 792) for detecting in which of the plurality of areas (first area E1 to third area E3) the operating means is located;
It has a period detection means (a hold counter provided in the RAM 914 of the notification/effect control device 143) for detecting a stay period during which the operation means continuously stays in the area detected by the position detection means,
The performance execution means includes a period determination means (a function of determining a hold period in the MPU 902 of the notification/performance control device 143) for determining whether the stay period detected by the period detection means has reached the reference period;
When the period determining means determines that the period of stay has reached the reference period, an operation corresponding effect execution means (of the notification/effect control device 143) executes an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the area during the stay. A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 902 has a function of executing a selection performance constituting a third special performance.

According to the above configuration, when the stay period during which the operation means is operated (held) to remain in any area reaches the reference period, the operation corresponding effect is executed according to the stay area of the operation means. The Rukoto. By making such a novel operation possible, the effect of increasing the attention to the game using the operating means can be suitably achieved.

Feature C2. The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operating stroke than the first form,
The game according to feature C1, further comprising a switching means for switching the operating means to the second mode before the operation suggestion of the operating means is performed when the operation corresponding performance is executed. Machine.

As shown in feature C1, in a configuration in which operation-corresponding effects are executed according to the stay area of the operating means, each area becomes smaller, which increases the difficulty of the operation. There is a concern that such difficulty in operation will hinder the ability of the operating means to be effective in encouraging active participation in the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the operating means is set to the second mode prior to the operation suggestion of the operating means, and the operation stroke is increased in advance, thereby making it possible to set each of the areas to be large. It becomes possible. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C1 or feature C2, further comprising a position information teaching means for teaching the player information indicating a relationship between the position of the operating means detected by the position detecting means and the area. Machine.

In a configuration where the performance can diverge depending on the hold position of the operating means, it may be difficult to grasp the position of the operating means only from tactile information. Such difficulty becomes an impediment to subdividing the area and diversifying the performance patterns. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably resolved by providing a configuration in which information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operating means and the area is taught to the player.

Feature C4. comprising period information teaching means for teaching the player period information indicating the period detected by the period detection means;
Any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the period information teaching means is configured not to teach the period information at the initial stage of stay when continuously staying in the area. The gaming machine described in .

As shown in feature C1 and the like, in a configuration in which the operating means is held, there is a possibility that the operating means may be moved between areas due to slight changes in force. If the period information is reset frequently due to such movement between areas, there is a concern that it will give the impression that it is troublesome to the player and that the operation means will not be operated. In view of the fact that it is necessary to adjust the force when holding, there is technical significance in having a configuration in which period information is not taught at the initial stage of the stay as shown in this feature.

Feature C5. The operating means is an elevating button,
The plurality of areas include a first area (first area E1) on the upper limit position side of the operating means, a second area (third area E3) including the lower limit position of the operating means, and and a third area (second area E2) provided between the area and the second area,
Any of the features C1 to C4, wherein the size of the third area in the predetermined direction is larger than each of the first area and the second area in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine described in item 1.

When holding the operating means, it is assumed that it will be more difficult to hold the operating means in the third area in between than in the upper and lower limit areas due to the presence or absence of a guide. In this case, it is assumed that players who desire easy operation will not select the third area. Therefore, by configuring the third area so that its size in a predetermined direction is larger than each of the first area and second area, the above-mentioned concerns can be alleviated.

Feature C6. comprising a drag force generating means for generating a drag force that impedes movement of the operating means in the predetermined direction;
Any of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the drag generating means is capable of changing the magnitude of the drag, and includes means for increasing the drag at a boundary between the plurality of areas. The gaming machine described in item 1.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it becomes easy to intuitively grasp that movement between areas is caused by the resistance transmitted from the operating means to the hand. This is preferable in order to improve the user-friendliness of the operating means for the player.

Feature C7. comprising a drag force generating means for generating a drag force that impedes movement of the operating means in the predetermined direction;
The drag generating means is capable of changing the magnitude of the drag, and includes means for changing the drag according to the length of the stay detected by the period detecting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, since the resistance changes during operation, it is possible to suitably suppress monotony of operation.

Feature C8. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
performance execution means for performing an operation-responsive performance based on the fact that the operation means reaches a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
The determination position setting means is capable of changing the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
A game characterized in that when the operating means remains at a predetermined determination position set by the determination position setting means for a predetermined reference period, a special performance that is the operation corresponding performance is executed. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated (held) so as to remain in any area, that is, when the period of stay at the predetermined judgment position that has been set reaches the reference period, the operating means is Operational effects will be executed depending on the area of stay. By making such a novel operation possible, the effect of increasing the attention to the game using the operating means can be suitably achieved.

Feature C9. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
performance execution means for performing an operation-responsive performance based on the fact that the operation means reaches a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
The determination position setting means is capable of changing the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a special effect that is the operation corresponding effect is executed when the operation means remains at a predetermined judgment position set by the judgment position setting means for a predetermined reference period. .

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated (held) so as to remain in any area, that is, when the period of stay at the predetermined judgment position that has been set reaches the reference period, the operating means is Operational effects will be executed depending on the area of stay. By making such a novel operation possible, the effect of increasing the attention to the game using the operating means can be suitably achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in Features C1 to C9 may be applied to Features A to B.

<Characteristic group D>
The following feature group D is defined as: ``A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball firing means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). etc.) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The normal gaming state includes a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, second normal gaming state B or third normal gaming state B). and
It is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14), and is switchable between the first mode and a second mode whose appearance is different from the first mode, and when the second mode is in the second gaming state. A state suggesting means (presentation button device 40) that indicates to the player that the second mode is maintained over a plurality of gaming rounds in the second gaming state is advantageous;
A gaming machine characterized in that the state suggesting means is configured to be operable under at least a situation in the second mode.

According to feature D1, during the second gaming state, the form of the state suggesting means provided on the front part of the gaming machine is in the second form, thereby suggesting an advantageous state. The front section of the gaming machine is a part that is more easily seen by other players than, for example, a liquid crystal display device placed on the back side of the gaming machine, so the condition indication provided on the front section of the gaming machine is By configuring the system to indicate the state by means of the means, it is possible to suitably arouse a sense of superiority in the player who is playing the game at the gaming machine.

Here, the state suggesting means in the second form is operable. In this way, if the state suggesting means is operable in an advantageous state, the player's impression of the state suggesting means is favorable, and the state suggesting means assumes the second form in the second game state. This is advantageous in increasing the attention of people.

Feature D2. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). etc.) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The normal gaming state includes a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
It is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14), and is switchable between the first mode and a second mode, which has a different appearance from the first mode, and is capable of switching from the special gaming state to the second gaming state. If the game mode is switched to the second mode before or along with the transition to the second gaming state, and a game round is progressing in the second gaming state, A state suggestion means (effect button device 40) is provided to suggest to the player that an advantageous state is achieved by maintaining the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized in that the state suggesting means is configured to be operable under at least a situation in the second mode.

According to feature D2, during the second gaming state, the form of the state suggesting means provided on the front part of the gaming machine becomes the second form, thereby suggesting an advantageous state. The front section of the gaming machine is a part that is more easily seen by other players than, for example, a liquid crystal display device placed on the back side of the gaming machine, so the condition indication provided on the front section of the gaming machine is By configuring the system to indicate the state by means of the means, it is possible to suitably arouse a sense of superiority in the player who is playing the game at the gaming machine.

Here, the state suggesting means in the second form is operable. In this way, if the state suggesting means is operable in an advantageous state, the player's impression of the state suggesting means is favorable, and the state suggesting means assumes the second form in the second game state. This is advantageous in increasing the attention of people.

Feature D3. When the state suggesting means in the second mode is operated in the second gaming state, a production (fourth special The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, further comprising a performance execution means for executing a performance.

When the state suggestion means (second form) is operated in the second game state, an effect corresponding to the result of the transition determination related to the game round in which the operation was performed is executed. Since the second gaming state is an advantageous state, the opportunity for an advantageous performance to occur for the player increases due to the operation. This is advantageous in making the player's impression of the state suggesting means favorable and increasing the degree of attention to the fact that the state suggesting means takes on the second form in the second game state.

Feature D4. The state suggesting means includes means for maintaining the second form until the second gaming state ends after switching to the second form upon transition to the second gaming state. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to feature D4, the second form may be maintained until the second gaming state ends. This is preferable in order to ensure an opportunity to operate the status suggesting means.

Feature D5. comprising a notification means for prompting a player to operate the state suggestion means when a predetermined notification condition (for example, a jackpot) is satisfied under a situation where the state suggestion means is in the second form;
The state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second form to the first form by a player's operation,
Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the apparatus further comprises a determining means for determining whether or not to return the state suggesting means to the second mode after the state suggesting means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notifying means. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

When the state suggesting means which is in the second form in the second game state is operated in accordance with the notification by the notification means, the subsequent form is divided into the first form/second form. With such a configuration, a sense of tension can be imparted to the operation of the state suggesting means.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "If a predetermined notification condition (for example, a jackpot) is satisfied under a situation where the state suggesting means is in the second mode, the player is prompted to operate the state suggesting means. The state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second mode to the first mode in accordance with the notification by the notifying means, and the state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second mode to the first mode according to the notification by the notifying means. When the state suggestion means is operated and the first notification condition (for example, the fourth special effect corresponding to the jackpot result) is satisfied as the predetermined notification condition, the state suggestion means after the operation is The mode is the first mode, and the state suggestion means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notification means, and a second notification condition (for example, a fourth special effect corresponding to a negative result) is established as the predetermined notification condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, further comprising means for setting the state suggesting means to the second form after the operation. ” It is also possible.

Feature D6. When the decision means makes a decision to return to the second mode, the return is delayed at least until the end of the game in which the state suggestion means was operated. The gaming machine according to feature D5.

By configuring the state suggesting means to delay its return until the end of the game round in which it was operated, it is possible to suitably suppress the movement of the state suggesting means from becoming a factor in reducing attention to the game.

Feature D7. The state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second form to the first form by a player's operation,
When the state suggesting means is operated in the second gaming state during a non-notification period during which the state suggesting means is in the second mode and the notification is not being made by the notifying means, The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a limiting means for limiting a return to the second mode during the second gaming state.

As described above, in the configuration in which the state suggesting means suggests that an advantageous gaming state is present, if the state suggesting means malfunctions due to being operated blindly, the above-mentioned suggesting function will not be performed effectively. . This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that impairs the reliability of the gaming machine (status suggesting means). Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the state suggesting means is operated in the second game state during the non-notifying period when the state suggesting means is in the second form and no notification is being made by the notifying means. In such a case, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by providing a configuration in which return to the second mode is restricted.

Feature D8. A firing means (solenoid 111) that fires a game ball to a gaming area (gaming area PE);
Ball feeding means (ball feeding device 113) that sends game balls from a storage area (upper tray 33) that stores game balls to the launching means;
a variable ball entry part (lower operating port 83b and electric accessory 91) provided in the gaming area and switchable between a first state and a second state in which entering the ball is easier than the first state;
switching control means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the first state and the second state;
and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage area based on the ball entering the variable ball entry section,
The switching control mode by the switching control means includes a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the second state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode,
The switching control mode in the second gaming state is the second switching mode,
Any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the state suggesting means is configured such that the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the game machine is larger in the second form than in the first form. The gaming machine described in item 1.

By switching the state indicating means to the second mode, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the gaming machine increases. Although this is preferable for making the status suggesting means stand out, it becomes difficult to access the area behind the status suggesting means. Due to these circumstances, it is assumed that increasing restrictions on the placement of the state suggesting means will hinder the ability of the state suggesting means to exert its attention-improving effect. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the state suggesting means is configured to switch to the second mode in the second switching mode in which the decrease in game balls is suppressed, the state suggesting means is arranged around the storage area. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the state suggesting means from becoming a substantial hindrance to the supply of game balls. In this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by relaxing the restrictions regarding the arrangement of the state suggesting means.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features D1 to D8 may be applied to the features A to C.

<Characteristic group E>
The following feature group E is based on the following: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A movable performance device that includes a decorative body (for example, a movable body 360 and a decorative body 410) that is provided so as to be visible from the front of a gaming machine, and a drive unit that drives the decorative body (for example, a motor 381 and a solenoid 420). (For example, a first movable performance device 300, a second movable performance device 400, a third movable performance device 803, a fourth movable performance device 804),
An operation means operated by the player (operation button 721 of the production button device 40),
A performance execution means (MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation (for example, second special performances A to D) by operating a decoration of the movable performance device when the operation means is operated. function to execute the second special effects A to D),
When the operation corresponding performance is executed by the performance execution means based on the operation of the operation means, the player moves the movable performance device that is the operation target in the current operation corresponding performance before the start of the operation of the decoration body. (The light emitting block 725 of the performance button device 40, the light emitting parts LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination section 24, the interlocking display area CE of the symbol display device 253, and the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143 for guidance display) A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with the following functions:

A configuration in which the movable performance device performs an operation-responsive performance based on the player's operation of the operating means is preferable for encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, as the distance between the operating means and the movable presentation device increases, there is a possibility that the beginning of the operation-compatible presentation may be missed due to the movable presentation device being out of sight. In view of the fact that the operation-responsive performance is a performance that involves the movement of decorations and has a strong impact at the beginning, the occurrence of such oversight is not desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when an operation-responsive effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable effect that is the object of operation in the current operation-responsive effect is checked before the decoration starts moving. The device is taught. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned oversight can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing the attention level by the operation corresponding performance can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E2. A plurality of movable elements each having a decorative body (for example, the movable body 360 or the decorative body 410) that is provided so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a drive unit that drives the decorative body (for example, the motor 381 or the solenoid 420). A gaming machine equipped with a presentation device (for example, a first movable presentation device 300, a second movable presentation device 400, a third movable presentation device 803, a fourth movable presentation device 804),
An operation means operated by the player (operation button 721 of the production button device 40),
Effect execution means for executing an operation corresponding effect (second special effects A to D) by operating a decorative body of the movable effect device for any of the movable effect devices when the operation means is operated. (Function to execute the second special effects A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143),
When the operation corresponding effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the operation of the operation means, before the decoration body starts operating, one of the plurality of movable effect devices is selected as the object to be operated in the current operation corresponding effect. Teaching means (light emitting block 725 of the effect button device 40, light emitting parts LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination section 24, interlocking display area CE of the symbol display device 253, notification/presentation) for teaching the player the movable production device that is A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 912 of the control device 143 executes processing for displaying guidance.

A configuration in which the movable performance device performs an operation-responsive performance based on the player's operation of the operating means is preferable for encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, as the distance between the operating means and the movable presentation device increases, there is a possibility that the beginning of the operation-compatible presentation may be missed due to the movable presentation device being out of sight. In view of the fact that the operation-responsive performance is a performance that involves the movement of decorations and has a strong impact at the beginning, the occurrence of such oversight is not desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In particular, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become noticeable when a plurality of movable performance devices that can be operated are used together. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when an operation-responsive effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means, the movable effect that is the object of operation in the current operation-responsive effect is checked before the decoration starts moving. The device is taught. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned oversight can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing the attention level by the operation corresponding performance can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E3. A plurality of movable devices each having a decorative body (for example, the movable body 360 or the decorative body 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a drive unit (for example, the motor 381 or the solenoid 420) that drives the decorative body. A gaming machine equipped with a presentation device (for example, a first movable presentation device 300, a second movable presentation device 400, a third movable presentation device 803, a fourth movable presentation device 804),
An operation means operated by the player (operation button 721 of the production button device 40),
When the operating means is operated, execution of a performance corresponding to the operation (second special performances A to D) is performed by operating a decorative body of the movable performance device using one of the movable performance devices as an operation target. means (a function of executing the second special effects A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143);
When the operation-corresponding effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the operation of the operation means, one of the movable effect devices is A teaching means for teaching the player the movable presentation device to be operated in the current operation-compatible presentation (the light-emitting block 725 of the presentation button device 40, the light-emitting portions LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination section 24, the symbol display device 253) A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an interlocking display area CE, and a function for executing guidance display processing in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143.

According to feature E3, a configuration in which the movable performance device performs an operation-responsive performance based on the player's operation of the operating means is preferable for encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, as the distance between the operating means and the movable presentation device increases, there is a possibility that the beginning of the operation-compatible presentation may be missed due to the movable presentation device being out of sight. In view of the fact that the operation-responsive performance is a performance that involves the movement of decorations and has a strong impact at the beginning, the occurrence of such oversight is not desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In particular, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become noticeable when a plurality of movable performance devices that can be operated are used together. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation-responsive effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, the current performance is required from the time the operation of the operation means is started until the decorative object starts operating. The movable performance device to be operated in the operation corresponding performance is taught. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned oversight can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing the attention level by the operation corresponding performance can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E4. comprising an operation detection means (detection sensor 791) that detects that the operation means operated by the player has reached a predetermined detection position (first detection position CP1),
The performance execution means is configured to meet a predetermined start condition (arrival at a thirteenth detection position CP13 within a standby period or during a standby period) after the operation detection means detects that the operation means has reached the predetermined detection position. The configuration is such that the operation corresponding performance is executed based on the establishment of the
Feature E3, wherein the teaching means is configured to perform the teaching from when the operation detection means detects that the operation means has reached the predetermined detection position until the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

According to feature E4, the object to be operated is taught from when the operation means reaches a predetermined detection position and the execution condition for the operation corresponding effect is satisfied until the start condition for the operation corresponding effect is satisfied. Thereby, the effect shown in feature E3 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E5. The operating direction of the operating means is defined to be a predetermined direction,
The teaching means performs the teaching based on the fact that the operating means has reached a specific position (for example, a second predetermined position CP2 to a thirteenth predetermined position CP13) further than the predetermined detection position in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the gaming machine has a means.

According to feature E5, when the operating means is operated in a predetermined direction, the execution condition of the operation-corresponding performance changes to the teaching of the operation target. For example, even if a player who does not expect instructions stops the operation after reaching a predetermined detection position, the operation-responsive performance will be executed, so it is possible to meet the needs of various players. In other words, it is possible to reduce the chances of giving the impression that the teaching function is troublesome to the player.

In addition, when compared with a configuration in which the execution condition of teaching → operation corresponding performance is satisfied with the operation of the operating means, the operation is interrupted before reaching the predetermined detection position due to the operation corresponding performance being exposed from the contents of the teaching. This is advantageous in that it does not cause any inconvenience such as

Feature E6. The teaching means directs the operation target by emitting light on a route connecting the operation means and the operation target so as to guide the player's line of sight from the operation means to the movable performance device that is the current operation target. The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to teach the player.

According to feature E6, by emitting light along the route connecting the operating means and the action object, the player's line of sight can be guided toward the action object, thereby suitably eliminating the concerns shown in feature E3, etc. be able to.

Feature E7. The teaching means includes a plurality of light emitting parts arranged on the route (the first light emitting part LT1 to the fourteenth light emitting part LT14 in the annular illumination section 24 and the interlocking display area CE in the symbol display device 253) and the operation means. and a shift means for shifting the light-emitting point that is the light-emission target from the current target movable performance device toward the movable performance device that is the target of the current operation, and a configuration that teaches the player the operation target by shifting the light-emission target. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that:

As shown in feature E7, the guiding function shown in feature E6 can be suitably demonstrated by shifting the light-emitting points among the light-emitting points arranged on the route.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the shifting means performs the shifting in conjunction with displacement of the operating means in the operating direction of the operating means.

According to feature E8, by linking the movement of the operating means and the shift of the light-emitting object, it becomes possible for the player to arbitrarily control the shift speed while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

Feature E9. The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operating stroke than the first form,
The game according to feature E8, further comprising a switching means for switching the operating means to the second mode before the operation suggestion of the operating means is performed when the operation corresponding performance is executed. Machine.

As shown in feature E8, in a configuration in which the movement of the operating means and the shift of the light emitting object are linked, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by expanding the operating stroke of the operating means in advance. Furthermore, since the operation of the operating means is often performed vigorously, the teaching period may be extremely shortened due to cooperation. In this regard, if the operation stroke is expanded, the teaching period can be increased, and it is possible to suitably prevent the teaching from being missed.

Feature E10. Features E7 to E9 are characterized in that the shift speed of the light emitting portion by the shift means is configured to change so that it is relatively slow on the side of the operation means and relatively fast on the side of the movable presentation device. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As shown in feature E10, if the shift speed is slow on the operating means side and fast on the movable presentation device side, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long and to prevent the teaching from being missed. It can be suppressed.

Feature E11. The teaching means is configured to cause a light emitting point (second light emitting section LT2) closest to the operating means to emit light among the plurality of light emitting points when the operating means reaches the predetermined detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features E7 to E10.

When the operating means is operated, there is a high possibility that the player's attention is directed towards the operating means in order to determine the aim. Therefore, when teaching, the player's attention can be directed to the teaching means by first emitting light from the light emitting point closest to the operating means.

Feature E12. Features E7 to E11 are characterized in that a part of the light emitting portion to be shifted by the shift means on the operating means side is shared in each route connecting the operating means and each of the operation targets. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

If the teaching routes partially overlap on the operating means side as shown in feature E12, the initial light emitting point will be common for all teachings, and it is possible to suitably prevent the teaching start from being missed.

Feature E13. The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E12, wherein if the operation-corresponding performance is started during teaching by the teaching means, the teaching ends. .

According to feature E13, by directing the player's attention to the instruction, it is possible to suppress an increase in the chances of missing the operation-corresponding performance.

Feature E14. comprising an operation suggestion means for suggesting an operation of the operation means,
During either the first half or the second half of the period after the operation suggestion by the operation suggestion means is made until the operation validity period of the operation means has elapsed, the teaching by the teaching means is performed based on the operation of the operation means. and the other is a teaching non-compatible period in which the teaching is not performed even if the operating means is operated. Game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player can select whether or not to receive instruction by himself/herself without complicating the configuration excessively. This is preferable in order to improve player satisfaction.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature may be modified as follows. In other words, "Features E3 to E13 are characterized in that a teaching start period in which the teaching is started by the teaching means elapses before the operational validity period of the operating means elapses. The gaming machine described in any one of the following is also possible.

Feature E15. The performance execution means is configured to execute the operation-compatible performance by displacing the decoration of the movable performance device that is the target of the operation from a performance standby position to a performance execution position,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E14, wherein the performance execution positions of the decorations are configured such that they do not overlap each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Since the performance execution positions of the decorations of each movable performance device do not overlap with each other, if a movable performance device other than the movable performance device is being watched, there is a high possibility that the movement of the decoration will be overlooked. By applying the technical idea shown in feature E3 and the like to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the impact of the operation-responsive performance from being lowered due to overlooking the movement of the decoration.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Features E3 to E15 to Features E1 to E2.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E15 may be applied to the features A to D groups.

<Characteristics Group F>
The following feature group F is based on the following: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature F1. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
A performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a performance corresponding to an operation (for example, a sixth special performance) based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation validity period. A gaming machine with
a switching means for switching the operating means from a first mode to a second mode having a larger operation stroke than the first mode by displacing the operating section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
In a situation where the operating means is in the first form, the operating part is displaced to a predetermined position (for example, a maximum pressing position) further in the predetermined direction than a standby position of the operating part in the first form. a holding mechanism (hold mechanism 795) for holding the operation part located at the predetermined position from returning to the standby position when
A gaming machine characterized in that the reservation is canceled when the operating means switches from the first mode to the second mode.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature F1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, it is advantageous to increase the amount of displacement of the operating section in order to strengthen the impact when switching to the second mode. However, if the amount of displacement is simply increased, there is a concern that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means in the second embodiment. This is undesirable because it may cause the operating means to malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, as a preliminary operation before switching to the second mode, the operating section is kept at a predetermined position further back than the standby position in the first mode, so that the switch to the second mode is possible. The amount of displacement at the time of switching can be earned. This makes it possible to more suitably exhibit the effect of increasing the attention level while resolving the above-mentioned structural concerns.

Feature F2. When the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, operation suggestion means is provided for suggesting to the player to operate the operating section before the switching,
The retaining means is configured to restrict displacement of the operating section from the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operating section is displaced to the predetermined position by operating the operating means in accordance with the suggestion by the operation suggesting means. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that:

According to feature F2, by suggesting the operation of the operating section before switching to the second mode and holding the operating section displaced to a predetermined position by the player's operation at a predetermined position, The effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F3. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (operation button 721) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a manipulation-compatible performance (for example, a first special performance, etc.) based on the operation of the operation unit during the valid operation period. A gaming machine comprising:
a switching means for switching the operating means from a first mode to a second mode having a larger operation stroke than the first mode by displacing the operating section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
In a situation where the operating means is in the first form, the operating part is displaced to a predetermined position (for example, a maximum pressing position) further in the predetermined direction than a standby position of the operating part in the first form. a regulating means (hold mechanism 795) for regulating displacement of the operating section located at the predetermined position in the opposite direction when
A gaming machine characterized in that the regulation by the regulation unit is canceled when the operation unit switches from the first mode to the second mode.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature F3, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, it is advantageous to increase the amount of displacement of the operating section in order to strengthen the impact when switching to the second mode. However, if the amount of displacement is simply increased, there is a concern that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means in the second embodiment. This is undesirable because it may cause the operating means to malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, as a preliminary operation before switching to the second mode, the operating section is kept at a predetermined position further back than the standby position in the first mode, so that the switch to the second mode is possible. The amount of displacement at the time of switching can be earned. This makes it possible to more suitably exhibit the effect of increasing the attention level while resolving the above-mentioned structural concerns.

Feature F4. When the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, operation suggestion means is provided for suggesting to the player to operate the operating section before the switching,
The regulating means is configured to restrict displacement of the operating section from the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operating section is displaced to the predetermined position by operating the operating means in accordance with the suggestion by the operation suggesting means. The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that:

According to feature F4, the operation of the operating section is suggested before switching to the second mode, and the operating section that has been displaced to a predetermined position by the player's operation is held at a predetermined position, thereby achieving the operation shown in feature F3 above. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F5. The regulating means is switchable between a regulating state in which displacement of the operating portion in the opposite direction is restricted and a permissible state in which displacement of the operating portion in the opposite direction is permitted,
The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that, when the operation suggestion is made by the operation suggestion means, the regulation means is switched to the regulation state.

If the restriction means is configured to switch to the restriction state when an operation suggestion is made by the operation suggestion means, the response from operation to reaching a predetermined position can be reduced without making the responsiveness for switching to the restriction state excessively high. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid a delay in the timing at which the regulation is activated.

Feature F6. The production execution means executes the operation-compatible production using a production device (for example, a symbol display device 253) provided at a different position from the operation means when the operation means is operated according to the suggestion by the operation suggestion means. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or feature F5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing.

By guiding the player's line of sight to the production device when holding the operation unit in a predetermined position, the subsequent behavior (switching to the second mode) from the movement of the regulating means is suppressed from being exposed. can.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F3, further comprising means for displacing the operating section to the predetermined position when the switching section switches the operating section from the first mode to the second mode.

If the configuration is such that the operating section is forcibly displaced to a predetermined position before switching to the second mode as shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature F1 etc. is achieved compared to a configuration that depends on the player's operation, for example. Opportunities to demonstrate this can be suitably secured.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, wherein the predetermined position is the deepest position of the operation section in the predetermined direction.

If the predetermined position is set to the innermost position as shown in feature F8, the effects shown in feature F1 etc. can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature F9. The operating means includes the operating section, a base section (movable base 741) that is disposed further back than the operating section in the predetermined direction and is configured to be movable relative to the operating section; It has an operation unit that is combined with an urging section (coil spring 745) disposed between the operation section and the base section and urging the operation section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The regulating means regulates displacement of the operating section in the opposite direction against the biasing force of the biasing section,
The switching means includes a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
The restriction by the restriction means is released simultaneously with the start of displacement of the operating unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism or during the displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F8, characterized in that the gaming machine has the following configuration.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the movement after the restriction is released by the restriction means and the displacement of the operating unit by the drive mechanism in parallel, in order to exhibit the hardening shown in feature F3 etc., it is possible to Decrease in responsiveness can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F10. The switching means includes a motor (stepping motor 753) that is the drive source of the drive mechanism, and a control unit (MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that controls the drive of the motor,
A displacement period of the operating unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism and a displacement period of the operating unit in the opposite direction by the urging force of the urging section partially overlap. The gaming machine according to feature F9.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the movement after the restriction is released by the restriction means and the displacement of the operating unit by the drive mechanism in parallel, in order to exhibit the hardening shown in feature F3 etc., it is possible to Decrease in responsiveness can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F11. When the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, operation suggestion means is provided for suggesting to the player to operate the operating section before the switching,
The regulating means is configured to restrict displacement of the operating section from the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operating section is displaced to the predetermined position by operating the operating means in accordance with the suggestion by the operation suggesting means. It becomes,
The switching means switches the operating means to the second mode based on the fact that the operating section is operated according to the suggestion by the operation suggesting means and the operating section reaches the predetermined position, and the operating section switches to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F10, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured not to switch to the second mode if the predetermined position is not reached.

In a configuration in which an operation of the operating section is suggested and the operation causes the operating section to be displaced to a predetermined position, whether or not the predetermined position is reached depends on the player's operation. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring a configuration that avoids switching to the second form when the predetermined position is not reached, it is possible to prevent the effects shown in feature F1 etc. from being effectively exerted. can.

Feature F12. When the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means, operation suggestion means is provided for suggesting to the player to operate the operating section before the switching,
The performance execution means includes means for executing a predetermined performance as the operation corresponding performance based on the fact that the operation section is operated according to the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the operation section is displaced to the predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature F11.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that a predetermined effect (operation compatible effect) is executed upon reaching a predetermined position, preparation for switching to the second mode is completed when the player operates the operation unit aiming at the predetermined effect. I will do it. With such a configuration, the effects shown in feature F1 etc. can be suitably exhibited.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features F3 to F12 to the features F1 to F2.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F12 may be applied to the features A group to E group.

<Feature G group>
The following characteristic group G is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that launches game balls into the game area based on a player's launch operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature G1. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a manipulation-compatible performance (for example, a first special performance, etc.) based on the operation of the operation unit during the valid operation period. A gaming machine comprising:
The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form in which the operating stroke of the operating part is larger than that of the first form,
The performance execution means is
switching means for switching the operating means from the first form to the second form;
A first special performance (a non-linked performance of the third movable performance device 803) and a second special performance, which are the operations corresponding to the operation, based on the operation of the operation unit after switching to the second mode by the switching means. (Special performance means for performing any of the interlocking performances of the third movable performance device 803);
A gaming machine comprising: a return means for returning the operating means to the second mode when a first special performance is executed by the special performance means.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature G1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. When the operating section is operated after switching the operating means to the second mode, either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs even though expectations for the second special effect have been aroused, there is a concern that a strong impression will remain that the second form→operation was a waste. In this case, there is a concern that even if the operation means is switched to the second type to prompt the user to perform the operation, the chances of the operation being performed will be reduced. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the first special effect is executed, the operating means returns to the second mode. By making it possible to perform the operation again in the second form, it is possible to maintain expectations for an opportunity for a highly anticipated operation-corresponding performance to occur. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and to improve the degree of attention to the game using the operating means.

Feature G2. Information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes the winning process for the actuating ports function) and
Acquired information storage means (retained ball storage area 632 provided in RAM 604 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). function to perform processing such as), and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode);
An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Performance execution means (notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes a manipulation-compatible performance (for example, a first special performance, etc.) based on the operation of the operation unit during the valid operation period. A gaming machine comprising:
The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form in which the operating stroke of the operating part is larger than that of the first form,
The performance execution means is
switching means for switching the operating means from the first form to the second form;
Based on the fact that the operation unit has been operated after switching to the second mode by the switching means, a first special performance (third movable performance) with a relatively low expectation level that is the transition response result is set as the operation corresponding performance. special performance means for executing either a non-linked performance of the device 803) or a second special performance with a relatively high expectation level as a result of the transition (interlocked performance of the third movable performance device 803);
A gaming machine comprising: a return means for returning the operation means to the second mode when a first special performance is executed by the special performance means.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature G2, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. When the operating unit is operated after switching to the second mode of the operating means, a first special performance with a relatively low level of expectation, which is a transition response result, and a second special performance, with a relatively high expectation level, which is a transition response result. Either of these will be executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs even though expectations for the second special effect have been aroused, there is a concern that a strong impression will remain that the second form→operation was a waste. In this case, there is a concern that even if the operation means is switched to the second type to prompt the user to perform the operation, the chances of the operation being performed will be reduced. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the first special effect is executed, the operating means returns to the second mode. By making it possible to perform the operation again in the second form, it is possible to maintain expectations for an opportunity for a highly anticipated operation-corresponding performance to occur. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and to improve the degree of attention to the game using the operating means.

Feature G3. The special performance means is a first execution means,
The performance execution means executes the second special performance (interlocked performance of the third movable performance device 803) based on the operation of the operation section after the operation means returns to the second mode by the return means. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, characterized by having a second execution means for executing the game.

As shown in this feature, when the first special performance on the disadvantageous side is executed, the second special performance can be generated by returning to the second form → re-operating, so that the first special performance is When this occurs, it is possible to suppress a rapid drop in the level of attention of players looking forward to the second special performance.

Feature G4. In any one of features G1 to G3, the operation means is configured to be in the first mode when the second special performance is executed by the special performance means. The game machine described.

A configuration in which returning to the second form is avoided when the second special performance on the advantageous side is executed is a configuration in which return to the second form is possible only when the first special performance on the disadvantageous side is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game when the first special performance is executed.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that a displacement speed of the operating section when switching the operating means from the first mode to the second mode is changeable. .

By diversifying the displacement speed of the operating section when switching the operating means from the first mode to the second mode, it is possible to suitably suppress the return operation from becoming monotonous.

Feature G6. It is characterized by comprising a switching means for switching the displacement speed of the operating part from a first speed to a second speed faster than the first speed when the operating means is set to the second mode by the return means. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

As shown in this feature, by ensuring a driving period at a low speed (first speed), it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the movement of the operating unit.

Feature G7. The return means is configured to start the return operation of the operation means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the earlier the timing at which the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the longer the displacement period at the first speed becomes.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the drive period at low speed (first speed) can be ensured as long as possible. Thereby, the effect shown in feature G6 can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature G8. Regardless of the timing at which the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first speed and the The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, characterized in that the second speed is switched.

As shown in feature G6, etc., it is preferable to gain drive time at low speeds in order to improve player satisfaction. However, the fact that the progress of the performance is delayed by such a function causes excessive diversification of the progress pattern of the performance. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the period from the start of the game round until the return to the second mode is completed is limited to be the same regardless of the timing at which the predetermined start condition is satisfied. By doing so, the above concerns can be suitably eliminated.

Feature G9. The displacement speed of the operating section when the operating means is set to the second mode by the return means is slower than the displacement speed of the operating section when the switching means sets the operating means to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

It is preferable to quickly switch to the second form for the first time in order to strengthen the impact. By making the period required for the first switching different from the period required for the second switching, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the switching to the second mode has simply occurred twice. In particular, differentiating the game so that the second time switching to the second form takes longer than the first time switching to the second form allows you to gain time to visually track the movements when returning to the game. This is preferable in terms of improving customer satisfaction.

Feature G10. The operating means includes the operating section, a base section (movable base 741) that is disposed further back than the operating section in the predetermined direction and is configured to be movable relative to the operating section; an operation unit that is combined with a biasing section (coil spring 745) disposed between the operation section and the base section and urging the operation section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The switching means includes a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
The base portion is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation portion disposed at a predetermined detection position,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the operation corresponding performance when it is determined that the operation unit has reached the predetermined detection position based on the detection information from the detection sensor,
The return means is configured to operate the drive mechanism to return to the second mode when it is determined that the operating section has moved away from the predetermined detection position based on detection information from the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the return operation is started when it is detected that the player has moved away from a predetermined detection position, the return operation starts at the timing when the player releases his/her hand from the operation unit. The correlation with timing can be strengthened. Thereby, even when the operator takes his hand off the operating unit, the degree of attention to the operating means can be suitably improved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in Features G1 to G10 may be applied to Features A to F.

<Feature H group>
The following characteristic group H is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that launches game balls into the game area based on a player's launch operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature H1. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
an operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising variable means (notification/performance control device 143 and lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operating section to any one of a plurality of positions after the operating section is operated.

According to feature H1, after the special effect is executed by operating the operating section, by separating the operating section from the operating section, the operating section is displaced to any one of a plurality of positions. In this way, if the configuration is such that the displacement destination (return destination) of the operation section can be changed depending on the situation, it is possible to suitably suppress attention to the operation means from rapidly decreasing due to the operation.

Feature H2. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). etc.) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
an operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
Variable means (notification/performance control device 143 and lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operating section to any of a plurality of positions;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: position determining means for determining a position to which the operating section is to be displaced by the variable means, in accordance with a determination result by the transition determining means.

According to feature H2, the position of the operating section may be changed to a position determined according to the determination result by the transition determining means. In this way, if the configuration allows the displacement destination of the operation unit to change depending on the determination result, the player's attention will be drawn to the position to which the operation means is displaced, contributing to an increase in the level of attention to the game. can.

Feature H3. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). etc.) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
an operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
Variable means (notification/performance control device 143 and lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operating section to any of a plurality of positions after the operating section is operated;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: position determining means for determining a position to which the operating section is to be displaced by the variable means, in accordance with a determination result by the transition determining means.

According to feature H3, after the special effect is executed by operating the operating section, by releasing the hand from the operating section, the operating section is displaced to any one of a plurality of positions. This position is determined according to the determination result by the transition determining means. In this way, if the configuration is such that the displacement destination (return destination) of the operating section can be changed in accordance with the determination result, it is possible to suitably suppress attention to the operating means from rapidly decreasing due to the operation.

Feature H4. Any one of Features H1 to Feature H3, wherein the operating unit is configured to be placed at any of the plurality of positions after being placed at any of the plurality of positions. The gaming machine described in item 1.

When changing the position of the operating part using the variable means, the operating part may be placed at a position that is not one of the plurality of positions mentioned above, and then placed at any one of the plurality of positions. , it is possible to prevent the behavior of the operating unit from becoming difficult to understand.

Feature H5. The plurality of positions are set to be lined up in the predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the operating stroke of the operating section is configured to vary depending on the position where the operating section is arranged.

According to feature H5, the difference between each position can be emphasized by not only changing the appearance of the position of the operating part but also causing a difference in the operating stroke when actually operating the operating part.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the plurality of positions include a position before operation.

As shown in feature H6, if the configuration includes the pre-operation position in the plurality of positions, it is possible to realize diversification of effects without excessively increasing the number of the plurality of positions.

Feature H7. The plurality of positions include a first position that is an initial position and a second position that has a larger operation stroke than the first position,
The variable means is a first variable means,
comprising a second variable means for switching the operating means from a first mode in which the operating section is in the first position to a second mode in which the operating section is in the second position;
The first variable means is configured to move the operating section to the plurality of positions after the operation when the operating section is operated in a situation where the operating means is in the second mode by the second variable means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be displaced in any one of the following directions.

As shown in this feature, if the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, in a situation where the player's attention is directed to the operating means due to switching to the second mode, by changing the position of the operating section using the first variable means, the change is not overlooked by the player. It is possible to suitably reduce the chances of being affected.

Feature H8. The displacement speed of the operating section when switching from the first mode to the second mode by the second variable means, and the displacement speed when the operating section is placed in any of the plurality of positions by the first variable means. The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized in that the displacement speeds of the operating parts are different.

As shown in feature H7, when the shape changes of the operating means occur continuously, it is not preferable to simply repeat the shape changes in order to improve the attention level. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by providing a difference between the displacement speed of the operating section during the shape change before operation and the displacement speed of the operating section during the shape change after operation. .

Feature H9. The displacement speed of the operating section when switching from the first mode to the second mode using the second variable means is higher than the displacement speed of the operating section when the operating section is placed in any of the plurality of positions using the first variable means. The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the displacement speed of the operating section is lower.

As shown in feature H7, when the shape changes of the operating means occur continuously, it is not preferable to increase the attention level if the impression becomes strong that the shape changes are simply repeated. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such inconvenience can be solved by creating a difference by making the displacement speed of the operating section slower during the shape change after operation than the displacement speed of the operating section during the shape change before operation. can suppress the occurrence of In the deformation after the operation, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the reached position, so by purposefully making the displacement slowly, the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused.

Feature H10. The effect execution means includes means for executing a special effect which is the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit disposed at any of the plurality of positions by the first variable means,
Features H7 to H9 are characterized in that the position at which the operation section is placed by the first variable means is determined to be a position that is correlated with the special performance executed by the performance execution means. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

As shown in feature H10, the position where the operation part is arranged by the first variable means is defined to be a position that is correlated with the special performance executed by the performance execution means, thereby providing a connection to the performance. be able to. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature H11. Any one of features H1 to H10, further comprising a stopping means for stopping the operating section at the operating position before the operating section is displaced to any of the plurality of positions by the variable means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the configuration that delays the displacement of the operation by the variable means as shown in feature H11, it is possible to prevent the movement of the operation section after operation from being hidden by the player's hand and becoming difficult to see.

Note that the technical ideas shown in Features H1 to H11 may be applied to Features A to G.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature group I is defined as: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature I1. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). function to perform lottery etc.),
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A gaming device (production button device 40) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and can be switched to a plurality of forms with different appearances;
A gaming machine comprising: switching means for switching the form of the gaming machine in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature I1, the form of the gaming device provided on the front part of the gaming machine is configured to change in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In other words, the form of the gaming machine changes as the game rounds progress. By changing the form of the gaming machine installed close to the player in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the game is progressing, and to dramatically increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature I2. Information acquisition means (winning processing for actuating ports in main controller 162) that obtains special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to actuating ports 83a, 83b);
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). function to perform lottery etc.),
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
An operating means (acting button device 40) having an operating section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front side of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction by a player;
It has a display screen (display screen 253a), and includes an operation-compatible performance execution means (symbol display device 253) that executes an operation-compatible performance based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen,
The operating means has a plurality of standby positions set as standby positions for the operating section,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a changing means for changing the operating section from one standby position to another standby position in correspondence with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature I2, the standby position of the operating section provided on the front face of the gaming machine is changed to correspond to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In other words, the form of the operating means changes as the game progresses. In this way, by changing the shape of the operating means located close to the player each time the game progresses, it is emphasized that the game is progressing, and the attention to the game is dramatically increased. be able to.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the plurality of standby positions are set so as to be lined up in the predetermined direction.

It is preferable to increase the number of standby positions for the operating section in order to achieve diversification. However, if the standby position is set inadvertently, it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means, and there is a concern that this will be a factor that impairs the reliability of the operating means. In this regard, by setting the plurality of standby positions shown in this feature so as to be lined up in a predetermined direction, such concerns can be suitably eliminated.

Feature I4. Each of the plurality of standby positions is an operation standby position in which the operation unit can be operated;
The player according to feature I2 or feature I3, further comprising a suggesting means for suggesting to the player to operate the operating section in a situation where the waiting position of the operating section is changed by the changing means. Game machine.

By making the operation unit operable no matter which of the multiple standby positions the player is placed in, it is possible for the player to pay attention to which standby position the operation suggestion will occur under. can be directed to

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, wherein the change of the standby position by the changing means is terminated based on an operation of the operating section.

By configuring the change of the standby position by the change means to finally end based on the operation of the operation section, the player's attention can be drawn to the situation in which the operation suggestion occurs.

Feature I6. The change means changes the operation stroke of the operation unit every time the number of special information preceding the special information that triggered the change by the change means among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases. The gaming machine according to feature I4 or feature I5, further comprising means for changing the position of the operating section by expanding the operating section.

As shown in this feature, by changing the position of the operating section so that the operating stroke of the operating section is extended each time the number of preceding special information decreases, the player can easily control how far the expansion of the operating stroke continues. It can draw attention. Here, since there is a limit on the number of special information that can be stored, there is also a practical upper limit on the expansion of the operation stroke, and the number of special information stored and the form of the operation means (especially This resulted in increased attention to the relationship between the original form (the initial form of change).

Feature I7. The changing means reduces the operation stroke of the operation every time the number of special information that precedes the special information that triggered the change by the changing means among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases. The gaming machine according to feature I4 or feature I5, further comprising means for changing the position of the operating section in a manner that causes the user to change the position of the operating section.

As shown in this feature, by changing the position of the operation part so that the operation stroke of the operation part is reduced or shortened each time the number of preceding special information decreases, the player can control how long the reduction or reduction of the operation stroke continues. It can draw attention. Here, since there is a limit on the number of special information that can be stored, there is also a practical lower limit on the reduction of the operation stroke, and the number of special information stored and the form of the operation means (especially This resulted in increased attention to the relationship between the original form (the initial form of change).

Feature I8. comprising a notification means (pending display area NE) for notifying information indicating the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
Any one of features I2 to I7, characterized in that the changing means is configured to change the position of the operating section at a timing when the information notified by the notifying means is updated. The gaming machine described in .

If the configuration is such that the position of the operating section is changed at the timing when the information notified by the notifying means is updated, the correlation between the movement of the operating section and the number of special information can be strengthened. As a result, the operating means essentially has a function as a notification means, and it becomes possible to easily sense that a game round has progressed in a situation where the player is paying attention to the operating means.

Feature I9. a first state in which the position of the operating section and the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means are linked; and the position of the operating section and the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means are linked; The gaming machine according to any one of features I2 to I8, further comprising a switching means for switching to a second state in which the numbers are not linked.

As shown in feature I9, by making it possible to switch the number of special information and the position of the operation unit between interlocking and non-interlocking, it is possible to avoid restrictions on the original function of the operation means (function as a trigger for operation-compatible effects). This can be conveniently avoided.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Features I2 to I9 to Feature I1.

Furthermore, each of the technical ideas shown in Features I1 to I9 may be applied to Features A to H.

<Feature J group>
The following characteristic group J is defined as: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by the player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature J1. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143 and display) that executes an operation corresponding effect (for example, operation corresponding effect such as a first special effect) based on the displacement of the operation part to a predetermined detection position during the operation validity period. A gaming machine comprising a control device 142),
When a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in a game round related to a first special effect) is satisfied, the operation means changes from the first mode to a second mode in which the operation stroke of the operation section is larger than that of the first mode. It is possible to switch between two forms,
The performance execution means is
an operation suggestion means (a function for executing operation suggestion processing in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) for suggesting the player to operate the operation means when the form of the operation means is switched to the second form; ,
means for executing a special performance as the operation-compatible performance when the operation section is operated during the operation validity period and the operation means is in the second mode;
A gaming machine comprising: a shift means for shifting the predetermined detection position in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction before the suggestion by the operation suggestion means starts.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature J1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, an operation is suggested to the player. Prior to this suggestion, a predetermined detection position that triggers a special performance is shifted in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. As a result, although the operation stroke is visually enlarged, the operation stroke required to execute the special effect can be made smaller than it appears, which increases attention to the game and makes the operation more difficult. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J2. In the first embodiment, the shift means sets the predetermined detection position as a first detection position, and in the second embodiment, the shift means sets the predetermined detection position as a first detection position, which is closer to the front than the first detection position in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that the predetermined detection position is shifted so that there are two detection positions.

By shifting the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position when switching from the first form to the second form, the operation stroke is visually greatly expanded, but it is necessary for performing special effects. The operating stroke can be made smaller than it appears. Thereby, the effect shown in feature J1 can be suitably exhibited.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature may be modified as follows. That is, "the predetermined detection positions include a first detection position and a second detection position that is closer to the front side in the predetermined direction than the first detection position, and the shift means According to feature J1, the predetermined detection position is configured to be the first detection position, and in the second embodiment, the predetermined detection position is the second detection position. "Game machine."

Feature J3. A direction in which the operating stroke of the operating section is expanded by switching from the first form to the second form, and a direction in which the predetermined detection position is shifted in accordance with the switch from the first form to the second form. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration in which the above matches.

The configuration of the operating means is achieved by matching the direction in which the operating stroke is extended by switching from the first form to the second form and the direction in which the detection position is shifted by switching from the first form to the second form. complication can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J4. The shifting means performs the shifting so that an operation stroke that reaches the first detection position in the first mode and an operation stroke that reaches the second detection position in the second mode are the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3.

By making the stroke by which the operation is detected common in the first form and the second form, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in operability due to the enhancement of the performance function.

Feature J5. The shifting means is configured to shift the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position during a switching period of the operating means from the first mode to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

If the detection position is shifted during the period of switching from the first form to the second form, the period of waiting for the shift can be eliminated, contributing to the smooth progress of the performance.

Feature J6. A configuration in which a displacement of the operating section when switching the operating means from the first mode to the second mode and a shift of the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position are synchronized. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

If the configuration is such that the displacement of the operating section and the shift of the detection position are synchronized, there is no need for a shift waiting period, contributing to smooth progress of the performance.

Feature J7. The operating means is
the operating section; a base section (movable base 741) disposed on the back side of the operating section in the predetermined direction and movable relative to the operating section in the predetermined direction; the operating section and the base section; an operating unit (button unit 720) that is combined with an urging section (coil spring 745) disposed between the button and the operating section that urges the operating section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
The first mode and the second mode are switched by displacing the operation unit by the drive mechanism,
A detection sensor (detection sensor 791) that detects the operation section located at the predetermined detection position is disposed on the base part, and the effect execution means performs the operation based on the detection information from the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that it is configured to execute the special performance.

According to feature J7, the first mode is switched to the second mode by displacing the operating unit including the operating section, the base section, and the urging section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. At this time, by displacing the base portion (detection sensor) following the operation section, the positional relationship between the operation section and the detection sensor can be maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the stroke that is the operation detection in the first form and the second form the same.

Feature J8. comprising a resistance generating means for generating resistance against displacement of the operating section to the back side from the second detection position when the second mode is selected;
The second embodiment is characterized in that the operation stroke from the second detection position to the deepest position in the predetermined direction is larger than the operation stroke until reaching the second detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7.

By increasing the operating stroke further back than the second detection position, the force of the operating section can be weakened after the operation is detected. Thereby, the operating means and the player's hands can be suitably protected.

Feature J9. The performance execution means enters a standby state for executing the special performance based on the operation unit reaching the second detection position, and in the standby state, does not start the special performance until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, characterized in that the gaming machine has means for delaying the delay.

If the special effect is started when the operating section reaches the second detection position, the operating section may remain unoperated to the deepest position. In this regard, as shown in this feature, even if the second detection position is reached, the start of the special performance is delayed instead of starting immediately, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J10. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143 and display) that executes an operation corresponding effect (for example, operation corresponding effect such as a first special effect) based on the displacement of the operation part to a predetermined detection position during the operation validity period. A gaming machine comprising a control device 142),
When a predetermined switching condition (development to a reach display in a game round related to a first special effect) is satisfied, the operation means changes from the first mode to a second mode in which the operation stroke of the operation section is larger than that of the first mode. It is possible to switch between two forms,
The predetermined detection position includes a first position and a second position that are different in the predetermined direction,
In the first form, the effect execution means has means for setting the predetermined detection position as the first position, and in the second form, setting the predetermined detection position as the second position. A gaming machine featuring:

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature J10, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, if a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of operation detection positions are selectively used depending on whether the mode is the first mode or the second mode, the degree of freedom can be increased regarding the trigger for executing the operation corresponding production.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in feature J1 to feature J9 to feature J10.

Furthermore, each of the technical ideas shown in Features J1 to Features J10 may be applied to Features A to I.

<Feature K group>
The following characteristic group K is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by the player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature K1. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation unit;
A gaming machine comprising a drive device (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operating section in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The drive device is
a position specifying means (rotary encoder 792) for specifying the position of the operating section in the predetermined direction when the operating section is displaced in the predetermined direction based on the player's operation;
and a resistance variable means (stepping motor 753) that varies the operating resistance (resistance torque) resisting the displacement of the operating section in the predetermined direction based on the position specified by the position specifying means. A gaming machine with special features.

The resistance variable means amplifies the operating resistance so that the operating resistance is greater when the operating portion is located on the back side than when the operating portion is located on the near side in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine characterized by having the following configuration.

As shown in this feature, when the operating section is displaced in a predetermined direction, the position of the operating section in the predetermined direction is specified, and the operating resistance is varied based on the specified position, so that the operating section can be operated. The tactile changes that occur in the hands make it possible to create innovative performances that have never existed before.

Feature K2. The resistance variable means amplifies the operating resistance so that the operating resistance is greater when the operating portion is located on the back side than when the operating portion is located on the near side in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that the gaming machine has the following configuration.

As shown in feature K2, if the operation resistance is amplified so that the resistance becomes larger on the back side, it is possible to reduce the impact during operation and contribute to the protection of the player's hands and operation means.

Feature K3. The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form in which the operating stroke of the operating part is larger than that of the first form,
The position specifying means includes means for specifying the position of the operating section in the predetermined direction when the operating section is in the second mode,
The variable resistance means is configured to change the operating resistance against displacement of the operating section in the predetermined direction when the operating means is in the second mode. The gaming machine described in K2.

For deformation type buttons, occurrence of deformation (second form) is often an opportunity. Due to these circumstances, in the second embodiment, there is a high possibility that the operating section will be operated with force. In such operations, there is a concern that the impact generated on the hands and operating means will be large. In this regard, as shown in feature K3, if the configuration is such that the operational resistance is amplified so that the operational resistance becomes larger on the back side in a predetermined direction, the shock at the time of operation is alleviated and the player's hands and operating means are It can contribute to protection.

Feature K4. The variable resistance means is configured such that the operating resistance generated remains constant until the operating section reaches a predetermined position, and after reaching the predetermined position, the resistance varies depending on the operating mode of the operating section. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to change the operating resistance generated by the game.

Regarding a hardened type operation part, it is not desirable to be able to tell whether it is hard or not the moment you touch it. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the operating resistance is kept constant until the predetermined position is reached, and the operating resistance is changed at the back of the predetermined position, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be effectively avoided. It can be suppressed.

Feature K5. According to any one of features K1 to K4, the resistance variable means is configured such that the increase rate of the operating resistance is larger on the rear side than on the front side in the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

As for a hardened type operation section, if the hardness is drastically changed on the back side, there is a high possibility that the player will be mistaken as having reached the innermost position. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the increase rate of the operating resistance is greater on the rear side than on the front side, as shown in this feature, the operating resistance changes smoothly, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed. Further, it is preferable to configure the device so that the increase rate of the operating resistance is larger on the rear side than on the front side, in order to reduce the impact when operating the operating section.

Feature K6. comprising an operation determination means for determining an operation of the operation section,
The effect executing means is configured to execute the operation corresponding effect when the operation determining means determines that the operation part has been operated,
According to any one of features K1 to K5, the resistance variable means is configured to amplify the operation resistance when the operation determination means determines that the operation section has been operated. The game machine described.

According to feature K6, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in reaching the position where the operation determination is made due to the increase in the operation resistance, while leaving room for enjoying the change in the operation resistance after the operation is detected.

Feature K7. The drive device is
Calculating means for calculating a displacement speed of the operating section in the predetermined direction;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, further comprising a correction device that corrects the increase rate of the operating resistance according to a calculation result by the calculation device.

According to feature K7, if the increase rate of the operation resistance is corrected according to the displacement speed of the operation section, the following measures can be taken. In other words, when the displacement speed is large, the buffering function is strengthened by increasing the rate of increase in the operating resistance, and when the displacement speed is large, the rise of the operating resistance is accelerated, causing a change in the operating resistance. You can avoid things that are difficult to understand.

Feature K8. The entire area in which the operating portion is displaced in the predetermined direction is composed of a correction area in which the increase rate is corrected by the correction means and a non-correction area in which the increase rate is not corrected by the correction means, and The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the non-correction section is set to be on the near side in the predetermined direction, and the correction section is set on the back side in the operating direction.

As shown in this feature, by setting the non-correction section to the front side in a predetermined direction and the correction section to the back side in the operating direction, the player can identify the presence or absence of hardening at the moment he touches the operating section. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K9. The gaming machine according to feature K8, wherein the calculation section in which the displacement speed of the operating section is calculated by the calculation means is the non-correction section.

If the configuration is such that the speed is divided into a non-correction section and a correction section, and then the speed is calculated in the non-correction section and the result is reflected in the correction section, the operation resistance suddenly becomes lighter during the operation stroke, etc. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

Feature K10. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for a first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation unit;
A gaming machine comprising a drive device (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operating section in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The drive device is
a speed calculating means for calculating a displacement speed of the operating section in the predetermined direction when the operating section is displaced in the predetermined direction based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a resistance variable means for varying an operation resistance against displacement of the operation section in the predetermined direction based on a calculation result by the speed calculation means.

As shown in feature K10, by adopting a configuration in which the operating resistance generated in the operating section changes depending on the displacement speed (operating speed) of the operating section, novel operability that has never been seen before can be realized.

Feature K11. The resistance variable means sets the operation resistance to a relatively small first operation resistance when the speed calculated by the speed calculation means is slower than the predetermined speed, and the resistance variable means sets the operation resistance to a relatively small first operation resistance, so that the speed calculated by the speed calculation means is lower than the predetermined speed. The gaming machine according to feature K10, characterized in that the operating resistance is configured to be a relatively large second operating resistance when the speed is faster than the speed.

As shown in this feature, the operation resistance is made relatively small when the operation is performed slowly, and made relatively large when the operation is performed vigorously, thereby protecting the operation means. This can contribute to ease of operation.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features K1 to K9 to the features K10 to K11.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features K1 to K11 may be applied to the features A group to J group.

<Feature L group>
The following characteristic group L is defined as "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature L1. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player; ,
The gaming machine is equipped with a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section, ,
The performance execution means is
When a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, a switching means (MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that switches the form of the operating means from the first form to a second form in which the operation stroke of the operating part is longer than the first form. (a function that executes processing for switching formats);
means for executing a special performance as the operation-compatible performance when the operation means is operated during the valid operation period and the operation means is in the second mode;
When the operating unit is operated in a situation where the operating means is arranged to wait at a position on the back side in the predetermined direction with respect to the operating unit and is in the second form; and a contact portion (movable base 741) that contacts the operating portion from the back side in the predetermined direction,
The standby position of the contact portion may be changed in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction as the switching means switches from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, the position of the abutting part is changed and the operating part is operated and displaced in a predetermined direction, so that the operating part and the abutting part come into contact with each other. Thereby, tactile changes can be conveyed to the player through the operation section. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is just around the corner. This is preferable in order to facilitate the operation in the second mode in which the operation stroke is extended and to suitably exhibit the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect.

Feature L2. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player; ,
The gaming machine is equipped with a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section, ,
The performance execution means is
When a predetermined switching condition is met, a switching means for switching the form of the operating means from the first form to a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form (for form switching in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) function) and
means for executing a special performance as the operation-compatible performance when the operation means is operated during the valid operation period and the operation means is in the second mode;
The operating means is disposed so as to stand by on the back side in the predetermined direction with respect to the operating section, and when the operating section is operated in the second mode, the operating means a contact portion (movable base 741) that contacts the part from the back side in the predetermined direction and is movable in the predetermined direction together with the operating part;
When the operating unit is operated in a situation where the operating means is arranged to wait at a position on the back side in the predetermined direction with respect to the operating unit and is in the second form; has an abutting part (movable base 741) that abuts the operating part from the back side in the predetermined direction and can be displaced in the predetermined direction together with the operating part while maintaining the abutted state;
The standby position of the contact portion may be changed in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction as the switching means switches from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, the position of the abutting part is changed and the operating part is operated and displaced in a predetermined direction, so that the operating part and the abutting part come into contact with each other. Thereby, tactile changes can be conveyed to the player through the operation section. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is just around the corner. This is preferable in order to facilitate the operation in the second mode in which the operation stroke is extended and to suitably exhibit the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect.

Feature L3. comprising an operation determination means for determining an operation of the operation means,
In the second embodiment, the contact portion is configured to come into contact with the operation portion after the operation portion passes through a determination position by the operation determination means or when the operation portion reaches the determination position. The gaming machine described in L2.

By configuring the operation section and the contact section to come into contact with each other after the operation section passes through the determination position or when the operation section reaches the determination position, it is possible to indicate to the player that the operation has been completed.

Feature L4. The standby position of the abutting portion is defined as an operating stroke in which the abutting portion and the operating portion abut in the first mode, and an operating stroke in which the abutting portion and the operating portion abut in the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to change so that the numbers are the same.

As shown in this feature, the operation stroke in which the operation part and the contact part abut in the first form and the operation stroke in which the operation part and the contact part abut in the second form are brought into contact so that they are the same. By changing the position of the part, it is possible to greatly change the appearance of the operating means depending on each form and to avoid making the operation in one form more difficult than the operation in the other form.

Feature L5. The operating means includes the operating section, a base section (movable base 741) that is provided on the back side of the operating section in the predetermined direction and is movable relative to the operating section in the predetermined direction, and the operating section. and the base portion, and includes an operation unit (button unit 720) combined with an urging section (coil spring 745) that urges the operation section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Become,
The switching means includes a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the abutment portion is formed on the base portion.

As shown in this feature, if the operation unit is configured to be displaced by a drive mechanism, switching between the first mode and the second mode described above can be suitably realized. Here, if the operating unit is constituted by the operating section, the base section, and the urging section, and this operating unit is configured to be displaced, the base section on which the abutting section is formed can also be displaced following the operating section. Therefore, the stroke of contact between the operating section and the contact section can be made the same in each form.

Feature L6. The drive mechanism includes a motor (stepping motor 753) that displaces the operation unit in the opposite direction,
The switching means is configured to generate resistance in the motor that prevents displacement of the operating unit in the predetermined direction during the second mode,
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature L5 is configured such that the resistance generated in the motor is larger than the urging force of the urging section.

In the second embodiment, the resistance generated in the motor is configured to be larger than the biasing force of the biasing section. Therefore, when the operating portion is operated in the second embodiment, the operating portion and the base portion do not come into contact with each other, and the operating unit can be prevented from being displaced in a predetermined direction. Thereby, the effect shown in feature L1 etc. can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein a plurality of the contact portions are formed so as to surround a central axis of the operation portion.

In the configuration in which the operating portion and the abutting portion are in contact with each other in the second embodiment, there is a concern that the posture of the operating portion may be disturbed when the operating portion contacts, which may cause the object to get caught. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress disturbances in the posture of the operating section when the operating section and the contact section are in contact with each other. Suppressing posture disturbances in this manner is advantageous in achieving smooth movement of the operating section even under conditions where the operating stroke is extended.

Feature L8. An operation means (operation button 721 of the production button device 40) having an operation section (button unit 720) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player; ,
The gaming machine is equipped with a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section, ,
A switching means for switching the form of the operating means between the first form and the second form having a larger operation stroke than the first form based on the player's adjustment operation (form switching means in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) function),
The operating means is disposed so as to stand by on the back side in the predetermined direction with respect to the operating section, and when the operating section is operated in the second mode, the operating section has an abutting portion (movable base 741) that abuts from the back side in the predetermined direction and is movable in the predetermined direction together with the operating portion;
The standby position of the contact portion is changed in the predetermined direction as the switching means switches from the first mode to the second mode,
The operation stroke in which the abutting part and the operating part abut in the first embodiment is the same as the operating stroke in which the abutting part and the operating part abut in the second embodiment, A gaming machine characterized in that the standby position of the contact portion is changed as the switching means switches between the first mode and the second mode.

If the operating means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature L8, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operating means and draw attention to the operating means itself. Here, when the operating means is in the second form, the position of the abutting part is changed in a predetermined direction, and the operating part is operated and displaced in the predetermined direction, so that the operating part and the abutting part come into contact. come into contact with Thereby, tactile changes can be conveyed to the player through the operation section. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is just around the corner. In addition, the position of the abutting part is changed so that the operating stroke in which the operating part and the abutting part abut in the first form is the same as the operating stroke in which the operating part and the abutting part abut in the second form. With this configuration, it is possible to greatly change the appearance of the operating means depending on each form, and to avoid making the operation in one form more difficult than the operation in the other form.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features L1 to L7 to the feature L8.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features L1 to L8 may be applied to the features A to K groups.

<Feature M group>
The following characteristic group M is as follows: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature M1. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (operation button 721) provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
The gaming machine is equipped with a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section, ,
a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the valid operation period;
and a period determination means for determining a period during which the operation section is located at the second detection position during the operation validity period,
The effect execution means is configured to perform a process when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means to have reached the first detection position reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determination means determines that the first detection position has been reached. It has means for executing a special performance that is the operation-compatible performance when the determined period becomes a predetermined period,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first detection position and the second detection position are set to be different positions in the predetermined direction.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a special effect is executed when the number of times of repeated tapping on the operating section reaches a predetermined number of times. Such repeated tapping operations may give the impression that they are troublesome to the player, but in the configuration shown in this feature, by operating the operating section to the second detection position and maintaining that state, the above-mentioned operations can be effectively performed. It is treated the same as when a continuous hit operation is performed. In other words, the player can select whether to actually make consecutive hits or to use a long press as a substitute for consecutive hits, thus meeting the various needs of the players. This is preferable in order to suitably perform the function of encouraging active participation in the game using the operating means.

Here, with regard to the operating means, there is a possibility that the operating mode switches from continuous tapping to long pressing due to reasons such as fatigue. At this time, if the acceptance of the operation is not quickly switched from determining the number of times to determining the period, there is a high possibility that the valid period will elapse in vain due to the time lag. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by configuring the first detection position for determining the number of times and the second detection position for determining the period to be shifted in a predetermined direction (operation direction), repeated hits can be made at one detection position. There is no need to distinguish between operation and long-press operation. Therefore, the time lag for switching from frequency determination to period determination can be minimized. Thereby, the effect of encouraging the operation of the operating means and improving the attention level to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature M2. An operation means (performance button device 40) having an operation section (operation button 721) provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
The gaming machine is equipped with a performance execution means (a function for executing processing for the first special performance in the MPU 912 of the notification/performance control device 143) that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section, ,
a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the valid operation period;
and a period determination means for determining a period during which the operation section is located at the second detection position during the operation validity period,
The effect execution means is configured to perform a process when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means to have reached the first detection position reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determination means determines that the first detection position has been reached. It has means for executing a special performance as the operation corresponding performance when the determined period becomes a predetermined period,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second detection position is set to be further back than the first detection position in the predetermined direction.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a special effect is executed when the number of times of repeated tapping on the operating section reaches a predetermined number of times. Such repeated tapping operations may give the impression that they are troublesome to the player, but in the configuration shown in this feature, by operating the operating section to the second detection position and maintaining that state, the above-mentioned operations can be effectively performed. It is treated the same as when a continuous hit operation is performed. In other words, the player can select whether to actually make consecutive hits or to use a long press as a substitute for consecutive hits, thus meeting the various needs of the players. This is preferable in order to suitably perform the function of encouraging active participation in the game using the operating means.

Here, with regard to the operating means, there is a possibility that the operating mode switches from continuous tapping to long pressing due to reasons such as fatigue. At this time, if the acceptance of the operation is not quickly switched from determining the number of times to determining the period, there is a high possibility that the valid period will elapse in vain due to the time lag. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the second detection position for determining the period is shifted from the first detection position for determining the number of times so that it is on the back side in the predetermined direction (operation direction), For example, there is no need to distinguish between a continuous press operation and a long press operation at the first detection position. Therefore, the time lag for switching from frequency determination to period determination can be minimized. Thereby, the effect of encouraging the operation of the operating means and improving the attention level to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the operating stroke during the repeated tapping operation is shorter than the operating stroke during the long press operation, the above function does not make the repeated tapping operation difficult.

Feature M3. a first suggestion means that indicates to the player that the first detection position has been reached by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit when the operation unit has reached the first detection position;
and a second suggestion means that indicates to the player that the second detection position has been reached by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit when the operation unit reaches the second detection position. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.

As shown in feature M1, etc., in a configuration in which the number of hits determination and the consecutive hit determination are switched depending on the operation position of the operation part, by transmitting a tactile change to the hand touching the operation part when each detection position is reached. , it is possible to clearly communicate that the detection position has been reached.

Feature M4. The second detection position is set to be further back in the predetermined direction than the first detection position,
A feature characterized in that the first suggestion means has a contact portion that comes into contact with the operating portion from the back side in the predetermined direction when the operating portion reaches the first detection position. The gaming machine described in M3.

According to feature M4, when the operation part reaches the first detection position and contacts the abutting part in a predetermined direction during a continuous tapping operation, a tactile change can be transmitted through the operation part.

Feature M5. The abutting section is configured to be displaced in the predetermined direction following the displacement of the operating section in the predetermined direction after abutting the operating section at the first detection position. The gaming machine according to feature M4.

After the operating portion and the contact portion contact each other at the first detection position, the operating portion and the contact portion are integrally displaced in a predetermined direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid the displacement of the operating section to the second detection position from being blocked by the contact section, and to suitably exhibit the various effects shown in feature M4, feature M1, etc. I can do it.

Feature M6. The second suggesting means is configured to indicate that the operating unit has reached the second detection position by increasing the operating resistance in a stepwise manner when the operation unit reaches the second detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5.

As shown in this feature, the operation resistance increases in a stepwise manner when the second detection position is reached, which suggests that no further pushing is required. It can be used to help keep things in place.

Feature M7. The operating means is
the operating section; a base section (movable base 741) that is provided on the back side of the operating section in the predetermined direction and configured to be movable relative to the operating section in the predetermined direction; and an operation unit (button unit 720) having an urging section (coil spring 745) disposed between the base section and urging the operation section in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
a holder (holder unit 750) that holds the operating unit movably in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction;
When the operating portion is displaced to the first detection position due to an operation by a player, the operating portion and the base portion are configured to abut in the predetermined direction, and the operating portion and the base portion are in contact with each other in the predetermined direction. Feature M1 is characterized in that, after the two contact each other, the entire operation unit is displaced toward the second detection position toward the back in the predetermined direction in response to the operation of the operation section. Or the gaming machine described in feature M2.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operating portion reaches the first detection position, the operating portion and the base portion come into contact and a tactile change occurs. As the operation continues, the operating section, the base section, and the biasing section are integrally displaced in a predetermined direction toward the second detection position. With such a configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player that the first detection position has been reached through a tactile change.

Feature M8. The base portion is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation portion that has reached the first detection position,
The number of times determining means is configured to determine whether or not the operating section has reached the first detection position based on detection information from the detection sensor,
The period determination means determines the period of time when the detection information indicating that the first detection position has been reached is received from the detection sensor and the operation section is located at the second detection position. The gaming machine according to feature M7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to perform determination.

According to feature M8, the number of times is determined based on the detection information from the detection sensor. On the other hand, the period is determined when detection information indicating that the first detection position has been reached is received from the detection sensor and the operation unit is located at the second detection position. In this way, by incorporating the detection information for determining the number of times into the period determination, it is possible to immediately terminate the period determination when the hand is removed from the operating section disposed at the second detection position. In other words, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of period determination while suppressing the complexity of the structure.

Feature M9. comprising a switching means for switching the form of the operating means between a first form and a second form in which the amount of protrusion of the operating part is larger than that of the first form, by displacing the operating unit in the predetermined direction;
The effect executing means is configured to perform a process when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determining means to have reached the first detection position reaches a predetermined number under a situation where the operating means is in the second mode; Alternatively, the special effect is executed when the period during which the period determination means determines that the vehicle is located at the second detection position is a predetermined period;
The second detection position is set at a midway position of the operation stroke in the second mode,
The gaming machine according to feature M7 or feature M8, further comprising means for increasing the operating resistance of the operating section when the second detection position is reached.

The configuration in which the operating means switches between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature is advantageous in increasing the attention to the operating means. Here, when generating the special effect in the second form, it is assumed that the extended operation stroke makes it difficult to understand the long press operation. Here, if the maximum pressing position is set to the second detection position, the operation stroke during long pressing becomes excessively large, which tends to give the impression that it is troublesome to the player. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the second detection position is set in the middle of the operation stroke, and the operation resistance is increased when the second detection position is reached. It can be suggested that the detection position has been reached. With such a configuration, the above problem can be suitably solved.

Feature M10. According to any one of features M1 to M9, the period determination means is configured to start counting the period when the operation section reaches the second detection position. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which period counting is immediately started upon arrival at the second detection position, the responsiveness of period counting can be suitably improved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features M1 to M10 may be applied to the features A to L groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means (game ball firing handle 45) operated by a player, a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a It is equipped with a ball path (guiding path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (such as a nail) arranged in the game area, and each of these game parts A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing section (general prize opening 81, etc.).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 14... Front door frame, 27... Speaker part, 22... Window part, 24... Annular illumination part, 40... Performance button device, 45... Game ball firing handle, 80... Game board unit , 82... Variable winning device, 83a... Upper operating port, 83b... Lower operating port, 87... Main display section, 142... Display control device, 143... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device, 253... Symbol display device , 253a...display screen, 300...first movable production device, 400...second movable production device, 602...MPU, 603...ROM, 604...RAM, 701...operation block, 720...button unit, 721...operation button, 725 ...Light emitting block, 741...Movable base, 750...Holder unit, 753...Stepping motor, 785...Lift mechanism, 791...Detection sensor, 792...Rotary encoder, 795...Hold mechanism, 803...Third movable presentation device, 804...No. 4 movable production device, 912...MPU, 913...ROM, 914...RAM, AR1 to AR8...arrow image, CA...character image, CP...detection position, D...main display section, DL...lower operation opening display section, DU ...Indicator for upper operating port, EF...Effect, LT1 to LT14...Light emitting part, TQ...Reference torque.

Claims (1)

an operating means provided on the front of the gaming machine and having an operating section that is operated by a player in a predetermined direction;
A gaming machine comprising a production execution means for executing a production corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation section,
a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the valid operation period;
and a period determination means for determining a period during which the operation section is located at the second detection position during the operation validity period,
The effect execution means is configured to perform a process when the number of repetitions determined by the number of times determination means to have reached the first detection position reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the period determination means determines that the first detection position has been reached. It has means for executing a special performance as the operation corresponding performance when the determined period becomes a predetermined period,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second detection position is set to be further back than the first detection position in the predetermined direction.

Images